LM Precal Grade11 Sem 1

PY
Precalculus
O
C
Learners Material
E D
This learning resource was collaboratively developed and

EP
reviewed by educators from public and private schools, colleges, and/or

universities. We encourage teachers and other education stakeholders
to email their feedback, comments and recommendations to the
Department of Education at action@deped.gov.ph.
We value your feedback and recommendations.
D
Department of Education
Republic of the Philippines
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Precalculus
Learners Material
First Edition 2016
Republic Act 8293. Section 176 states that: No copyright shall subsist in any work
of the Government of the Philippines. However, prior approval of the government agency or
office wherein the work is created shall be necessary for exploitation of such work for profit.
Such agency or office may, among other things, impose as a condition the payment of
royalties.
Borrowed materials (i.e., songs, stories, poems, pictures, photos, brand names,
trademarks, etc.) included in this learning resource are owned by their respective copyright
holders. DepEd is represented by the Filipinas Copyright Licensing Society (FILCOLS), Inc.
in seeking permission to use these materials from their respective copyright owners. All
means have been exhausted in seeking permission to use these materials. The publisher
PY
and authors do not represent nor claim ownership over them.
Only institutions and companies which have entered an agreement with FILCOLS
and only within the agreed framework may copy from this Manual. Those who have not
entered in an agreement with FILCOLS must, if they wish to copy, contact the publishers
and authors directly.
O
Authors and publishers may email or contact FILCOLS at filcols@gmail.com or
(02) 435-5258, respectively.
Published by the Department of Education

C
Secretary: Br. Armin A. Luistro FSC
Undersecretary: Dina S. Ocampo, PhD
D
Development Team of the Precalculus Learners Material
Joy P. Ascano Jesus Lemuel L. Martin Jr.
E
Arnel D. Olofernes Mark Anthony C. Tolentino, Ph.D

Reviewers:
Jerico B. Bacani, Ph.D Richard B. Eden, Ph.D
EP
Dr. Flordeliza F. Francisco Mark Anthony J. Vidallo

Carly Mae Casteloy Angela Dianne Agustin
Cover Art Illustrator: Quincy D. Gonzales
Team Leader: Ian June L. Garces, Ph.D.
D
Management Team of the Precalculus Learners Material

Bureau of Curriculum Development
Bureau of Learning Resources
Printed in the Philippines by Sunshine Interlinks Publishing House, Inc.

3F Maine City Tower, 236 Tomas Morato Avenue,
Brgy. South Triangle, Quezon City
Department of Education-Bureau of Learning Resources (DepEd-BLR)

Office Address: Ground Floor Bonifacio Building, DepEd Complex
Meralco Avenue, Pasig City, Philippines 1600
Telefax: (02) 634-1054, 634-1072, 631-4985
E-mail Address: blr.lrqad@deped.gov.ph / blr.lrpd@deped.gov.ph
Table of Contents
To the Precalculus Learners 1
DepEd Curriculum Guide for Precalculus 2
PY
Unit 1: Analytic Geometry 6
Lesson 1.1: Introduction to Conic Sections and Circles . . . . . . . . 7

1.1.1: An Overview of Conic Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
O
1.1.2: Definition and Equation of a Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.1.3: More Properties of Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
C
1.1.4: Situational Problems Involving Circles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Lesson 1.2: Parabolas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

D
1.2.1: Definition and Equation of a Parabola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.2.2: More Properties of Parabolas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
E
1.2.3: Situational Problems Involving Parabolas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Lesson 1.3: Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

EP
1.3.1: Definition and Equation of an Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

1.3.2: More Properties of Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.3.3: Situational Problems Involving Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
D
Lesson 1.4: Hyperbolas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

1.4.1: Definition and Equation of a Hyperbola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.4.2: More Properties of Hyperbolas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
1.4.3: Situational Problems Involving Hyperbolas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Lesson 1.5: More Problems on Conic Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

1.5.1: Identifying the Conic Section by Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1.5.2: Problems Involving Different Conic Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
iii
Lesson 1.6: Systems of Nonlinear Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.6.1: Review of Techniques in Solving Systems of Linear
Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1.6.2: Solving Systems of Equations Using Substitution . . . . . . . . . 69
1.6.3: Solving Systems of Equations Using Elimination . . . . . . . . . . 70
1.6.4: Applications of Systems of Nonlinear Equations . . . . . . . . . . 73
Unit 2: Mathematical Induction 80
Lesson 2.1: Review of Sequences and Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
PY
Lesson 2.2: Sigma Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
2.2.1: Writing and Evaluating Sums in Sigma Notation . . . . . . . . . 87
2.2.2: Properties of Sigma Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
O
Lesson 2.3: Principle of Mathematical Induction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2.3.1: Proving Summation Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
C
2.3.2: Proving Divisibility Statements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
? 2.3.3: Proving Inequalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
D
Lesson 2.4: The Binomial Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
2.4.1: Pascals Triangle and the Concept of Combination . . . . . . . . 109
E
2.4.2: The Binomial Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

EP
2.4.3: Terms of a Binomial Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

? 2.4.4: Approximation and Combination Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Unit 3: Trigonometry 123

D
Lesson 3.1: Angles in a Unit Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

3.1.1: Angle Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
3.1.2: Coterminal Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3.1.3: Arc Length and Area of a Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Lesson 3.2: Circular Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

3.2.1: Circular Functions on Real Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3.2.2: Reference Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Lesson 3.3: Graphs of Circular Functions and Situational
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3.3.1: Graphs of y = sin x and y = cos x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
3.3.2: Graphs of y = a sin bx and y = a cos bx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3.3.3: Graphs of y = a sin b(x c) + d and
y = a cos b(x c) + d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
3.3.4: Graphs of Cosecant and Secant Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
3.3.5: Graphs of Tangent and Cotangent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
3.3.6: Simple Harmonic Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
PY
Lesson 3.4: Fundamental Trigonometric Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3.4.1: Domain of an Expression or Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3.4.2: Identity and Conditional Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
O
3.4.3: The Fundamental Trigonometric Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
3.4.4: Proving Trigonometric Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
C
Lesson 3.5: Sum and Difference Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.5.1: The Cosine Difference and Sum Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
D
3.5.2: The Cofunction Identities and the Sine Sum and
Difference Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
3.5.3: The Tangent Sum and Difference Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
E
Lesson 3.6: Double-Angle and Half-Angle Identities . . . . . . . . . . . 192

EP
3.6.1: Double-Angle Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

3.6.2: Half-Angle Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Lesson 3.7: Inverse Trigonometric Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

D
3.7.1: Inverse Sine Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

3.7.2: Inverse Cosine Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
3.7.3: Inverse Tangent Function and the Remaining Inverse
Trigonometric Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Lesson 3.8: Trigonometric Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

3.8.1: Solutions of a Trigonometric Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
3.8.2: Equations with One Term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
3.8.3: Equations with Two or More Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Lesson 3.9: Polar Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
3.9.1: Polar Coordinates of a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
3.9.2: From Polar to Rectangular, and Vice Versa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
3.9.3: Basic Polar Graphs and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Answers to Odd-Numbered Exercises in Supplementary Problems

and All Exercises in Topic Tests 255
References 290
PY
O
C
E D
EP
D
To the Precalculus Learners
The Precalculus course bridges basic mathematics and calculus. This course
completes your foundational knowledge on algebra, geometry, and trigonometry.
It provides you with conceptual understanding and computational skills that are
prerequisites for Basic Calculus and future STEM courses.
Based on the Curriculum Guide for Precalculus of the Department of Edu-
cation (see pages 2-5), the primary aim of this Learning Manual is to give you
an adequate stand-alone material that can be used for the Grade 11 Precalculus
course.
PY
The Manual is divided into three units: analytic geometry, summation no-
tation and mathematical induction, and trigonometry. Each unit is composed
of lessons that bring together related learning competencies in the unit. Each
lesson is further divided into sub-lessons that focus on one or two competencies
for effective learning.
O
At the end of each lesson, more examples are given in Solved Examples to
reinforce the ideas and skills being developed in the lesson. You have the oppor-
C
tunity to check your understanding of the lesson by solving the Supplementary
Problems. Finally, two sets of Topic Test are included to prepare you for the
exam.
D
Answers, solutions, or hints to odd-numbered items in the Supplementary
Problems and all items in the Topic Tests are provided at the end of the Manual
to guide you while solving them. We hope that you will use this feature of the
E
Manual responsibly.
Some items are marked with a star. A starred sub-lesson means the discussion
EP
and accomplishment of the sub-lesson are optional. This will be decided by your
teacher. On the other hand, a starred example or exercise means the use of
calculator is required.
We hope that you will find this Learning Manual helpful and convenient to
D
use. We encourage you to carefully study this Manual and solve the exercises
yourselves with the guidance of your teacher. Although great effort has been
put into this Manual for technical correctness and precision, any mistake found
and reported to the Team is a gain for other students. Thank you for your
cooperation.
The Precalculus LM Team
K to 12 BASIC EDUCATION CURRICULUM
SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, ENGINEERING AND MATHEMATICS (STEM) SPECIALIZED SUBJECT
Grade: 11 Semester: First Semester

Core Subject Title: Pre-Calculus No. of Hours/ Semester: 80 hours/ semester
Pre-requisite (if needed):
D
Subject Description: At the end of the course, the students must be able to apply concepts and solve problems involving conic sections, systems of nonlinear equations,
series and mathematical induction, circular and trigonometric functions, trigonometric identities, and polar coordinate system.
CONTENT PERFORMANCE
CONTENT LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE
EP
STANDARDS STANDARDS
Analytic The learners The learners shall be able The learners...
Geometry demonstrate an to...
understanding
of...
E 1. illustrate the different types of conic sections: parabola, ellipse,
circle, hyperbola, and degenerate cases.***
STEM_PC11AG-Ia-1
model situations 2. define a circle. STEM_PC11AG-Ia-2
2
key concepts of
appropriately and solve
problems accurately using
D 3. determine the standard form of equation of a circle STEM_PC11AG-Ia-3
conic sections and conic sections and systems 4. graph a circle in a rectangular coordinate system STEM_PC11AG-Ia-4
systems of of nonlinear equations 5. define a parabola STEM_PC11AG-Ia-5
nonlinear 6. determine the standard form of equation of a parabola STEM_PC11AG-Ib-1
equations 7.
8.
C
graph a parabola in a rectangular coordinate system
define an ellipse
STEM_PC11AG-Ib-2
STEM_PC11AG-Ic-1
9. determine the standard form of equation of an ellipse STEM_PC11AG-Ic-2
10. graph an ellipse in a rectangular coordinate system STEM_PC11AG-Ic-3
11.
12.
O
define a hyperbola
determine the standard form of equation of a hyperbola
STEM_PC11AG-Id-1
STEM_PC11AG-Id-2
PY
K to 12 Senior High School STEM Specialized Subject Pre-Calculus December 2013 Page 1 of 4
CONTENT PERFORMANCE
STANDARDS STANDARDS
D 13. graph a hyperbola in a rectangular coordinate system STEM_PC11AG-Id-3
14. recognize the equation and important characteristics of the
STEM_PC11AG-Ie-1
different types of conic sections
15. solves situational problems involving conic sections STEM_PC11AG-Ie-2
16. illustrate systems of nonlinear equations STEM_PC11AG-If-1

17. determine the solutions of systems of nonlinear equations using
EP
STEM_PC11AG-If-g-1
techniques such as substitution, elimination, and graphing***
18. solve situational problems involving systems
STEM_PC11AG-Ig-2
of nonlinear equations
Series and
Mathematical
key concepts of
series and
E
keenly observe and
investigate patterns, and
1. illustrate a series
STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-1
Induction mathematical formulate appropriate 2. differentiate a series from a sequence STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-2
3
induction and the mathematical statements 3. use the sigma notation to represent a series STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-3
Binomial and prove them using
D 4. illustrate the Principle of Mathematical Induction STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-4
Theorem. mathematical induction 5. apply mathematical induction in proving identities STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-i-1
and/or Binomial Theorem. 6. illustrate Pascals Triangle in the expansion of + for small
STEM_PC11SMI-Ii-2
positive integral values of
7. prove the Binomial Theorem STEM_PC11SMI-Ii-3
8.
C
determine any term of + , where is a positive integer,
STEM_PC11SMI-Ij-1
without expanding
9. solve problems using mathematical induction and the Binomial
STEM_PC11SMI-Ij-2
O
Theorem
PY
CONTENT PERFORMANCE
STANDARDS STANDARDS
Trigonometry key concepts of 1. formulate and solve 1. illustrate the unit circle and the relationship between the linear
circular functions, accurately situational and angular measures of a central angle in a unit circle STEM_PC11T-IIa-1
trigonometric problems involving 2. convert degree measure to radian measure and vice versa STEM_PC11T-IIa-2
D
identities, inverse
trigonometric
circular functions
3. illustrate angles in standard position and coterminal angles STEM_PC11T-IIa-3
functions, and 4. illustrate the different circular functions STEM_PC11T-IIb-1
the polar
coordinate 5. uses reference angles to find exact values of circular functions STEM_PC11T-IIb-2
system 6. determine the domain and range of the different circular functions STEM_PC11T-IIc-1
7. graph the six circular functions (a) amplitude, (b) period, and (c)
STEM_PC11T-IIc-d-1
phase shift
EP
8. solve problems involving circular functions STEM_PC11T-IId-2
2. apply appropriate 9. determine whether an equation is an identity or a conditional
trigonometric identities in STEM_PC11T-IIe-1
equation
E
solving situational
problems
10.
11.
derive the fundamental trigonometric identities
derive trigonometric identities involving sum and difference of
STEM_PC11T-IIe-2
STEM_PC11T-IIe-3
angles
4
12. derive the double and half-angle formulas STEM_PC11T-IIf-1
D 13. simplify trigonometric expressions STEM_PC11T-IIf-2
14. prove other trigonometric identities STEM_PC11T-IIf-g-1
15. solve situational problems involving trigonometric identities STEM_PC11T-IIg-2
3. formulate and solve 16. illustrate the domain and range of the inverse trigonometric
STEM_PC11T-IIh-1
accurately situational functions.
problems involving 17.
C
evaluate an inverse trigonometric expression. STEM_PC11T-IIh-2
appropriate trigonometric 18. solve trigonometric equations. STEM_PC11T-IIh-i-1
functions 19. solve situational problems involving inverse trigonometric
STEM_PC11T-IIi-2
functions and trigonometric equations
4. formulate and solve 20.
O
locate points in polar coordinate system STEM_PC11T-IIj-1
accurately situational 21. convert the coordinates of a point from rectangular to polar
STEM_PC11T-IIj-2
problems involving the systems and vice versa
polar coordinate system 22. solve situational problems involving polar coordinate system STEM_PC11T-IIj-3
***Suggestion for ICT-enhanced lesson when available and where appropriate

PY
Code Book Legend
Sample: STEM_PC11AG-Ia-1
D
LEGEND SAMPLE DOMAIN/ COMPONENT CODE
Learning Area and Science, Technology,

Strand/ Subject or Engineering and Mathematics Analytic Geometry AG
EP
Specialization Pre-Calculus
First Entry
STEM_PC11AG Series and Mathematical Induction SMI

Grade Level Grade 11
E
5
Uppercase Domain/Content/ Trigonometry T
Letter/s Component/ Topic
D
Analytic Geometry
-
Roman Numeral
*Zero if no specific Quarter First Quarter I
quarter
C
Lowercase
Letter/s
*Put a hyphen (-) in
between letters to
Week Week one
O a
indicate more than a
specific week
-
illustrate the different types
of conic sections: parabola,
Arabic Number Competency 1
PY
ellipse, circle, hyperbola,
and degenerate cases
Unit 1
Analytic Geometry
PY
O
C
E D
EP
San Juanico Bridge, by Morten Nrbe, 21 June 2009,
https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File%3ASan Juanico Bridge 2.JPG. Public Domain.

D
Stretching from Samar to Leyte with a total length of more than two kilome-
ters, the San Juanico Bridge has been serving as one of the main thoroughfares
of economic and social development in the country since its completion in 1973.
Adding picturesque effect on the whole architecture, geometric structures are
subtly built to serve other purposes. The arch-shaped support on the main span
of the bridge helps maximize its strength to withstand mechanical resonance and
aeroelastic flutter brought about by heavy vehicles and passing winds.
6
Lesson 1.1. Introduction to Conic Sections and Circles
Learning Outcomes of the Lesson

At the end of the lesson, the student is able to:
(1) illustrate the different types of conic sections: parabola, ellipse, circle, hyper-
bola, and degenerate cases;
(2) define a circle;
(3) determine the standard form of equation of a circle;
PY
(4) graph a circle in a rectangular coordinate system; and
(5) solve situational problems involving conic sections (circles).
Lesson Outline
(1) Introduction of the four conic sections, along with the degenerate conics
O
(2) Definition of a circle
(3) Derivation of the standard equation of a circle
(4) Graphing circles
C
(5) Solving situational problems involving circles
D
Introduction
We present the conic sections, a particular class of curves which sometimes
E
appear in nature and which have applications in other fields. In this lesson, we
first illustrate how each of these curves is obtained from the intersection of a
EP
plane and a cone, and then discuss the first of their kind, circles. The other conic
sections will be covered in the next lessons.
1.1.1. An Overview of Conic Sections

D
We introduce the conic sections (or conics), a particular class of curves which
oftentimes appear in nature and which have applications in other fields. One
of the first shapes we learned, a circle, is a conic. When you throw a ball, the
trajectory it takes is a parabola. The orbit taken by each planet around the sun
is an ellipse. Properties of hyperbolas have been used in the design of certain
telescopes and navigation systems. We will discuss circles in this lesson, leaving
parabolas, ellipses, and hyperbolas for subsequent lessons.
Circle (Figure 1.1) - when the plane is horizontal
Ellipse (Figure 1.1) - when the (tilted) plane intersects only one cone to form
a bounded curve
7
Parabola (Figure 1.2) - when the plane intersects only one cone to form an
unbounded curve
Hyperbola (Figure 1.3) - when the plane (not necessarily vertical) intersects
both cones to form two unbounded curves (each called a branch of the hyper-
bola)
PY
O
Figure 1.1 Figure 1.2 Figure 1.3
We can draw these conic sections (also called conics) on a rectangular co-
ordinate plane and find their equations. To be able to do this, we will present
C
equivalent definitions of these conic sections in subsequent sections, and use these
to find the equations.
There are other ways for a plane and the cones to intersect, to form what are
D
referred to as degenerate conics: a point, one line, and two lines. See Figures 1.4,
1.5 and 1.6.
E
EP
D
1.1.2. Definition and Equation of a Circle
A circle may also be considered a special kind of ellipse (for the special case when
the tilted plane is horizontal). As we get to know more about a circle, we will
also be able to distinguish more between these two conics.
8
See Figure 1.7, with the point C(3, 1) shown. From the figure, the distance
of A(2, 1) from pC is AC = 5. By the distance formula, the distance of B(6, 5)
from C is BC = (6 3)2 + (5 1)2 = 5. There are other points P such that
P C = 5. The collection of all such points which are 5 units away from C, forms
a circle.
PY
O
Figure 1.7 Figure 1.8
C
Let C be a given point. The set of all points P having the same
distance from C is called a circle. The point C is called the center of
D
the circle, and the common distance its radius.
E
The term radius is both used to refer to a segment from the center C to a
point P on the circle, and the length of this segment.
EP
See Figure 1.8, where a circle is drawn. It has center C(h, k) and radius r > 0.
A point P (x, y) is on the circle if and only if P C = r. For any such point then,
its coordinates should satisfy the following.
PC = r
D
p
(x h)2 + (y k)2 = r
(x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2
This is the standard equation of the circle with center C(h, k) and radius r. If
the center is the origin, then h = 0 and k = 0. The standard equation is then
x2 + y 2 = r 2 .
9
Example 1.1.1. In each item, give the
standard equation of the circle satisfy-
ing the given conditions.
(1) center at the origin, radius 4

(2) center (4, 3), radius 7
(3) circle in Figure 1.7
(4) circle A in Figure 1.9
(5) circle B in Figure 1.9
(6) center (5, 6), tangent to the y-
axis Figure 1.9
PY
(7) center (5, 6), tangent to the x-axis
(8) It has a diameter with endpoints A(1, 4) and B(4, 2).
Solution. (1) x2 + y 2 = 16
O
(2) (x + 4)2 + (y 3)2 = 7
(3) The center is (3, 1) and the radius is 5, so the equation is (x 3)2 + (y 1)2 =
25.
C
(4) By inspection, the center is (2, 1) and the radius is 4. The equation is
(x + 2)2 + (y + 1)2 = 16.
D
(5) Similarly by inspection, we have (x 3)2 + (y 2)2 = 9.
(6) The center is 5 units away from the y-axis, so the radius is r = 5 (you can
E
make a sketch to see why). The equation is (x 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 25.

(7) Similarly, since the center is 6 units away from the x-axis, the equation is
EP
(x 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 36.

(8) The center C is the midpoint of A and B: C = 1+4 , 4+2 = 32 , 3 . The

q 2 q 2
2
radius is then r = AC = 1 32 + (4 3)2 = 29
4
. The circle has
2
equation x 23 + (y 3)2 = 29 2

.
D
1.1.3. More Properties of Circles
After expanding, the standard equation

2
3 29
x + (y 3)2 =
2 4
can be rewritten as
x2 + y 2 3x 6y + 4 = 0,
an equation of the circle in general form.
10
If the equation of a circle is given in the general form
Ax2 + Ay 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0, A 6= 0,
or
x2 + y 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0,
we can determine the standard form by completing the square in both variables.
Completing the square in an expression like x2 + 14x means determining
the term to be added that will produce a perfect polynomial square. Since the
coefficient of x2 is already 1, we take half the coefficient of x and square it, and
we get 49. Indeed, x2 + 14x + 49 = (x + 7)2 is a perfect square. To complete
PY
the square in, say, 3x2 + 18x, we factor the coefficient of x2 from the expression:
3(x2 + 6x), then add 9 inside. When completing a square in an equation, any
extra term introduced on one side should also be added to the other side.
Example 1.1.2. Identify the center and radius of the circle with the given equa-
O
tion in each item. Sketch its graph, and indicate the center.
(1) x2 + y 2 6x = 7 C
(2) x2 + y 2 14x + 2y = 14
(3) 16x2 + 16y 2 + 96x 40y = 315
D
Solution. The first step is to rewrite each equation in standard form by complet-
ing the square in x and in y. From the standard equation, we can determine the
center and radius.
E
(1)
EP
x2 6x + y 2 = 7
x2 6x + 9 + y 2 = 7 + 9
(x 3)2 + y 2 = 16
Center (3, 0), r = 4, Figure 1.10

D
(2)
x2 14x + y 2 + 2y = 14
x2 14x + 49 + y 2 + 2y + 1 = 14 + 49 + 1
(x 7)2 + (y + 1)2 = 36
Center (7, 1), r = 6, Figure 1.11

(3)
16x2 + 96x + 16y 2 40y = 315
11

2 5 2
16(x + 6x) + 16 y y = 315
2

2 2 5 25 25
16(x + 6x + 9) + 16 y y + = 315 + 16(9) + 16
2 16 16
2
5
16(x + 3)2 + 16 y = 484
4
2 2
2 5 484 121 11
(x + 3) + y = = =
4 16 4 2
Center 3, 54 , r = 5.5, Figure 1.12. 2

PY
O
C
In the standard equation (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2 , both the two squared
D
terms on the left side have coefficient 1. This is the reason why in the preceding
example, we divided by 16 at the last equation.
E
1.1.4. Situational Problems Involving Circles

EP
Let us now take a look at some situational problems involving circles.

? Example 1.1.3. A street with two lanes, each 10 ft wide, goes through a
semicircular tunnel with radius 12 ft. How high is the tunnel at the edge of each
lane? Round off to 2 decimal places.
D
12
Solution. We draw a coordinate system with origin at the middle of the highway,
as shown. Because of the given radius, the tunnels boundary is on the circle
x2 + y 2 = 122 . Point P is the point on the arc just above the edge of a lane, so
its x-coordinate is 10. Weneed its y-coordinate. We then solve 102 + y 2 = 122
for y > 0, giving us y = 2 11 6.63 ft. 2
Example 1.1.4. A piece of a broken plate was dug up in an archaeological site.
It was put on top of a grid, as shown in Figure 1.13, with the arc of the plate
passing through A(7, 0), B(1, 4) and C(7, 2). Find its center, and the standard
equation of the circle describing the boundary of the plate.
PY
O
C
D
Figure 1.13
E
EP
D
Figure 1.14
Solution. We first determine the center. It is the intersection of the perpendicular

bisectors of AB and BC (see Figure 1.14). Recall that, in a circle, the perpen-
dicular bisector of any
chord passes through40 the center. Since the midpoint M
of AB is 7+12
, 0+4
2
= (3, 2), and m AB = 1+7
= 12 , the perpendicular bisector
of AB has equation y 2 = 2(x + 3), or equivalently, y = 2x 4.
13
Since the midpoint N of BC is 1+7 4+2
= (4, 3), and mBC = 24 = 13 ,

2
, 2 71
the perpendicular bisector of BC has equation y 3 = 3(x 4), or equivalently,
y = 3x 9.
The intersection of the two lines y = 2x 4 and y = 3x 9 is (1, 6) (by
solving a system of linear equations). We can take the radius as the distance of
this point from any of A, B or C (its most convenient to use B in this case). We
then get r = 10. The standard equation is thus (x 1)2 + (y + 6)2 = 100. 2
More Solved Examples
PY
1. In each item, give the standard equation of the circle satisying the given con-
ditions.
(a) center at the origin, contains (0, 3)
(b) center (1, 5), diameter 8
(c) circle A in Figure 1.15
O
(d) circle B in Figure 1.15
C
(e) circle C in Figure 1.15
D
(f) center (2, 3), tangent to the y-
axis
E
(g) center (2, 3), tangent to the x-

axis
EP
Figure 1.15
(h) contains the points (2, 0) and
(8, 0), radius 5
Solution:
D
(a) The radius is 3, so the equation is x2 + y 2 = 9.

(b) The radius is 8/2 = 4, so the equation is (x 1)2 + (y 5)2 = 16.
(c) The center is (2, 2) and the radius is 2,
so the equation is (x + 2)2 + (y 2)2 = 4.
(d) The center is (2, 3) and the radius is 1,
so the equation is (x 2)2 + (y 3)2 = 1.
(e) The center is (1, 1) and by the
Pythagorean Theorem,
the radius
(see
2 2
Figure 1.16) is 2 + 2 = 8, so the
equation is (x 1)2 + (x + 1)2 = 8.
Figure 1.16
14
(f) The radius is 3, so the equation is (x + 2)2 + (y + 3)2 = 9.
(g) The radius is 2, so the equation is (x + 2)2 + (y + 3)2 = 4.
(h) The distance between (2, 0) and (8, 0) is 10; since the radius is 5, these
two points are endpoints of a diameter. Then the circle has center at
(3, 0) and radius 5, so its equation is (x 3)2 + y 2 = 25.
2. Identify the center and radius of the circle with the given equation in each
item. Sketch its graph, and indicate the center.
(a) x2 + y 2 + 8y = 33
(b) 4x2 + 4y 2 16x + 40y + 67 = 0
PY
(c) 4x2 + 12x + 4y 2 + 16y 11 = 0
Solution:
(a)
O
x2 + y 2 + 8y = 33
x2 + y 2 + 8y + 16 = 33 + 16
x2 + (y + 4)2 = 49
C
Center (0, 4), radius 7, see Figure 1.17.
(b)
D
4x2 + 4y 2 16x + 40y + 67 = 0
67
x2 4x + y 2 + 10y =
E
4
67
x2 4x + 4 + y 2 + 10y + 25 = + 4 + 25
EP
4
2
2 2 49 7
(x 2) + (y + 5) = =
4 2
Center (2, 5), radius 3.5, see Figure 1.18.
D
(c)
4x2 + 12x + 4y 2 + 16y 11 = 0
11
x2 + 3x + y 2 + 4y =
4
9 11 9
x2 + 3x + + y 2 + 4y + 4 = + +4
4 4 4
2
3
x+ + (y + 2)2 = 9
2

3
Center , 2 , radius 3, see Figure 1.19.
2
15
3. A circular play area with radius 3 m is
to be partitioned into two sections using
PY
a straight fence as shown in Figure 1.20.
How long should the fence be?
Solution: To determine the length of the
fence, we need to determine the coordi-
nates of its endpoints. From Figure 1.20,
O
the endpoints have x coordinate 1 and
are on the circle x2 + y2 = 9. Then
1 + y 2 = 9, or y = 2 2. Therefore,
the length of the fence is 4 2 5.66 m.
C Figure 1.20
4. A Cartesian coordinate system was used to identify locations on a circu-
lar track. As shown in Figure 1.21, the circular track contains the points
D
A(2, 4), B(2, 3), C(5, 2). Find the total length of the track.
E
EP
D

Solution: The segment AB is vertical and has midpoint (2, 0.5), so its
perpendicular bisector has equation y = 0.5. On the other hand, the segment
BC has slope 1/7 and midpoint (1.5, 2.5), so its perpendicular bisector has
equation y 2.5 = 7(x 1.5), or 7x y 8 = 0.
The center of the circle is the intersection of y = 0.5 and 7x y 8 = 0;
15
that is, the center is at 14 , 12 .
The radius of the circle is the distance from ther
center to any of the points A,
2125 5
B, or C; by the distance formula, the radius is = 170. Therefore,
98 14
16
the total length of the track (its circumference), is
5
2 170 29.26 units.
14
Supplementary Problems 1.1

Identify the center and radius of the circle with the given equation in each item.
Sketch its graph, and indicate the center.
1
1. x2 + y 2 =
PY
4
2. 5x2 + 5y 2 = 125
2
2 3
3. (x + 4) + y =1
O
4
4. x2 4x + y 2 4y 8 = 0 C
5. x2 + y 2 14x + 12y = 36
6. x2 + 10x + y 2 16y 11 = 0
D
7. 9x2 + 36x + 9y 2 + 72y + 155 = 0
8. 9x2 + 9y 2 6x + 24y = 19
E
9. 16x2 + 80x + 16y 2 112y + 247 = 0

EP
Find the standard equation of the circle which satisfies the given conditions.

10. center at the origin, radius 5 3
D
11. center at (17, 5), radius 12
12. center at (8, 4), contains (4, 2)
13. center at (15, 7), tangent to the x-axis
14. center at (15, 7), tangent to the y-axis
15. center at (15, 7), tangent to the line y = 10
16. center at (15, 7), tangent to the line x = 8
17. has a diameter with endpoints (3, 1) and (7, 6)
17

9 3
18. has a diameter with endpoints , 4 and , 2
2 2
19. concentric with x2 + 20x + y 2 14y + 145 = 0, diameter 12
20. concentric with x2 2x + y 2 2y 23 = 0 and has 1/5 the area
21. concentric with x2 + 4x + y 2 6y + 9 = 0 and has the same circumference as

x2 + 14x + y 2 + 10y + 62 = 0
22. contains the points (3, 3), (7, 1), (0, 2)
23. contains the points (1, 4), (1, 2), (4, 3)
PY
24. center at (3, 2) and tangent to the line 2x 3y = 1
25. center at (5, 1) and tangent to the line x + y + 10 = 0
26. has center with x-coordinate 4 and tangent to the line x + 3y = 9 at (3, 4)
O
27. A stadium is shaped as in Figure 1.23, where its left and right ends are circular
C
arcs both with center at C. What is the length of the stadium 50 m from one
of the straight sides?
E D
EP
Figure 1.23
28. A waterway in a theme park has a
D
semicircular cross section with di-

ameter 11 ft. The boats that are
going to be used in this waterway
have rectangular cross sections and
are found to submerge 1 ft into the
water. If the waterway is to be
filled with water 4.5 ft deep, what is
the maximum possible width of the Figure 1.24
boats?
18
Lesson 1.2. Parabolas

(1) define a parabola;
(2) determine the standard form of equation of a parabola;
(3) graph a parabola in a rectangular coordinate system; and
(4) solve situational problems involving conic sections (parabolas).
PY
Lesson Outline
(1) Definition of a parabola
(2) Derivation of the standard equation of a parabola
O
(3) Graphing parabolas
(4) Solving situational problems involving parabolas
C
Introduction
A parabola is one of the conic sections. We have already seen parabolas which
D
open upward or downward, as graphs of quadratic functions. Here, we will see
parabolas opening to the left or right. Applications of parabolas are presented
at the end.
E
1.2.1. Definition and Equation of a Parabola

EP
Consider the point F (0, 2) and the line ` having equation y = 2, as shown in
Figure 1.25. What are the distances of A(4, 2) from F and from `? (The latter
is taken as the distance of A from A` , the point on ` closest to A). How about
D
the distances of B(8, 8) from F and from ` (from B` )?
AF = 4 and AA` = 4
p
BF = (8 0)2 + (8 2)2 = 10 and BB` = 10
There are other points P such that P F = P P` (where P` is the closest point on
line `). The collection of all such points forms a shape called a parabola.
Let F be a given point, and ` a given line not containing F . The set of
all points P such that its distances from F and from ` are the same, is
called a parabola. The point F is its focus and the line ` its directrix.
19
Figure 1.25
PY
O
C
D
Figure 1.26
Consider a parabola with focus F (0, c) and directrix ` having equation y = c.
E
See Figure 1.26. The focus and directrix are c units above and below, respectively,
the origin. Let P (x, y) be a point on the parabola so P F = P P` , where P` is the
point on ` closest to P . The point P has to be on the same side of the directrix
EP
as the focus (if P was below, it would be closer to ` than it is from F ).
P F = P P`
p
x2 + (y c)2 = y (c) = y + c
D
x2 + y 2 2cy + c2 = y 2 + 2cy + c2
x2 = 4cy
The vertex V is the point midway between the focus and the directrix. This
equation, x2 = 4cy, is then the standard equation of a parabola opening upward
with vertex V (0, 0).
Suppose the focus is F (0, c) and the directrix is y = c. In this case, a
point P on the resulting parabola would be below the directrix (just like the
focus).
p Instead of opening upward, it will open downward. Consequently, P F =
x2 + (y + c)2 and P P` = c y (you may draw a version of Figure 1.26 for
this case). Computations similar to the one done above will lead to the equation
20
x2 = 4cy.
We collect here the features of the graph of a parabola with standard equation
x2 = 4cy or x2 = 4cy, where c > 0.
PY
O
C
D
(1) vertex : origin V (0, 0)

E
If the parabola opens upward, the vertex is the lowest point. If the
parabola opens downward, the vertex is the highest point.
EP
(2) directrix : the line y = c or y = c

The directrix is c units below or above the vertex.
(3) focus: F (0, c) or F (0, c)
D
The focus is c units above or below the vertex.

Any point on the parabola has the same distance from the focus as it
has from the directrix.
(4) axis of symmetry: x = 0 (the y-axis)
This line divides the parabola into two parts which are mirror images
of each other.
Example 1.2.1. Determine the focus and directrix of the parabola with the
given equation. Sketch the graph, and indicate the focus, directrix, vertex, and
axis of symmetry.
21
(1) x2 = 12y (2) x2 = 6y
Solution. (1) The vertex is V (0, 0) and the parabola opens upward. From 4c =
12, c = 3. The focus, c = 3 units above the vertex, is F (0, 3). The directrix,
3 units below the vertex, is y = 3. The axis of symmetry is x = 0.
PY
O
C
(2) The vertex is V (0, 0) and the parabola opens downward. From 4c = 6, c = 32 .
The focus, c = 32 units below the vertex, is F 0, 23 . The directrix, 32 units

above the vertex, is y = 32 . The axis of symmetry is x = 0.

E D
EP
D
Example 1.2.2. What is the standard equation of the parabola in Figure 1.25?
Solution. From the figure, we deduce that c = 2. The equation is thus x2 =

8y. 2
22
1.2.2. More Properties of Parabolas
The parabolas we considered so far are vertical and have their vertices at the
origin. Some parabolas open instead horizontally (to the left or right), and some
have vertices not at the origin. Their standard equations and properties are given
in the box. The corresponding computations are more involved, but are similar
to the one above, and so are not shown anymore.
In all four cases below, we assume that c > 0. The vertex is V (h, k), and it
lies between the focus F and the directrix `. The focus F is c units away from
the vertex V , and the directrix is c units away from the vertex. Recall that, for
any point on the parabola, its distance from the focus is the same as its distance
PY
from the directrix.
O
C
D
(x h)2 = 4c(y k) (y k)2 = 4c(x h)

E
EP
D
(x h)2 = 4c(y k) (y k)2 = 4c(x h)
directrix `: horizontal directrix `: vertical

axis of symmetry: x=h, vertical axis of symmetry: y=k, horizontal
23
Note the following observations:
The equations are in terms of x h and y k: the vertex coordinates are

subtracted from the corresponding variable. Thus, replacing both h and k
with 0 would yield the case where the vertex is the origin. For instance, this
replacement applied to (x h)2 = 4c(y k) (parabola opening upward) would
yield x2 = 4cy, the first standard equation we encountered (parabola opening
upward, vertex at the origin).
If the x-part is squared, the parabola is vertical; if the y-part is squared,
the parabola is horizontal. In a horizontal parabola, the focus is on the left
or right of the vertex, and the directrix is vertical.
PY
If the coefficient of the linear (non-squared) part is positive, the parabola
opens upward or to the right; if negative, downward or to the left.
Example 1.2.3. Figure 1.27 shows the graph of parabola, with only its focus
and vertex indicated. Find its standard equation. What is its directrix and its
axis of symmetry?
O
Solution. The vertex is V (5, 4) and the focus is F (3, 4). From these, we
deduce the following: h = 5, k = 4, c = 2 (the distance of the focus from the
C
vertex). Since the parabola opens to the left, we use the template (y k)2 =
4c(x h). Our equation is
(y + 4)2 = 8(x 5).
D
Its directrix is c = 2 units to the right of V , which is x = 7. Its axis is the
horizontal line through V : y = 4.
E
EP
D
Figure 1.27
24
The standard equation (y + 4)2 = 8(x 5) from the preceding example can
be rewritten as y 2 + 8x + 8y 24 = 0, an equation of the parabola in general
form.
If the equation is given in the general form Ax2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0 (A and C
are nonzero) or By 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0 (B and C are nonzero), we can determine
the standard form by completing the square in both variables.
Example 1.2.4. Determine the vertex, focus, directrix, and axis of symmetry
of the parabola with the given equation. Sketch the parabola, and include these
points and lines.
(1) y 2 5x + 12y = 16
PY
(2) 5x2 + 30x + 24y = 51
Solution. (1) We complete the square on y, and move x to the other side.
y 2 + 12y = 5x 16
O
y 2 + 12y + 36 = 5x 16 + 36 = 5x + 20
(y + 6)2 = 5(x + 4)
C
The parabola opens to the right. It has vertex V (4, 6). From 4c = 5, we
get c = 45 = 1.25. The focus is c = 1.25 units to the right of V : F (2.75, 6).
The (vertical) directrix is c = 1.25 units to the left of V : x = 5.25. The
D
(horizontal) axis is through V : y = 6.
E
EP
D
25
(2) We complete the square on x, and move y to the other side.
5x2 + 30x = 24y + 51

5(x2 + 6x + 9) = 24y + 51 + 5(9)
5(x + 3)2 = 24y + 96 = 24(y 4)
24
(x + 3)2 = (y 4)
5
In the last line, we divided by 5 for the squared part not to have any coeffi-
cient. The parabola opens downward. It has vertex V (3, 4).
From 4c = 24 5
, we get c = 65 = 1.2. The focus is c = 1.2 units below V :
F (3, 2.8). The (horizontal) directrix is c = 1.2 units above V : y = 5.2. The
PY
(vertical) axis is through V : x = 3.
O
C
E D
EP
Example 1.2.5. A parabola has focus F (7, 9) and directrix y = 3. Find its
standard equation.
Solution. The directrix is horizontal, and the focus is above it. The parabola
D
then opens upward and its standard equation has the form (x h)2 = 4c(y k).
Since the distance from the focus to the directrix is 2c = 9 3 = 6, then c = 3.
Thus, the vertex is V (7, 6), the point 3 units below F . The standard equation is
then (x 7)2 = 12(y 6). 2
1.2.3. Situational Problems Involving Parabolas
Let us now solve some situational problems involving parabolas.

Example 1.2.6. A satellite dish has a shape called a paraboloid, where each
cross-section is a parabola. Since radio signals (parallel to the axis) will bounce
26
off the surface of the dish to the focus, the receiver should be placed at the focus.
How far should the receiver be from the vertex, if the dish is 12 ft across, and 4.5
ft deep at the vertex?
PY
O
Solution. The second figure above shows a cross-section of the satellite dish drawn
on a rectangular coordinate system, with the vertex at the origin. From the
problem, we deduce that (6, 4.5) is a point on the parabola. We need the distance
C
of the focus from the vertex, i.e., the value of c in x2 = 4cy.
x2 = 4cy
62 = 4c(4.5)
D
62
c= =2
4 4.5
E
Thus, the receiver should be 2 ft away from the vertex. 2

EP
Example 1.2.7. The cable of a suspension bridge hangs in the shape of a

parabola. The towers supporting the cable are 400 ft apart and 150 ft high.
If the cable, at its lowest, is 30 ft above the bridge at its midpoint, how high is
the cable 50 ft away (horizontally) from either tower?
D
27
Solution. Refer to the figure above, where the parabolic cable is drawn with
its vertex on the y-axis 30 ft above the origin. We may write its equation as
(x 0)2 = a(y 30); since we dont need the focal distance, we use the simpler
variable a in place of 4c. Since the towers are 150 ft high and 400 ft apart, we
deduce from the figure that (200, 150) is a point on the parabola.
x2 = a(y 30)
2002 = a(150 30)
2002 1000
a= =
120 3
PY
The parabola has equation x2 = 1000 3
(y 30), or equivalently,
y = 0.003x2 + 30. For the two points on the parabola 50 ft away from the
towers, x = 150 or x = 150. If x = 150, then
y = 0.003(1502 ) + 30 = 97.5.
O
Thus, the cable is 97.5 ft high 50 ft away from either tower. (As expected, we
get the same answer from x = 150.) 2
C
D
For Examples 1 and 2, determine the focus and directrix of the parabola with the
given equation. Sketch the graph, and indicate the focus, directrix, and vertex.
E
1. y 2 = 20x
2. 3x2 = 12y
Solution:
Solution: 3x2 = 12y x2 = 4y
EP
Vertex: V (0, 0), opens to the right

Vertex: V (0, 0), opens downward
4c = 20 c = 5
4c = 4 c = 1
Focus: F (5, 0), Directrix: x = 5
Focus: F (0, 1), Directrix: y = 1
See Figure 1.28.
See Figure 1.29.
D
28
3. Determine the standard equation of the
parabola in Figure 1.30 given only its
vertex and focus. Then determine its di-
rectix and axis of symmetry.
Solution:

3
V , 4 , F (4, 4)
2
5
c= 4c = 10
2
Parabola opens to the left
3
Equation: (y 4)2 = 10 x +
2
Figure 1.30
PY
Directrix: x = 1, Axis: y = 4
4. Determine the standard equation of the
parabola in Figure 1.31 given only its
vertex and diretrix. Then determine its
O
focus and axis of symmetry.
Solution:

13 15
V 5,
2
, directrix: y =
2
C
c = 1 4c = 4
Parabola opens
downward
2
13
D
Equation: y = 4 (x 5)
2
11 Figure 1.31
E
Focus: 5, , Axis: x = 5
2
EP
For Examples 5 and 6, determine the vertex, focus, directrix, and axis of sym-
metry of the parabola with the given equation. Sketch the parabola, and include
these points and lines.
5. x2 6x 2y + 9 = 0
D
Solution:
x2 6x = 2y 9
x2 6x + 9 = 2y
(x 3)2 = 2y
V (3, 0), parabola opens

upward

1 1
4c = 2 c = , F 3, ,
2 2
1
directrix: y = , axis: x = 3 Figure 1.32
2
See Figure 1.32.
29
6. 3y 2 + 8x + 24y + 40 = 0
Solution:
3y 2 + 24y = 8x 40
3(y 2 + 8y) = 8x 40
3(y 2 + 8y + 16) = 8x 40 + 48
3(y + 4)2 = 8x + 8
8
(y + 4)2 = (x 1)
3
V (1, 4), parabola opens
to the left
8 2 1
PY
4c = c = , F , 4 ,
3 3 3 Figure 1.33
5
directrix: x = , axis: y = 4
3
See Figure 1.33.
O
7. A parabola has focus F (11, 8) and directrix x = 17. Find its standard
equation. C
Solution: Since the focus is 6 units to the right of the directrix, the parabola
opens to the right with 2c = 6. Then c = 3 and V (14, 8). Hence, the
equation is (y 8)2 = 12(x + 14).
8. A flashlight is shaped like a
D
paraboloid and the light source
is placed at the focus so that
E
the light bounces off parallel to

the axis of symmetry; this is
done to maximize illumination.
EP
A particular flashlight has its

light source located 1 cm from
the base and is 6 cm deep; see
Figure 1.34. What is the width
Figure 1.34
D
of the flashlights opening?

Solution: Let the base (the vertex) of the flashlight be the point V (0, 0).
Then the light source (the focus) is at F (0, 1); so c = 1. Hence, the parabolas
equation is x2 = 4y. To get the width of the opening, we need the x coordinates
of the points on the parabola with y coordinate 6.

x2 = 4(6) x = 2 6

Therefore, the width of the opening is 2 2 6 = 4 6 9.8 cm.
30
9. An object thrown from a height of 2
m above the ground follows a parabolic
path until the object falls to the ground;
see Figure 1.35. If the object reaches
a maximum height (measured from the
ground) of 7 m after travelling a hor-
izontal distance of 4 m, determine the
horizontal distance between the objects
initial and final positions.
Figure 1.35
Solution: Let V (0, 7) be the parabolas vertex, which corresponds to the high-
PY
est point reached by the object. Then the parabolas equation is of the form
x2 = 4c(y 7) and the objects starting point is at (4, 2). Then
16 4
(4)2 = 4c(2 7) c = = .
20 5
O
16
Hence, the equation of the parabola is x2 = (y 7). When the object hits
5
the ground, the y coordinate is 0 and
C r
16 112 7
x2 = (0 7) = x = 4 .
5 5 5
D
r
7
Since this point is to the right of the vertex, we choose x = +4 . Therefore,
5
E
r
7
the total distance travelled is 4 (4) 8.73 m.
5
EP

Determine the vertex, focus, directrix, and axis of symmetry of the parabola with
D
the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include these points and lines.
1. y 2 = 36x
2. 5x2 = 100y
3. y 2 + 4x 14y = 53
4. y 2 2x + 2y 1 = 0
5. 2x2 12x + 28y = 38
6. (3x 2)2 = 84y 112
31
Find the standard equation of the parabola which satisfies the given conditions.
7. vertex (7, 11), focus (16, 11)
8. vertex (10, 5), directrix y = 1

23 11
9. focus 10, , directrix y =
2 2

3 37
10. focus , 3 , directrix x =
2 2
11. axis of symmetry y = 9, directrix x = 24, vertex on the line 3y 5x = 7
PY
12. vertex (0, 7), vertical axis of symmetry, through the point P (4, 5)
13. vertex (3, 8), horizontal axis of symmetry, through the point P (5, 12)
O
14. A satellite dish shaped like a paraboloid has its receiver located at the focus.
How far is the receiver from the vertex if the dish is 10 ft across and 3 ft deep
C
at the center?
15. A flashlight shaped like a paraboloid has its light source at the focus located
1.5 cm from the base and is 10 cm wide at its opening. How deep is the
D
flashlight at its center?
16. The ends of a rope are held in place at the top of two posts, 9 m apart and
E
each one 8 m high. If the rope assumes a parabolic shape and touches the
ground midway between the two posts, how high is the rope 2 m from one of
the posts?
EP
17. Radiation is focused to an unhealthy area in a patients body using a parabolic

reflector, positioned in such a way that the target area is at the focus. If the
reflector is 30 cm wide and 15 cm deep at the center, how far should the base
of the reflector be from the target area?
D
18. A rectangular object 25 m wide is to pass under a parabolic arch that has a
width of 32 m at the base and a height of 24 m at the center. If the vertex
of the parabola is at the top of the arch, what maximum height should the
rectangular object have?
32
Lesson 1.3. Ellipses

(1) define an ellipse;
(2) determine the standard form of equation of an ellipse;
(3) graph an ellipse in a rectangular coordinate system; and
(4) solve situational problems involving conic sections (ellipses).
PY
Lesson Outline
(1) Definition of an ellipse
(2) Derivation of the standard equation of an ellipse
O
(3) Graphing ellipses
(4) Solving situational problems involving ellipses
C
Introduction
Unlike circle and parabola, an ellipse is one of the conic sections that most stu-
D
dents have not encountered formally before. Its shape is a bounded curve which
looks like a flattened circle. The orbits of the planets in our solar system around
the sun happen to be elliptical in shape. Also, just like parabolas, ellipses have
E
reflective properties that have been used in the construction of certain structures.
These applications and more will be encountered in this lesson.
EP
1.3.1. Definition and Equation of an Ellipse
Consider the points F1 (3, 0) and F2 (3, 0), as shown in Figure 1.36. What is the
D
sum of the distances of A(4, 2.4) from F1 and from F2 ? How about the sum of
the distances of B (and C(0, 4)) from F1 and from F2 ?
AF1 + AF2 = 7.4 + 2.6 = 10

BF1 + BF2 = 3.8 + 6.2 = 10
CF1 + CF2 = 5 + 5 = 10
There are other points P such that P F1 + P F2 = 10. The collection of all such
points forms a shape called an ellipse.
33
Figure 1.36
Figure 1.37
PY
Let F1 and F2 be two distinct points. The set of all points P , whose
distances from F1 and from F2 add up to a certain constant, is called
O
an ellipse. The points F1 and F2 are called the foci of the ellipse.
C
Given are two points on the x-axis, F1 (c, 0) and F2 (c, 0), the foci, both c
units away from their center (0, 0). See Figure 1.37. Let P (x, y) be a point on
the ellipse. Let the common sum of the distances be 2a (the coefficient 2 will
D
make computations simpler). Thus, we have P F1 + P F2 = 2a.
P F1 = 2a P F2
E
p p
(x + c)2 + y 2 = 2a (x c)2 + y 2
p
x2 + 2cx + c2 + y 2 = 4a2 4a (x c)2 + y 2 + x2 2cx + c2 + y 2
EP
p
a (x c)2 + y 2 = a2 cx
a2 x2 2cx + c2 + y 2 = a4 2a2 cx + c2 x2

(a2 c2 )x2 + a2 y 2 = a4 a2 c2 = a2 (a2 c2 )

D
b2 x 2 + a2 y 2 = a2 b2 by letting b = a2 c2 , so a > b
x2 y 2
+ 2 =1
a2 b

When we let b = a2 c2 , we assumed a > c. To see why this is true, look at
4P F1 F2 in Figure 1.37. By the Triangle Inequality, P F1 + P F2 > F1 F2 , which
implies 2a > 2c, so a > c.
We collect here the features of the graph of an ellipse with standard equation
x2 y 2
2
+ 2 = 1, where a > b. Let c = a2 b2 .
a b
34
PY
O
(1) center : origin (0, 0)
(2) foci : F1 (c, 0) and F2 (c, 0) C
Each focus is c units away from the center.
For any point on the ellipse, the sum of its distances from the foci is 2a.
D
(3) vertices: V1 (a, 0) and V2 (a, 0)
The vertices are points on the ellipse, collinear with the center and foci.
E
If y = 0, then x = a. Each vertex is a units away from the center.

The segment V1 V2 is called the major axis. Its length is 2a. It divides
EP
the ellipse into two congruent parts.
(4) covertices: W1 (0, b) and W2 (0, b)
The segment through the center, perpendicular to the major axis, is the
D
minor axis. It meets the ellipse at the covertices. It divides the ellipse
into two congruent parts.
If x = 0, then y = b. Each covertex is b units away from the center.
The minor axis W1 W2 is 2b units long. Since a > b, the major axis is
longer than the minor axis.
Example 1.3.1. Give the coordinates of the foci, vertices, and covertices of the
ellipse with equation
x2 y 2
+ = 1.
25 9
Sketch the graph, and include these points.
35

Solution. With a2 = 25 and b2 = 9, we have a = 5, b = 3, and c = a2 b2 = 4.
foci: F1 (4, 0), F2 (4, 0) vertices: V1 (5, 0), V2 (5, 0)
covertices: W1 (0, 3), W2 (0, 3)
PY
O
C
Example 1.3.2. Find the (standard) equation of the ellipse whose foci are
D
F1 (3, 0) and F2 (3, 0), such that for any point on it, the sum of its distances
from the foci is 10. See Figure 1.36.
E

Solution. We have 2a = 10 and c = 3, so a = 5 and b = a2 c2 = 4. The
equation is
EP
x2 y 2
+ = 1. 2
25 16
1.3.2. More Properties of Ellipses

D
The ellipses we have considered so far are horizontal and have the origin as their
centers. Some ellipses have their foci aligned vertically, and some have centers
not at the origin. Their standard equations and properties are given in the box.
The derivations are more involved, but are similar to the one above, and so are
not shown anymore.

In all four cases below, a > b and c = a2 b2 . The foci F1 and F2 are c
units away from the center. The vertices V1 and V2 are a units away from the
center, the major axis has length 2a, the covertices W1 and W2 are b units away
from the center, and the minor axis has length 2b. Recall that, for any point on
the ellipse, the sum of its distances from the foci is 2a.
36
Center Corresponding Graphs
(0, 0)
PY
x2 y 2 x2 y 2
+ 2 = 1, a > b + 2 = 1, b > a
O
a2 b b2 a
C
D
(h, k)
E
EP
(x h)2 (y k)2 (x h)2 (y k)2

+ =1 + =1
a2 b2 b2 a2
D
a>b b>a
major axis: horizontal major axis: vertical
minor axis: vertical minor axis: horizontal
In the standard equation, if the x-part has the bigger denominator, the ellipse
is horizontal. If the y-part has the bigger denominator, the ellipse is vertical.
Example 1.3.3. Give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and covertices
of the ellipse with the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include these points.
37
(x + 3)2 (y 5)2
(1) + =1
24 49
(2) 9x2 + 16y 2 126x + 64y = 71

Solution. (1) From a2 = 49 and b2 = 24, we have a = 7, b = 2 6 4.9, and
c = a2 b2 = 5. The ellipse is vertical.
center: (3, 5)
foci: F1 (3, 0), F2 (3, 10)
vertices: V1 (3, 2), V2 (3, 12)

PY
covertices: W1 (3 2 6, 5) (7.9, 5)

W2 (3 + 2 6, 5) (1.9, 5)
O
C
E D
EP
D
(2) We first change the given equation to standard form.
9(x2 14x) + 16(y 2 + 4y) = 71

9(x2 14x + 49) + 16(y 2 + 4y + 4) = 71 + 9(49) + 16(4)
9(x 7)2 + 16(y + 2)2 = 576
(x 7)2 (y + 2)2
+ =1
64 36
38

We have a = 8 and b = 6. Thus, c = a2 b2 = 2 7 5.3. The ellipse is
horizontal.
center: (7, 2)

foci: F1 (7 2 7, 2) (1.7, 2)

F2 (7 + 2 7, 2) (12.3, 2)
vertices: V1 (1, 2), V2 (15, 2)
covertices: W1 (7, 8), W2 (7, 4)
PY
O
C
E D
EP
Example 1.3.4. The foci of an ellipse are (3, 6) and (3, 2). For any point
on the ellipse, the sum of its distances from the foci is 14. Find the standard
D
equation of the ellipse.
Solution. The midpoint (3, 2) of the foci is the center of the ellipse. The
ellipse is vertical (because the foci are vertically
aligned)and c = 4. From the
given sum, 2a = 14 so a = 7. Also, b = a2 c2 = 33. The equation is
(x + 3)2 (y + 2)2
+ = 1. 2
33 49

Example 1.3.5. An ellipse has vertices (2 61, 5) and (2 + 61, 5), and
its minor axis is 12 units long. Find its standard equation and its foci.
39
Solution. The midpoint (2, 5)of the vertices is the center of the ellipse, which is
horizontal. Each vertex is a = 61 units away from the center. From the length of
(x 2)2 (y + 5)2
the minor axis, 2b = 12 so b = 6. The standard equation is + =
61 36
1. Each focus is c = a2 b2 = 5 units away from (2, 5), so their coordinates
are (3, 5) and (7, 5). 2
1.3.3. Situational Problems Involving Ellipses
Let us now apply the concept of ellipse to some situational problems.

? Example 1.3.6. A tunnel has the shape of a semiellipse that is 15 ft high at
PY
the center, and 36 ft across at the base. At most how high should a passing truck
be, if it is 12 ft wide, for it to be able to fit through the tunnel? Round off your
answer to two decimal places.
O
C
E D
EP
Solution. Refer to the figure above. If we draw the semiellipse on a rectangular

coordinate system, with its center at the origin, an equation of the ellipse which
contains it, is
D
x2 y2
+ = 1.
182 152
To maximize its height, the corners of the truck, as shown in the figure, would
have to just touch the ellipse. Since the truck is 12 ft wide, let the point (6, n)
be the corner of the truck in the first quadrant, where n > 0, is the (maximum)
height of the truck. Since this point is on the ellipse, it should fit the equation.
Thus, we have
62 n2
+ =1
182 152
n = 10 2 14.14 ft 2
40
Example 1.3.7. The orbit of a planet has the shape of an ellipse, and on one
of the foci is the star around which it revolves. The planet is closest to the star
when it is at one vertex. It is farthest from the star when it is at the other vertex.
Suppose the closest and farthest distances of the planet from this star, are 420
million kilometers and 580 million kilometers, respectively. Find the equation of
the ellipse, in standard form, with center at the origin and the star at the x-axis.
Assume all units are in millions of kilometers.
PY
O
C
E D
EP
Solution. In the figure above, the orbit is drawn as a horizontal ellipse with
center at the origin. From the planets distances from the star, at its closest
and farthest points, it follows that the major axis is 2a = 420 + 580 = 1000
(million kilometers), so a = 500. If we place the star at the positive x-axis,
D
then it is c = 500 420 = 80 units away from the center. Therefore, we get
b2 = a2 c2 = 5002 802 = 243600. The equation then is
x2 y2
+ = 1.
250000 243600
The star could have been placed on the negative x-axis, and the answer would
still be the same. 2
41
1. Give the coordinates of the foci, vertices,
and covertices of the ellipse with equa-
x2 y2
tion + = 1. Then sketch the
169 144
graph and include these points.
Solution: The ellipse is horizontal.
a2 =169 a = 13, b2 = 144 b = 12,
c = 169 144 = 5
Foci: F1 (5, 0), F2 (5, 0)
Vertices: V1 (13, 0), V2 (13, 0)
Covertices: W1 (0, 12), W2 (0, 12)
PY
See Figure 1.38. Figure 1.38
2. Find the standard equation of the ellipse whose foci are F1 (0, 8) and F2 (0, 8),
such that for any point on it, the sum of its distances from the foci is 34.
O
Solution: The ellipse is vertical and has center at (0, 0).
2a = 34 a = 17
C
c = 8 b = 172 82 = 15
x2 y2
The equation is + = 1.
D
225 289
For Examples 3 and 4, give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and
E
covertices of the ellipse with the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include
these points.
EP
(x 7)2 (y + 2)2
3. + =1
64 25
Solution: The ellipse is horizontal.
a2 =64 a = 8,b2 = 25 b = 5
c = 64 25 = 39 6.24
D
center: (7, 2)

foci: F1 (7 39, 2) (0.76, 2)

F2 (7 + 39, 2) (13.24, 2)
vertices: V1 (1, 2), V2 (15, 2)
Figure 1.39
covertices: W1 (7, 7), W2 (7, 3)
See Figure 1.39.
42
4. 16x2 + 96x + 7y 2 + 14y + 39 = 0
Solution:
16x2 + 96x + 7y 2 + 14y = 39

16(x2 + 6x + 9) + 7(y 2 + 2y + 1) = 39 + 151
16(x + 3)2 + 7(y + 1)2 = 112
(x + 3)2 (y + 1)2
+ =1
7 16
The ellipse is vertical.
a2 = 16 a = 4, b2 = 7 b = 7
PY
2.65
c = 16 7 = 3
center: (3, 1)
foci: F1 (3, 4), F2 (3, 2)
O
vertices: V1 (3, 5), V2 (3, 3)
Figure 1.40
covertices: W1 (3 7, 1) (5.65, 1)

W2 (3 + 7, 1) (0.35, 1)
C
See Figure 1.40.
D
5. The covertices of an ellipse are (5, 6) and (5, 8). For any point on the ellipse,
the sum of its distances from the foci is 12. Find the standard equation of the
E
ellipse.
Solution: The ellipse is horizontal with center at the midpoint (5, 7) of the
EP
(x 5)2
covertices. Also, 2a = 12 so a = 6 while b = 1. The equation is +
36
(y 7)2
= 1.
1

D
6. An ellipse has foci (4 15, 3) and (4 + 15, 3), and its major axis is 10
units long. Find its standard equation and its vertices.
Solution: The ellipse is horizontal with center at the midpoint (4, 3) of the
foci; also c = 15. Since the length of the major axis is 10, 2a = 10 and
a = 5. Thus b = 52 15 = 10. Therefore, the equation of the ellipse is
(x + 4)2 (y 3)2
+ = 1 and its vertices are (9, 3) and (1, 3).
25 10
7. A whispering gallery is an enclosure or room where whispers can be clearly
heard in some parts of the gallery. Such a gallery can be constructed by
making its ceiling in the shape of a semi-ellipse; in this case, a whisper from
one focus can be clearly heard at the other focus. If an elliptical whispering
43
gallery is 90 feet long and the foci are 50 feet apart, how high is the gallery at
its center?
PY
Solution: We set up a Cartesian coordinate system by assigning the center of
the semiellipse as the origin. The point on the ceiling right above the center is a
covertex of the ellipse. Since2a = 90 and 2c = 50; then b2 = 452 252 = 1400.
O
The height is given by b = 1400 37.4 ft.
8. A spheroid (or oblate spheroid) is the surface obtained by rotating an ellipse
C
around its minor axis. The bowl in Figure 1.41 is in the shape of the lower half
of a spheroid; that is, its horizontal cross sections are circles while its vertical
cross sections that pass through
the center are semiellipses. If this bowl is 10
D
in wide at the opening and 10 in deep at the center, how deep does a circular
cover with diameter 9 in go into the bowl?
E
EP
D
Figure 1.41
Solution: We set up a Cartesian coordinate system by assigning the center

of the semiellipse as the origin. Then a = 5, b = 10, and the equation of
2 2
the ellipse is x25 + y10 = 1. We want the y-coordinate of the points on the
q
2
ellipse that has x = 4.5. This coordinate is y = 10 1 x25 1.38.
Therefore, the cover will go 1.38 inches into the bowl.
44
Give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and covertices of the ellipse with
the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include these points.
x2 y 2
1. + =1
8 4
x2 (y 2)2
2. + =1
16 25
3. (x 1)2 + (2y 2)2 = 4
PY
(x + 5)2 (y 2)2
4. + =1
49 121
5. 16x2 224x + 25y 2 + 250y 191 = 0
6. 25x2 200x + 16y 2 160y = 800
O
Find the standard equation of the ellipse which satisfies the given conditions.

C
7. foci (2 33, 8) and (2 + 33, 8), the sum of the distances of any point from
the foci is 14
D
8. center (3, 7), vertical major axis of length 20, minor axis of length 12
9. foci (21, 10) and (3, 10), contains the point (9, 15)
E
10. a vertex at (3, 18) and a covertex at (12, 7), major axis is either hori-
EP
zontal or vertical
11. a focus at (9, 15) and a covertex at (1, 10), with vertical major axis
12. A 40-ft wide tunnel has the shape of a semiellipse that is 5 ft high a distance
D
of 2 ft from either end. How high is the tunnel at its center?
13. The moons orbit is an ellipse with Earth as one focus. If the maximum
distance from the moon to Earth is 405 500 km and the minimum distance is
363 300 km, find the equation of the ellipse in a Cartesian coordinate system
where Earth is at the origin. Assume that the ellipse has horizontal major
axis and that the minimum distance is achieved when the moon is to the right
of Earth. Use 100 km as one unit.
14. Two friends visit a whispering gallery (in the shape of a semiellipsoid) where
they stand 100 m apart to be at the foci. If one of them is 6 m from the
nearest wall, how high is the gallery at its center?
45
15. A jogging path is in the shape of an ellipse. If it is 120 ft long and 40 ft wide,
what is the width of the track 15 ft from either vertex?
16. Radiation is focused to an unhealthy area in a patients body using a semiel-
liptic reflector, positioned in such a way that the target area is at one focus
while the source of radiation is at the other. If the reflector is 100 cm wide
and 30 cm high at the center, how far should the radiation source and the
target area be from the ends of the reflector?
PY
Lesson 1.4. Hyperbolas
O
(1) define a hyperbola;
C
(2) determine the standard form of equation of a hyperbola;
(3) graph a hyperbola in a rectangular coordinate system; and
(4) solve situational problems involving conic sections (hyperbolas).
D
Lesson Outline
E
(1) Definition of a hyperbola

(2) Derivation of the standard equation of a hyperbola
EP
(3) Graphing hyperbolas

(4) Solving situational problems involving hyperbolas
Introduction
D
Just like ellipse, a hyperbola is one of the conic sections that most students
have not encountered formally before. Its graph consists of two unbounded
branches which extend in opposite directions. It is a misconception that each
branch is a parabola. This is not true, as parabolas and hyperbolas have very
different features. An application of hyperbolas in basic location and navigation
schemes are presented in an example and some exercises.
1.4.1. Definition and Equation of a Hyperbola
Consider the points F1 (5, 0) and F2 (5, 0) as shown in Figure 1.42. What is the
absolute value of the difference of the distances of A(3.75, 3) from F1 and from
46
F2 ? How about the absolute value of the difference of the distances of B 5, 16

3
from F1 and from F2 ?
|AF1 AF2 | = |9.25 3.25| = 6

16 34
|BF1 BF2 | = = 6
3 3
There are other points P such that |P F1 P F2 | = 6. The collection of all such
points forms a shape called a hyperbola, which consists of two disjoint branches.
For points P on the left branch, P F2 P F1 = 6; for those on the right branch,
P F1 P F2 = 6.
PY
O
C
E D
Figure 1.42
EP
D
Figure 1.43
47
Let F1 and F2 be two distinct points. The set of all points P , whose
distances from F1 and from F2 differ by a certain constant, is called a
hyperbola. The points F1 and F2 are called the foci of the hyperbola.
In Figure 1.43, given are two points on the x-axis, F1 (c, 0) and F2 (c, 0), the
foci, both c units away from their midpoint (0, 0). This midpoint is the center
of the hyperbola. Let P (x, y) be a point on the hyperbola, and let the absolute
value of the difference of the distances of P from F1 and F2 , be 2a (the coefficient
2 will make computations simpler). Thus, |P F1 P F2 | = 2a, and so
p p
2 2 2 2
(x + c) + y (x c) + y = 2a.
PY

Algebraic manipulations allow us to rewrite this into the much simpler
x2 y 2
2 = 1, where b = c2 a2 .
O
a2 b

When we let b = c2 a2 , we assumed c > a. To see why this is true, suppose
C
that P is closer to F2 , so P F1 P F2 = 2a. Refer to Figure 1.43. Suppose also
that P is not on the x-axis, so 4P F1 F2 is formed. From the triangle inequality,
F1 F2 + P F2 > P F1 . Thus, 2c > P F1 P F2 = 2a, so c > a.
D
Now we present a derivation. For now, assume P is closer to F2 so P F1 > P F2 ,
and P F1 P F2 = 2a.
E
P F1 = 2a + P F2
p p
(x + c)2 + y 2 = 2a + (x c)2 + y 2
EP
p 2 p 2
2
(x + c) + y 2 = 2a + (x c) + y2 2
p
cx a2 = a (x c)2 + y 2
p 2
(cx a2 )2 = a (x c)2 + y 2
D
(c2 a2 )x2 a2 y 2 = a2 (c2 a2 )

b 2 x 2 a2 y 2 = a2 b2 by letting b = c2 a2 > 0
x2 y 2
2 =1
a2 b
We collect here the features of the graph of a hyperbola with standard equa-
tion
x2 y 2
2 = 1.
a2 b

Let c = a2 + b2 .
48
PY
(1) center : origin (0, 0)
(2) foci : F1 (c, 0) and F2 (c, 0)
O
Each focus is c units away from the center.
For any point on the hyperbola, the absolute value of the difference of
its distances from the foci is 2a.
C
(3) vertices: V1 (a, 0) and V2 (a, 0)
D
The vertices are points on the hyperbola, collinear with the center and
foci.
E
If y = 0, then x = a. Each vertex is a units away from the center.

The segment V1 V2 is called the transverse axis. Its length is 2a.
EP
(4) asymptotes: y = ab x and y = ab x, the lines `1 and `2 in Figure 1.45
The asymptotes of the hyperbola are two lines passing through the cen-
ter which serve as a guide in graphing the hyperbola: each branch of
the hyperbola gets closer and closer to the asymptotes, in the direction
D
towards which the branch extends. (We need the concept of limits from
calculus to explain this.)
An aid in determining the equations of the asymptotes: in the standard
2 2
equation, replace 1 by 0, and in the resulting equation xa2 yb2 = 0, solve
for y.
To help us sketch the asymptotes, we point out that the asymptotes
`1 and `2 are the extended diagonals of the auxiliary rectangle drawn
in Figure 1.45. This rectangle has sides 2a and 2b with its diagonals
intersecting at the center C. Two sides are congruent and parallel to
the transverse axis V1 V2 . The other two sides are congruent and parallel
49
to the conjugate axis, the segment shown which is perpendicular to the
transverse axis at the center, and has length 2b.
Example 1.4.1. Determine the foci, vertices, and asymptotes of the hyperbola
with equation
x2 y 2
= 1.
9 7
Sketch the graph, and include these points and lines, the transverse and conjugate
axes, and the auxiliary rectangle.
2 2
Solution. With
a = 9 and b = 7, we have
a = 3, b = 7, and c = a2 + b2 = 4.
PY
foci: F1 (4, 0) and F2 (4, 0)
vertices: V1 (3, 0) and V2 (3, 0)

asymptotes: y = 37 x and y = 37 x
The graph is shown at the right. The conju-

O
gate axis drawn has its endpoints b = 7
2.7 units above and below the center. 2 C
Example 1.4.2. Find the (standard) equation of the hyperbola whose foci are
F1 (5, 0) and F2 (5, 0), such that for any point on it, the absolute value of the
difference of its distances from the foci is 6. See Figure 1.42.
D

Solution. We have 2a = 6 and c = 5, so a = 3 and b = c2 a2 = 4. The
x2 y 2
hyperbola then has equation = 1. 2
E
9 16
EP
1.4.2. More Properties of Hyperbolas
The hyperbolas we considered so far are horizontal and have the origin as their
centers. Some hyperbolas have their foci aligned vertically, and some have centers
not at the origin. Their standard equations and properties are given in the box.
D
The derivations are more involved, but are similar to the one above, and so are
not shown anymore.

In all four cases below, we let c = a2 + b2 . The foci F1 and F2 are c units
away from the center C. The vertices V1 and V2 are a units away from the center.
The transverse axis V1 V2 has length 2a. The conjugate axis has length 2b and is
perpendicular to the transverse axis. The transverse and conjugate axes bisect
each other at their intersection point, C. Each branch of a hyperbola gets closer
and closer to the asymptotes, in the direction towards which the branch extends.
The equations of the asymptotes can be determined by replacing 1 in the standard
equation by 0. The asymptotes can be drawn as the extended diagonals of the
auxiliary rectangle determined by the transverse and conjugate axes. Recall that,
50
for any point on the hyperbola, the absolute value of the difference of its distances
from the foci is 2a.
Center Corresponding Hyperbola
(0, 0)
PY
O
x2 y 2 y 2 x2
2 =1 2 =1
a2 b C a2 b
E D
(h, k)
EP
(x h)2 (y k)2 (y k)2 (x h)2

=1 =1
D
a2 b2 a2 b2
transverse axis: horizontal transverse axis: vertical

conjugate axis: vertical conjugate axis: horizontal
In the standard equation, aside from being positive, there are no other re-
strictions on a and b. In fact, a and b can even be equal. The orientation of the
hyperbola is determined by the variable appearing in the first term (the positive
term): the corresponding axis is where the two branches will open. For example,
if the variable in the first term is x, the hyperbola is horizontal: the transverse
51
axis is horizontal, and the branches open to the left and right in the direction of
the x-axis.
Example 1.4.3. Give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and asymp-
totes of the hyperbola with the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include
these points and lines, the transverse and conjugate axes, and the auxiliary rect-
angle.
(y + 2)2 (x 7)2
(1) =1
25 9
(2) 4x2 5y 2 + 32x + 30y = 1
2 2
Solution. (1) From
a = 25 and b = 9, we have a = 5, b = 3, and c =
PY

a2 + b2 = 34 5.8. The hyperbola is vertical. To determine the asymp-
2 2
totes, we write (y+2)
25
(x7)
9
= 0, which is equivalent to y + 2 = 53 (x 7).
We can then solve this for y.
center: C(7, 2)
O

foci: F1 (7, 2 34) (7, 7.8) and F2 (7, 2 + 34) (7, 3.8)
vertices: V1 (7, 7) and V2 (7, 3)
asymptotes: y = 35 x
C
41
3
and y = 35 x + 29
3
The conjugate axis drawn has its endpoints b = 3 units to the left and right
D
of the center.
E
EP
D
52
(2) We first change the given equation to standard form.
4(x2 + 8x) 5(y 2 6y) = 1

4(x2 + 8x + 16) 5(y 2 6y + 9) = 1 + 4(16) 5(9)
4(x + 4)2 5(y 3)2 = 20
(x + 4)2 (y 3)2
=1
5 4

We have a = 5 2.2 and b = 2. Thus, c = a2 + b2 = 3. The hyperbola
2 2
is horizontal. To determine the asymptotes, we write (x+4) 5
(y3)
4
= 0
2
which is equivalent to y 3 = 5 (x + 4), and solve for y.
PY
center: C(4, 3)
foci: F1 (7, 3) and F2 (1, 3)

vertices: V1 (4 5, 3) (6.2, 3) and V2 (4 + 5, 3) (1.8, 3)
asymptotes: y = 2 x + 8 + 3 and y = 25 x 8 +3
O
5 5 5
The conjugate axis drawn has its endpoints b = 2 units above and below
the center.
C
E D
EP
D
Example 1.4.4. The foci of a hyperbola are (5, 3) and (9, 3). For any point
on the hyperbola, the absolute value of the difference of its of its distances from
the foci is 10. Find the standard equation of the hyperbola.
53
Solution. The midpoint (2, 3) of the foci is the center of the hyperbola. Each
focus is c = 7 units away from the center. From the given difference, 2a = 10 so
a = 5. Also, b2 = c2 a2 = 24. The hyperbola is horizontal (because the foci are
horizontally aligned), so the equation is
(x 2)2 (y + 3)2
= 1. 2
25 24
Example 1.4.5. A hyperbola has vertices (4, 5) and (4, 9), and one of its
foci is (4, 2 65). Find its standard equation.
Solution. The midpoint (4, 2) of the vertices is the center of the hyperbola,
which is vertical (because the vertices are vertically aligned).
Each vertex is
PY
a = 7 units away from the center. The given focus is c = 65 units away from
the center. Thus, b2 = c2 a2 = 16, and the standard equation is
(y 2)2 (x + 4)2
= 1. 2
49 16
1.4.3. Situational Problems Involving Hyperbolas
O
C
Let us now give an example on an application of hyperbolas.
Example 1.4.6. An explosion was heard by two stations 1200 m apart, located
D
at F1 (600, 0) and F2 (600, 0). If the explosion was heard in F1 two seconds before
it was heard in F2 , identify the possible locations of the explosion. Use 340 m/s
as the speed of sound.
E
Solution. Using the given speed of sound, we can deduce that the sound traveled
EP
340(2) = 680 m farther in reaching F2 than in reaching F1 . This is then the

difference of the distances of the explosion from the two stations. Thus, the
explosion is on a hyperbola with foci are F1 and F2 , on the branch closer to F1 .
D
54
We have c = 600 and 2a = 680, so a = 340 and b2 = c2 a2 = 244400.
The explosion could therefore be anywhere on the left branch of the hyperbola
x2 y2
115600
244400 = 1. 2

1. Determine the foci, vertices, and asymptotes of the hyperbola with equation
x2 y2
= 1. Sketch the graph, and include these points and lines, the
16 33
PY
transverse and conjugate axes, and the auxiliary rectangle.
Solution: The hyperbola is horizontal.
a2 = 16 a = 4,
2
b =33 b = 33,
O
c = 16 + 33 = 7
center: (0, 0) C
foci: F1 (7, 0), F2 (7, 0)
vertices: V1 (4, 0), V2 (4, 0)

33 33
asymptotes: y = x, y = x
D
4 4
The conjugate axis has endpoints
(0, 33) and (0, 33). See Figure Figure 1.46
E
1.46.
2. Find the standard equation of the hyperbola whose foci are F1 (0, 10) and
EP
F2 (0, 10), such that for any point on it, the absolute value of the difference of
its distances from the foci is 12.
Solution: The hyperbola is vertical and has center at (0, 0). We have 2a = 12,
y 2 x2
2 2
so a = 6; also, c = 10. Then b = 10 6 = 8. The equation is = 1.
D
36 64
For Examples 3 and 4, give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and
asymptotes of the hyperbola with the given equation. Sketch the graph, and in-
clude these points and lines, the transverse and conjugate axes, and the auxiliary
rectangle.
(y + 6)2 (x 4)2
3. =1
25 39
Solution: The hyperbola is vertical.

a2 = 25 a = 5, b2 = 39 b = 39, c = 25 + 39 = 8
55
center: (4, 6)
foci: F1 (4, 14), F2 (4, 2)
vertices: V1 (4, 11), V2 (4, 1)
(y + 6)2 (x 4)2
asymptotes: =0
25 39
5
y + 6 = (x 4)
39

The conjugate axis has endpoints b = 39 units to the left and to the right of
the center. See Figure 1.47.
PY
O
C
E D
EP
Figure 1.47
4. 9x2 + 126x 16y 2 96y + 153 = 0

D
Solution:
9x2 + 126x 16y 2 96y = 153

9(x2 + 14x + 49) 16(y 2 + 6y + 9) = 153 + 9(49) 16(9)
9(x + 7)2 16(y + 3)2 = 144
(x + 7)2 (y + 3)2
=1
16 9
The hyperbola is horizontal.

a2 = 16 a = 4, b2 = 9 b = 3, c= 16 + 9 = 5
56
center: (7, 3)
foci: F1 (12, 3), F2 (2, 3)
vertices: V1 (11, 3), V2 (3, 3)
(x + 7)2 (y + 3)2 3
asymptotes: = 0 y + 3 = (x + 7)
16 9 4
The conjugate axis have endpoints (7, 6) and (7, 0). See Figure 1.48.
PY
O
C
D
Figure 1.48
E
EP
5. The foci of a hyperbola are (17, 3) and (3, 3). For any point on the
hyperbola, the absolute value of the difference of its distances from the foci is
14. Find the standard equation of the hyperbola.
Solution: The hyperbola is horizontal with center at the midpoint (7, 3) of
D
the foci. Also, 2a = 14 so a = 7 while c = 10. Then b2 = 102 72 = 51. The

(x + 7)2 (y + 3)2
equation is = 1.
49 51
6. The auxiliary rectangle of a hyperbola has vertices (24, 15), (24, 9), (10, 9),
and (10, 15). Find the equation of the hyperbola if its conjugate axis is hor-
izontal.
Solution: The hyperbola is vertical. Using the auxiliary rectangles dimen-
sions, we see that the length of the transverse axis is 2a = 24 while the
length of the conjugate axis is 2b = 34. Thus, a = 12 and b = 17. The
hyperbolas vertices are the midpoints (7, 15) and (7, 9) of the bottom
57
and top sides, respectively, of the auxiliary rectangle. Then the hyperbolas
center is (7, 3), which is the midpoint of the vertices. The equation is
(y + 3)2 (x + 7)2
= 1.
144 289
7. Two LORAN (long range navigation) stations A and B are situated along a
straight shore, where A is 200 miles west of B. These stations transmit radio
signals at a speed 186 miles per millisecond. The captain of a ship travelling
on the open sea intends to enter a harbor that is located 40 miles east of
station A.
Due to the its location, the harbor experiences a time difference in receiving
the signals from both stations. The captain navigates the ship into the harbor
PY
by following a path where the ship experiences the same time difference as the
harbor.
(a) What time difference between station signals should the captain be look-
ing for in order the ship to make a successful entry into the harbor?
O
(b) If the desired time difference is achieved, determine the location of the
ship if it is 75 miles offshore. C
Solution:
(a) Let H represent the harbor on the shoreline. Note that BH AH = 160
40 = 120. The time difference on the harbor is given by 120186 0.645
D
milliseconds. This is the time difference needed to be maintained in order
to for the ship to enter the harbor.
E
(b) Situate the stations A and B on the Cartesian plane so that A (100, 0)
and B (100, 0). Let P represent the ship on the sea, which has coordinates
EP
(h, 75). Since P B P A = 120, then it should follow that h < 0. More-
over, P should lie on the left branch of the hyperbola whose equation is
given by
x2 y 2
2 =1
a2 b
D

where 2a = 120 a = 60, and b = c2 a2 = 1002 602 = 80.
Therefore,
h2 752
= 1
602 802 s
752
h = 1 + 2 602 82.24
80
This means that the ship is around 17.76 miles to the east of station A.
58
Give the center, foci, vertices, and asymptotes of the hyperbola with the given
equation. Sketch the graph and the auxiliary rectangle, then include these points
and lines.
x2 y2
1. =1 3. 4x2 15(y 5)2 = 60
100 81
1 (y 6)2 (x 8)2
2. y x = 4. =1
y+x 64 36
5. 9y 2 + 54y 6x2 36x 27 = 0
PY
6. 16x2 + 64x 105y 2 + 840y 3296 = 0
Find the standard equation of the hyperbola which satisfies the given conditions.
O
7. foci (7, 17) and (7, 17), the absolute value of the difference of the distances
of any point from the foci is 24 C
8. foci (3, 2) and (15, 2), a vertex at (9, 2)
9. center (10, 4), one corner of auxiliary rectangle at (1, 12), with horizontal
D
transverse axis
71
10. asymptotes y = 3
43 x and y = 34 x 17
3
and a vertex at (17, 9)
E
5 19 5 29
11. asymptotes y = 12 x+ 3
and y = 12
x + 3
and a focus at (4, 5)
EP
12. horizontal conjugate axis, one corner of auxiliary rectangle at (3, 8), and an
asymptote 4x + 3y = 12
13. two corners of auxiliary rectangle at (2, 3) and (16, 1), and horizontal trans-
verse axis
D
14. Two radio stations are located 150 miles apart, where station A is west of sta-
tion B. Radio signals are being transmitted simultaneously by both stations,
travelling at a rate of 0.2 miles/sec. A plane travelling at 60 miles above
ground level has just passed by station B and is headed towards the other
station. If the signal from B arrives at the plane 480 sec before the signal
sent from A, determine the location of the plane.
59
Lesson 1.5. More Problems on Conic Sections

(1) recognize the equation and important characteristics of the different types of
conic sections; and
(2) solve situational problems involving conic sections.
PY
Lesson Outline
(1) Conic sections with associated equations in general form
(2) Problems involving characteristics of various conic sections
(3) Solving situational problems involving conic sections
O
Introduction
In this lesson, we will identify the conic section from a given equation. We
C
will analyze the properties of the identified conic section. We will also look at
problems that use the properties of the different conic sections. This will allow
us to synthesize what has been covered so far.
D
1.5.1. Identifying the Conic Section by Inspection

E
The equation of a circle may be written in standard form

EP
Ax2 + Ay 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0,
that is, the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are the same. However, it does not follow
that if the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are the same, the graph is a circle.
D
General Equation Standard Equation graph

1
2 3
2
(A) 2x2 + 2y 2 2x + 6y + 5 = 0 x 2 + y + 2 = 0 point
2 2 2 2
(B) x + y 6x 8y + 50 = 0 (x 3) + (y 4) = 25 empty set
For a circle with equation (x h)2 + (y k)2 = r2 , we have r2 > 0. This is

not the case for the standard equations of (A) and (B).
In (A), because the sum of two squares can only be 0 if and only if each square
is 0, it follows that x 21 = 0 and y + 32 = 0. The graph is thus the single point
1
2
, 32 .
60
In (B), no real values of x and y can make the nonnegative left side equal to
the negative right side. The graph is then the empty set.
Let us recall the general form of the equations of the other conic sections. We
may write the equations of conic sections we discussed in the general form
Ax2 + By 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0.
Some terms may vanish, depending on the kind of conic section.

(1) Circle: both x2 and y 2 appear, and their coefficients are the same
Ax2 + Ay 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0
PY
Example: 18x2 + 18y 2 24x + 48y 5 = 0
Degenerate cases: a point, and the empty set
(2) Parabola: exactly one of x2 or y 2 appears
O
Ax2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0 (D 6= 0, opens upward or downward)
By 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0 (C 6= 0, opens to the right or left)
C
Examples: 3x2 12x + 2y + 26 = 0 (opens downward)
2y 2 + 3x + 12y 15 = 0 (opens to the right)
D
(3) Ellipse: both x2 and y 2 appear, and their coefficients A and B have the same
sign and are unequal
E
Examples: 2x2 + 5y 2 + 8x 10y 7 = 0 (horizontal major axis)

4x2 + y 2 16x 6y + 21 = 0 (vertical major axis)
EP
If A = B, we will classify the conic as a circle, instead of an ellipse.

Degenerate cases: a point, and the empty set
(4) Hyperbola: both x2 and y 2 appear, and their coefficients A and B have dif-
D
ferent signs
Examples: 5x2 3y 2 20x 18y 22 = 0 (horizontal transverse axis)
4x2 + y 2 + 24x + 4y 36 = 0 (vertical transverse axis)
Degenerate case: two intersecting lines
The following examples will show the possible degenerate conic (a point, two
intersecting lines, or the empty set) as the graph of an equation following a similar
pattern as the non-degenerate cases.
2 2 (x 2)2 (y + 1)2
(1) 4x + 9y 16x + 18y + 25 = 0 = + =0
32 22
= one point: (2, 1)
61
(x 2)2 (y + 1)2
(2) 4x2 + 9y 2 16x + 18y + 61 = 0 = + = 1
32 22
= empty set
(x 2)2 (y + 1)2
(3) 4x2 9y 2 16x 18y + 7 = 0 = =0
32 22
2
= two lines: y + 1 = (x 2)
3
A Note on Identifying a Conic Section

by Its General Equation
It is only after transforming a given general equation to standard
PY
form that we can identify its graph either as one of the degenerate
conic sections (a point, two intersecting lines, or the empty set) or as
one of the non-degenerate conic sections (circle, parabola, ellipse, or
hyperbola).
O
1.5.2. Problems Involving Different Conic Sections
C
The following examples require us to use the properties of different conic sections
at the same time.
D
Example 1.5.1. A circle has center at the focus of the parabola y 2 + 16x + 4y =
44, and is tangent to the directrix of this parabola. Find its standard equation.
E
Solution. The standard equation of the parabola is (y + 2)2 = 16(x 3). Its
vertex is V (3, 2). Since 4c = 16 or c = 4, its focus is F (1, 2) and its directrix
EP
is x = 7. The circle has center at (1, 2) and radius 8, which is the distance
from F to the directrix. Thus, the equation of the circle is
(x + 1)2 + (y + 2)2 = 64. 2

D
Example 1.5.2. The vertices and foci of 5x2 4y 2 + 50x + 16y + 29 = 0 are,
respectively, the foci and vertices of an ellipse. Find the standard equation of
this ellipse.
Solution. We first write the equation of the hyperbola in standard form:
(x + 5)2 (y 2)2
= 1.
16 20
For this hyperbola, using the notations ah , bh , and ch to refer to a, b, and c of
the standard
p equation of the hyperbola, respectively, we have a h = 4, b h = 2 5,
2 2
ch = ah + bh = 6, so we have the following points:
62
center: (5, 2)
vertices: (9, 2) and (1, 2)
foci: (11, 2) and (1, 2).
It means that, for the ellipse, we have these points:
center: (5, 2)
vertices: (11, 2) and (1, 2)
foci: (9, 2) and (1, 2).
p
In this case, ce = 4 and ae = 6, so that be = a2e c2e = 20. The standard
equation of the ellipse is
PY
(x + 5)2 (y 2)2
+ = 1. 2
36 20
O
C
1. Identify the graph of each of the following equations.
(a) 4x2 8x 49y 2 + 196y 388 = 0 (e) 36x2 +360x+64y 2 512y+1924 =

(b) x2 + 5x + y 2 y + 7 = 0 0
D
(c) y 2 48x + 6y = 729 (f) x2 + y 2 18y 19 = 0
(d) 49x2 + 196x + 100y 2 + 1400y + (g) 5x2 + 60x + 7y 2 + 84y + 72 = 0

E
196 = 0 (h) x2 16x + 20y = 136

EP
Solution:
(a) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 have opposite signs, the graph is a
hyperbola or a pair of intersecting lines. Completing the squares, we get
D
4x2 8x 49y 2 + 196y 388 = 0

4(x2 2x) 49(y 2 4y) = 388
4(x2 2x + 1) 49(y 2 4y + 4) = 388 + 4(1) 49(4)
(x 1)2 (y 2)2
= 1.
49 4
Thus, the graph is a hyperbola.
(b) Since x2 and y 2 have equal coefficients, the graph is a circle, a point, or
the empty set. Completing the squares, we get
x2 + 5x + y 2 y + 7 = 0
63
25 1 25 1
x2 + 5x + + y 2 y + = 7 + +
4 4 4 4
2 2
5 1 1
x+ + y = .
2 2 2
Since the right hand side is negative, the graph is the empty set.
(c) By inspection, the graph is a parabola.
(d) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are not equal but have the same sign,
the graph is an ellipse, a point, or the empty set. Completing the squares,
we get
49x2 + 196x + 100y 2 + 1400y + 196 = 0
PY
49(x2 + 4x) + 100(y 2 + 14y) = 196
49(x2 + 4x + 4) + 100(y 2 + 14y + 49) = 196 + 49(4) + 100(49)
(x + 2)2 (y + 7)2
+ = 1.
O
100 49
Thus, the graph is an ellipse. C
(e) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are not equal but have the same sign,
we get
D
36x2 + 360x + 64y 2 512y + 1924 = 0
36(x2 + 10x) + 64(y 2 8y) = 1924
E
36(x2 + 10x + 25) + 64(y 2 8y + 16) = 1924 + 36(25) + 64(16)

(x + 5)2 (y 4)2
+ = 0.
EP
64 36
Since the right-hand side is 0, the graph is a single point (the point is
(5, 4)).
(f) Since x2 and y 2 have equal coefficients, the graph is a circle, a point, or
D
the empty set. Completing the squares, we get
x2 + y 2 18y 19 = 0
x2 + y 2 18y + 81 = 19 + 81
x2 + (y 9)2 = 100.
Thus, the graph is a circle.

(g) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 have opposite signs, the graph is a
hyperbola or a pair of intersecting lines. Completing the squares, we get
5x2 + 60x + 7y 2 + 84y + 72 = 0
64
5(x2 12x) + 7(y 2 + 12y) = 72
5(x2 12x + 36) + 7(y 2 + 12y + 36) = 72 5(36) + 7(36)
(x 6)2 (y + 6)2
= 0.
7 5
Since the right handrside is 0, the graph is a pair of intersecting lines;
5
these are y + 6 = (x 6).
7
(h) By inspection, the graph is a parabola.
2. The center of a circle is the vertex of the parabola y 2 + 24x 12y + 132 = 0.
If the circle intersects the parabolas directrix at a point where y = 11, find
PY
the equation of the circle.
Solution:
y 2 12y = 24x 132
O
y 2 12y + 36 = 24x 132 + 36
(y 6)2 = 24x 96
C
(y 6)2 = 24(x + 4)
The vertex of the parabola is (4, 6) and its directrix is x = 2. Thus, the
circle has center (4, 6) and
contains the point (2, 11). Then its radius is
D
p
(4 2)2 + (6 11)2 = 61. Therefore, the equation of the circle is (x +
4)2 + (y 6)2 = 61.
E
3. The vertices of the hyperbola with equation 9x2 72x 16y 2 128y 256 = 0
are the foci of an ellipse that contains the point (8, 10). Find the standard
EP
equation of the ellipse.

Solution:
9x2 72x 16y 2 128y 256 = 0

9(x2 8x) 16(y 2 + 8y) = 256
D
9(x2 8x + 16) 16(y 2 + 8y + 16) = 256 + 9(16) 16(16)

(x 4)2 (y + 4)2
=1
16 9
The vertices of the hyperbola are (0, 4) and (8, 4). Since these are the foci
of the ellipse, the ellipse is horizontal with center C(4, 4); also, the focal
distance of the ellipse is c = 4. The sum of the distances of the point (8, 10)
from the foci is
p p
(8 0)2 + (10 (4))2 + (8 8)2 + (10 (4))2 = 16.
65
This sum is constant for any point on the ellipse; so 2a = 16 and a = 8. Then
b2 = 82 42 = 48. Therefore, the equation of the ellipse is
(x 4)2 (y + 4)2
+ = 1.
64 48

For items 1 to 8, identify the graph of each of the following equations.
1. 9x2 + 72x 64y 2 + 128y + 80 = 0
PY
2. 49x2 490x + 36y 2 + 504y + 1225 = 0
3. y 2 + 56x 18y + 417 = 0
4. x2 + 20x + y 2 20y + 200 = 0
O
5. x2 10x 48y + 265 = 0 C
6. 144x2 1152x + 25y 2 150y 5679 = 0
7. x2 + 4x + 16y 2 128y + 292 = 0

D
8. x2 6x + y 2 + 14y + 38 = 0
E
9. An ellipse has equation 100x2 1000x + 36y 2 144y 956 = 0. Find the
standard equations of all circles whose center is a focus of the ellipse and
which contains at least one of the ellipses vertices.
EP
10. Find all parabolas whose focus is a focus of the hyperbola x2 2x3y 2 2 = 0
and whose directrix contains the top side of the hyperbolas auxiliary rectangle.
11. Find the equation of the circle that contains all corners of the auxiliary rect-
D
angle of the hyperbola x2 18x + y 2 + 10y 81 = 0.
12. Find the equations of all horizontal parabolas whose focus is the center of the
ellipse 9x2 + 17y 2 170y + 272 = 0 and whose directrix is tangent to the same
ellipse.
13. Find all values of r 6= 1 so that the graph of
(r 1)x2 + 14(r 1)x + (r 1)y 2 6(r 1)y = 60 57r
is
(a) a circle,
66
(b) a point,
(c) the empty set.
14. Find all values of m 6= 7, 0 so that the graph of
2mx2 16mx + my 2 + 7y 2 = 2m2 18m
is
(a) a circle.
(b) a horizontal ellipse.
(c) a vertical ellipse.
PY
(d) a hyperbola.
(e) the empty set.
O
4
Lesson 1.6. Systems of Nonlinear Equations

C
D
E
(1) illustrate systems of nonlinear equations;

(2) determine the solutions of systems of nonlinear equations using techniques
EP
such as substitution, elimination, and graphing; and

(3) solve situational problems involving systems of nonlinear equations.
Lesson Outline
D
(1) Review systems of linear equations

(2) Solving a system involving one linear and one quadratic equation
(3) Solving a system involving two quadratic equations
(4) Applications of systems of nonlinear equations
Introduction
After recalling the techniques used in solving systems of linear equations in
Grade 8, we extend these methods to solving a system of equations to systems
in which the equations are not necessarily linear. In this lesson, the equations
are restricted to linear and quadratic types, although it is possible to adapt the
67
methodology to systems with other types of equations. We focus on quadratic
equations for two reasons: to include a graphical representation of the solution
and to ensure that either a solution is obtained or it is determined that there is
no solution. The latter is possible because of the quadratic formula.
1.6.1. Review of Techniques in Solving Systems of Linear

Equations
Recall the methods we used to solve systems of linear equations.There were three
methods used: substitution, elimination, and graphical.
Example 1.6.1. Use the substitution method to solve the system, and sketch
PY
the graphs in one Cartesian plane showing the point of intersection.

4x + y = 6
5x + 3y = 4
O
Solution. Isolate the variable y in the first equation, and then substitute into the
second equation.
C
4x + y = 6
D
= y = 6 4x
E
5x + 3y = 4
5x + 3(6 4x) = 4
EP
7x + 18 = 4
x=2
y = 6 4(2) = 2
D
Example 1.6.2. Use the elimination method to solve the system, and sketch the
graphs in one Cartesian plane showing the point of intersection.

2x + 7 = 3y
4x + 7y = 12
Solution. We eliminate first the variable x. Rewrite the first equation wherein
only the constant term is on the right-hand side of the equation, then multiply
it by 2, and then add the resulting equation to the second equation.
68
2x 3y = 7
(2)(2x 3y) = (2)(7)
4x + 6y = 14
4x + 6y = 14
4x + 7y = 12
13y = 26
y=2
1
PY
x=
2
1.6.2. Solving Systems of Equations Using Substitution
O
We begin our extension with a system involving one linear equation and one
quadratic equation. In this case, it is always possible to use substitution by
C
solving the linear equation for one of the variables.
Example 1.6.3. Solve the following system, and sketch the graphs in one Carte-
D
sian plane.
xy+2=0
E
y 1 = x2
EP
Solution. We solve for y in terms of x in the first equation, and substitute this
expression to the second equation.
xy+2=0 = y =x+2
D
y 1 = x2

(x + 2) 1 = x2 1+ 5 1+ 5 5+ 5
x= = y = +2=
x2 x 1 = 0 2 2 2
1 5 1 5 5 5
1 5 x= = y = +2=
x= 2 2 2
2
! !
1+ 5 5+ 5 1 5 5 5
Solutions: , and ,
2 2 2 2
69
The first equation represents a line with x-intercept 2 and y-intercept 2,
while the second equation represents a parabola with vertex at (0, 1) and which
opens upward.
PY
O
C
1.6.3. Solving Systems of Equations Using Elimination
Elimination method is also useful in systems of nonlinear equations. Sometimes,

some systems need both techniques (substitution and elimination) to solve them.
D
Example 1.6.4. Solve the following system:
E

y 2 4x 6y = 11
4(3 x) = (y 3)2 .
EP
Solution 1. We expand the second equation, and eliminate the variable x by

adding the equations.
4(3 x) = (y 3)2 = 12 4x = y 2 6y + 9 = y 2 + 4x 6y = 3
D

y 2 4x 6y = 11
y 2 + 4x 6y = 3
Adding these equations, we get
2y 2 12y = 14 = y 2 6y7 = 0 = (y7)(y+1) = 0 = y = 7 or y = 1.
Solving for x in the second equation, we have
(y 3)2
x=3 .
4
70
y = 7 = x = 1 and y = 1 = x = 1
Solutions: (1, 7) and (1, 1) 2
The graphs of the equations in the preceding example with the points of
intersection are shown below.
PY
O
C
Usually, the general form is more convenient to use in solving systems of
D
equations. However, sometimes the solution can be simplified by writing the
equations in standard form. Moreover, the standard form is best for graphing.
E
Let us again solve the previous example in a different way.

EP
Solution 2. By completing the square, we can change the first equation into stan-
dard form:
y 2 4x 6y = 11 = 4(x + 5) = (y 3)2 .

4(x + 5) = (y 3)2
D
4(3 x) = (y 3)2
Using substitution or the transitive property of equality, we get
4(x + 5) = 4(3 x) = x = 1.
Substituting this value of x into the second equation, we have
4[3 (1)] = (y 3)2 = 16 = (y 3)2 = y = 7 or y = 1.
The solutions are (1, 7) and (1, 1), same as Solution 1. 2
71
Example 1.6.5. Solve the system and graph the curves:

(x 3)2 + (y 5)2 = 10
x2 + (y + 1)2 = 25.
Solution. Expanding both equations, we obtain

x2 + y 2 6x 10y + 24 = 0
x2 + y 2 + 2y 24 = 0.
Subtracting these two equations, we get
PY
6x 12y + 48 = 0 = x + 2y 8 = 0
x = 8 2y.
We can substitute x = 8 2y to either the first equation or the second equation.
O
For convenience, we choose the second equation.
x2 + y 2 + 2y 24 = 0
(8 2y)2 + y 2 + 2y 24 = 0
C
y 2 6y + 8 = 0
y = 2 or y = 4
D
y = 2 = x = 8 2(2) = 4 and y = 4 = x = 8 2(4) = 0
The solutions are (4, 2) and (0, 4).
E
The graphs of both equations are circles. One has center (3, 5) and radius
10, while the other has center (0, 1) and radius 5. The graphs with the points
EP
of intersection are show below.

D
72
1.6.4. Applications of Systems of Nonlinear Equations
Let us apply systems of equations to a problem involving modern-day television

sets.
? Example 1.6.6. The screen size of television sets is given in inches. This
indicates the length of the diagonal. Screens of the same size can come in different
shapes. Wide-screen TVs usually have screens with aspect ratio 16 : 9, indicating
the ratio of the width to the height. Older TV models often have aspect ratio
4 : 3. A 40-inch LED TV has screen aspect ratio 16 : 9. Find the length and the
PY
width of the screen.
Solution. Let w represent the width and h the height of the screen. Then, by
Pythagorean Theorem, we have the system
O

w2 + h2 = 402 = w2 + h2 = 1600
w = 16 = h = 9w
h 9 16
C
2
2 2 2 9w
w + h = 1600 = w + = 1600
D
16
337w2
= 1600
E
256
r
409 600
34.86
EP
w=
337
19x 19(34.86)
h= = 19.61
16 16
Therefore, a 40-inch TV with aspect ratio 16 : 9 is about 35.86 inches wide and
D
19.61 inches high. 2

Solve the system and graph the curves.

x2 y 2 = 21
1.
x+y = 7
Solution: We can write y in terms of x using the second equation as y = 7 x.
73
Substituting this into the first equation, we have
x2 (7 x)2 = 21
14x 70 = 0
x = 5.
Thus, the point of intersection is (5, 2).
PY
O
C
E D

x2 + y 2 x + 6y + 5 = 0
2.
EP
x+y+1 = 0
Solution: We can write y in terms of x using the second equation as y =
(x + 1).
Substituting this into the first equation, we have
D
x2 + ((x + 1))2 x + 6((x + 1)) + 5 = 0

2x2 5x = 0
x(2x 5) = 0,
5
which yields x = 0 and x = . Thus, the points of intersection are (0, 1)
2
5 7
and , .
2 2
74
PY

(y 2)2 = 4(x 4)
3.
(y 4)2 = x 5
O
Solution: We can rewrite the first equation as
C (y 2)2
x4= ,
4
which can be substituted into the second equation by rewriting it as
D
2 (y 2)2
(y 4) = (x 4) 1 = 1
4
E
which upon expansion yields

EP
3y 2 28y + 64 = 0.
This
equation
has roots y = 16/3 and y = 4, giving us the points (5, 4) and
61 16
, .
9 3
D
75
1

x = (y + 5)2 2
4. 2
y 2 + 10y + (x 2)2 = 9
Solution: We can rewrite the first equation as
(y + 5)2 = 2x + 4,
which can be substituted into the second equation by completing the square
to get
(y 2 + 10y + 25) + (x 2)2 = 9 + 25
PY
(y + 5)2 + (x 2)2 = 16
(2x + 4) + (x 2)2 = 16
x2 2x 8 = 0,
has roots x =2and x = 4, giving us the points (2, 5),
O
This equation

(4, 5 12), and 4, 5 + 12 .
C
E D
EP
D
Find the system of equations that represents the given problem and solve.
5. The difference of two numbers is 12, and the sum of their squares is 144. Find
the numbers.
Solution: If x and y are the two numbers, then we have the resulting system
(
xy = 12
x2 + y 2 = 144,
where the first equation yields x = y + 12. Combining this with the second
equation yields (y + 12)2 + y 2 = 144 or equivalently 2y(y + 12) = 0, giving us
the ordered pairs (12, 0) and (0, 12).
76
1. Solve the system and graph the curves:

x2 + 3x y + 2 = 0
(a)
y 5x = 1

(y 2)2 = 9(x + 2)
(b)
9x2 + 4y 2 + 18x 16y = 0

(x + 1)2 + 2(y 4)2 = 12
(c)
PY
y 2 8y = 4x 16

x2 2x 4y 2 + 8y 2 = 0
(d)
5x2 10x + 12y 2 + 24y 58 = 0
O

x2 + y 2 = 2
(e)
xy = 4
C
2. Ram is speeding along a highway when he sees a police motorbike parked on
the side of the road right next to him. He immediately starts slowing down,
but the police motorbike accelerates to catch up with him. It is assumed that
D
the two vehicles are going in the same direction in parallel paths.
The distance that Ram has traveled in meters t seconds after he starts to
E
slow down is given by d (t) = 150 + 75t 1.2t2 . The distance that the police
motorbike travels can be modeled by the equation d (t) = 4t2 . How long will
EP
it take for the police motorbike to catch up to Ram?

3. The square of a certain number exceeds twice the square of another number
1 5
by . Also, the sum of their squares is . Find possible pairs of numbers
8 16
that satisfy these conditions.
D
4. Solve the system of equations

x2 + y 2 = 41
xy = 20
5. Determine the value(s) of k such that the circle x2 + (y 6)2 = 36 and the
parabola x2 = 4ky will intersect only at the origin.
77
Topic Test 1 for Unit 1
3
(a) x2 x + y 2 + 3y 2
=0 (c) 3x2 42x 4y 2 24y + 99 = 0
(b) x2 + 4x 14y = 52 (d) 7x2 112x + 2y 2 + 448 = 0
2. Determine and sketch the conic with the given equation. Identify the impor-
tant parts of the conic and include them in the graph.
(a) 25x2 + 7y 2 175 = 0
PY
(b) 64x2 + 128x + 36y 2 + 288y 1792 = 0
3. Find the equation of the conic with the given properties.
(a) parabola; vertex at (1, 3); directrix x = 7
O
12 1
(b) hyperbola; asymptotes y = 5
x 5
and y = 12
5
x 49
5
; one vertex at
(3, 5) C
4. Solve the following system of equations:

(x 1)2 + (y + 1)2 = 5
D
y = 2(x 1)2 8
E
5. A doorway is in the shape of a rectangle capped by a semi-ellipse. If the

rectangle is 1 m wide and 2 m high while the ellipse is 0.3 m high at the
center, can a cabinet that is 2.26 m high, 0.5 m wide, and 2 m long be pushed
EP
through the doorway? Assume that the cabinet cannot be laid down on its
side.
6. A point moves so that its distance from the point (0, 1) is twice its distance
from the line x = 3. Derive the equation (in standard form) of the curve that
D
is traced by the point, and identify the curve.
78
(a) y 2 + 8x 10y = 15
(b) x2 + 10x + y 2 + 18y + 110 = 0
(c) 9x2 + 36x + 4y 2 8y + 4 = 0
(d) 11x2 + 132x + 17y 2 136y 124 = 0
2. Determine and sketch the conic with the given equation. Identify the impor-
tant parts of the conic and include them in the graph.
PY
(a) x2 y 2 = 64 (b) 4x2 + 24x + 49y 2 196y + 36
3. Find the equation of the conic with the given properties.
O
(a) parabola; directrix y = 2; focus at (7, 12)
(b) ellipse; vertical or horizontal major axis; one vertex at (5, 12); one
covertex at (1, 3)
C
4. Solve the following system of equations:

D
9x2 4y 2 + 54x + 45 = 0
(x + 3)2 = 4y + 4
E
5. Nikko goes to his garden to water his plants. He holds the water hose 3 feet
EP
above the ground, with the hoses opening as the vertex and the water flow
following a parabolic path. The water strikes the ground a horizontal distance
of 2 feet from where the opening is located. If he were to stand on a 1.5 feet
stool, how much further would the water strike the ground?
D
6. A point moves so that its distance from the point (2, 0) is two-thirds its dis-
tance from the line y = 5. Derive the equation (in standard form) of the curve
that is traced by the point, and identify the curve.
79
Unit 2
Mathematical Induction
PY
O
C
E D
EP
Batad Rice Terraces in Ifugao, by Ericmontalban, 30 September 2012,

D
https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File%3ABatad rice terraces in Ifugao.jpg. Public Domain.
Listed as one of the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural

Organization (UNESCO) World Heritage sites since 1995, the two-millennium-
old Rice Terraces of the Philippine Cordilleras by the Ifugaos is a living testimony
of mankinds creative engineering to adapt to physically-challenging environment
in nature. One of the five clusters of terraces inscribed in the UNESCO list is
the majestic Batad terrace cluster (shown above), which is characterized by its
amphitheater-like, semicircular terraces with a village at its base.
81
Lesson 2.1. Review of Sequences and Series

(1) illustrate a series; and
(2) differentiate a series from a sequence.
Lesson Outline
(1) Sequences and series
PY
(2) Different types of sequences and series (Fibonacci sequence, arithmetic and
geometric sequence and series, and harmonic series)
(3) Difference between sequence and series
O
Introduction
In this lesson, we will review the definitions and different types of sequences
and series.
C
Lesson Proper
Recall the following definitions:
D
A sequence is a function whose domain is the set of positive integers
E
or the set {1, 2, 3, . . . , n}.

EP
A series represents the sum of the terms of a sequence.

If a sequence is finite, we will refer to the sum of the terms of the
sequence as the series associated with the sequence. If the sequence has
infinitely many terms, the sum is defined more precisely in calculus.
D
A sequence is a list of numbers (separated by commas), while a series is a

sum of numbers (separated by + or sign). As an illustration, 1, 21 , 13 , 41
is a sequence, and 1 21 + 13 41 = 12
7
is its associated series.
The sequence with nth term an is usually denoted by {an }, and the associated
series is given by
S = a1 + a2 + a3 + + an .
81
Example 2.1.1. Determine the first five terms of each defined sequence, and
give their associated series.
(1) {2 n} (3) {(1)n }
(2) {1 + 2n + 3n2 } (4) {1 + 2 + 3 + + n}
Solution. We denote the nth term of a sequence by an , and S = a1 + a2 + a3 +

a4 + a5 .
(1) an = 2 n
First five terms: a1 = 2 1 = 1, a2 = 2 2 = 0, a3 = 1, a4 = 2, a5 = 3
Associated series: S = a1 + a2 + a3 + a4 + a5 = 1 + 0 1 2 3 = 5
PY
(2) an = 1 + 2n + 3n2
First five terms: a1 = 1 + 2 1 + 3 12 = 6, a2 = 17, a3 = 34, a4 = 57, a5 = 86
Associated series: S = 6 + 17 + 34 + 57 + 86 = 200
O
(3) an = (1)n
First five terms: a1 = (1)1 = 1, a2 = (1)2 = 1, a3 = 1, a4 = 1,
a5 = 1
C
Associated series: S = 1 + 1 1 + 1 1 = 1
(4) an = 1 + 2 + 3 + + n
D
First five terms: a1 = 1, a2 = 1+2 = 3, a3 = 1+2+3 = 6, a4 = 1+2+3+4 =
10, a5 = 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 = 15
E
Associated series: S = 1 + 3 + 6 + 10 + 15 = 35 2
EP
The sequence {an } defined by an = an1 + an2 for n 3, where a1 =

a2 = 1, is called a Fibonacci sequence. It terms are 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, . . ..
An arithmetic sequence is a sequence in which each term after the first

D
is obtained by adding a constant (called the common difference) to the

preceding term.
If the nth term of an arithmetic sequence is an and the common difference is

d, then
an = a1 + (n 1)d.
The associated arithmetic series with n terms is given by
n(a1 + an ) n[2a1 + (n 1)d]
Sn = = .
2 2
82
A geometric sequence is a sequence in which each term after the first
is obtained by multiplying the preceding term by a constant (called
the common ratio).
If the nth term of a geometric sequence is an and the common ratio is r, then
an = a1 rn1 .
The associated geometric series with n terms is given by

na1
if r = 1
PY
Sn = n
a1 (1 r )
6 1.
if r =
(1 r)

The proof of this sum formula is an example in Lesson 2.3.

When 1 < r < 1, the infinite geometric series
O
a1 + a1 r + a1 r2 + + a1 rn1 +
C
has a sum, and is given by
a1
S= .
1r
D
If {an } is an arithmetic sequence, then the sequence with nth term
bn = a1n is a harmonic sequence.
E
EP

1. How many terms are there in an arithmetic sequence with first term 5, common
difference 3, and last term 76?
D
Solution: a1 = 5, d = 3, an = 76. Find n.

an = 5 + (n 1)(3) = 76
76 5
n1= = 27, n = 28
3
2. List the first three terms of the arithmetic sequence if the 25th term is 35 and
the 30th term is 5.
Solution: a24 = a1 + 24d = 35 and a30 = a1 + 29d = 5
Eliminating a1 by subtraction, 5d = 30, or d = 6
This implies that a1 = 179, and the first three terms are 179, 173, 167.
83
3. Find the sum of all positive three-digit odd integers.
Solution: Find sn if a1 = 101 = 1 + 50(2), an = 999 = 1 + 499(2).
There are 450 terms from a1 to an , hence n = 450.
450(101 + 999)
sn = = 247 500
2
4. The seventh term of a geometric sequence is 6 and the tenth term is 162.
Find the fifth term.
Solution: a7 = a1 r6 = 6 and a10 = a1 r9 = 162.
a10 162
Eliminating a1 by division: = r3 = = 27. Thus r = 3
a7 6
PY
6 2
Since a5 r2 = a7 , a5 = = .
9 3
5. Insert three numbers (called geometric means) between 6 and 32/27, so that
the five numbers form a geometric sequence.
O
Solution: If a1 = 6 and there are three terms between a1 and 32/27, then
a5 = 32/27. C
32 16 2
a5 = 6(r)4 = r4 = r=
27 81 3
One possible set of three numbers is 4, 8/3, 16/9, the other is 4, 8/3, 16/9.
D
6. A ball dropped from the top of a building 180 m high always rebounds three-
fourths the distance it has fallen. How far (up and down) will the ball have
E
traveled when it hits the ground for the 6th time?

Solution: a1 = 180, r = 3/4, n = 6
EP
h i
3 6
180 1 4
s6 =
1 34
The ball traveled 2s6 180 1003.71 meters.
D
7. The Cantor set is formed as follows. Divide a segment of one unit into three
equal parts. Remove the middle one-third of the segment. From each of the
two remaining segments, remove the middle third. From each of the remaining
segments, remove the middle third. This process is continued indefinitely. Find
the total length of the segments removed.
Solution: Let an represent the total length removed in the nth iteration. Hence
a1 = 1/3, a2 = 2/9, a3 = 4/27, and so on.
1
2
This means r = . The sum to infinity is s = 3 2 = 1.
3 1 3
The total length of the segments removed is 1 unit.
84
8. The 7th term of an arithmetic sequence is 25. Its first, third, and 21st term
form a geometric sequence. Find the first term and the common difference of
the sequence.
Solution: a7 = a1 + 6d = 25 a1 = 25 6d
a3 a21
= , or a1 a21 = a23 .
a1 a3
(25 6d) (25 6d + 20d) = (25 6d + 2d)2
d = 0 and an = 25 for all n, or d = 4 and a1 = 1.
9. Let {an } be an arithmetic sequence and {bn } an arithmetic sequence of positive

integers. Prove that the sequence with nth term abn is arithmetic.
PY
Solution: Let the common difference of {an } be d and of {bn } be c.
abn+1 abn = [a1 + (bn+1 1) d] [a1 + (bn 1) d] = bn+1 bn = c
This proves that the difference between any two consecutive terms of {abn } is
a constant independent of n.
O
10. Let {an } be a geometric sequence. Prove that {a3n } is a geometric sequence.
C
Solution: Let r be the common ratio of {an }.
3 n1
a3n = (a1 rn1 ) = a31 (r3 ) .
Thus {a3n } is a geometric sequence with first term a31 and common ratio r3 .
D
11. If {an } is a sequence such that its first three terms form both an arithmetic
and a geometric sequence, what can be concluded about {an }?
E
Solution: There is a real number r such that a2 = a1 r and a3 = a1 r2 .

Since a1 , a2 and a3 form an arithmetic sequence, then a2 a1 = a3 a2 , or
EP
a3 2a2 + a1 = 0.
a3 2a2 + a1 = a1 r2 2a1 r + a1 = a1 (r 1)2 = 0 a1 = 0 or r = 1.
If a1 = 0, then a1 = a2 = a3 = 0. If r = 1, then a1 = a2 = a3 .
D
In all cases, a1 = a2 = a3 .

1. Find the 5th term of the arithmetic sequence whose 3rd term is 35 and whose
10th term is 77.
2
2. Suppose that the fourth term of a geometric sequence is 9
and the sixth term
8
is 81 . Find the first term and the common ratio.
85
3. The partial sum in the arithmetic series with first term 17 and a common
difference 3 is 30705. How many terms are in the series?
4. An arithmetic sequence a1 , a2 , . . . , a100 has a sum of 15,000. Find the first

term and the common difference if the sum of the terms in the sequence
a3 , a6 , a9 , . . . , a99 is 5016.
5. The sum of an infinite geometric series is 108, while the sum of the first 3
terms is 112. Determine the first term of this series.
32 20 33 21 3k+1 2k1
6. Evaluate the infinite series + + + + .
51 52 5k
PY
7. Let n = 0.123 = 0.123123 . . . be a nonterminating repeating decimal. Find
a rational number that is equal to n by expressing n as an infinite geometric
series. Simplify your answer.
8. An arithmetic sequence whose first term is 2 has the property that its sec-
O
ond, third, and seventh terms are consecutive terms of a geometric sequence.
Determine all possible second terms of the arithmetic sequence.
C
9. Eighty loaves of bread are to be divided among 4 people so that the amounts
they receive form an arithmetic progression. The first two together receive
one-third of what the last two receive. How many loaves does each person
receive?
D
10. Given a and b, suppose that three numbers are inserted between them so
that the five numbers form a geometric sequence. If the product of the three
E
inserted numbers between a and b is 27, show that ab = 9.
11. For what values of n will the infinite series (2n 1) + (2n 1)2 + . . . +
EP
(2n 1)i + . . . have a finite value?
4
D
Lesson 2.2. Sigma Notation

At the end of the lesson, the student is able to use the sigma notation to
represent a series.
Lesson Outline
(1) Definition of and writing in sigma notation
86
(2) Evaluate sums written in sigma notation
(3) Properties of sigma notation
(4) Calculating sums using the properties of sigma notation
Introduction
The sigma notation is a shorthand for writing sums. In this lesson, we will
see the power of this notation in computing sums of numbers as well as algebraic
expressions.
2.2.1. Writing and Evaluating Sums in Sigma Notation
PY
Mathematicians use the sigma notation to denote a sum. The uppercase Greek
letter (sigma) is used to indicate a sum. The notation consists of several
components or parts.
O
Let f (i) be an expression involving an integer i. The expression
f (m) + f (m + 1) + f (m + 2) + + f (n)
C
can be compactly written in sigma notation, and we write it as
n
D
X
f (i),
i=m
E
which is read the summation of f (i) from i = m to n. Here, m

and n are integers with m n, f (i) is a term (or summand ) of the
summation, and the letter i is the index, m the lower bound, and n
EP
the upper bound.
Example 2.2.1. Expand each summation, and simplify if possible.

4 Xn
D
X
(1) (2i + 3) (3) ai
i=2 i=1
5 6
X
i
X n
(2) 2 (4)
i=0 n=1
n+1
Solution. We apply the definition of sigma notation.
4
X
(1) (2i + 3) = [2(2) + 3] + [2(3) + 3] + [2(4) + 3] = 27
i=2
87
5
X
(2) 2i = 20 + 21 + 22 + 23 + 24 + 25 = 63
i=0
n
X
(3) ai = a1 + a2 + a3 + + an
i=1
6
X n 1 2 3 2 5 6
(4) = + + + + + 2
n=1
n+1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Example 2.2.2. Write each expression in sigma notation.
1 1 1 1
(1) 1 + + + + +
2 3 4 100
PY
(2) 1 + 2 3 + 4 5 + 6 7 + 8 9 + 25
(3) a2 + a4 + a6 + a8 + + a20
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(4) 1 + + + + + + +
O
2 4 8 16 32 64 128
100
1 1 1 1 X1
Solution. (1) 1 + + + + + =
2 3 4 100 n=1 n
C
(2) 1 + 2 3 + 4 5 + 25
= (1)1 1 + (1)2 2 + (1)3 3 + (1)4 4
D
+ (1)5 5 + + (1)25 25
25
E
X
= (1)j j
j=1
EP
(3) a2 + a4 + a6 + a8 + + a20
= a2(1) + a2(2) + a2(3) + a2(4) + + a2(10)
10
X
= a2i
D
i=1
7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X 1
(4) 1 + + + + + + + = 2
2 4 8 16 32 64 128 k=0 2k
The sigma notation of a sum expression is not necessarily unique. For ex-
ample, the last item in the preceding example can also be expressed in sigma
notation as follows:
8
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X 1
1+ + + + + + + = .
2 4 8 16 32 64 128 k=1 2k1
However, this last sigma notation is equivalent to the one given in the example.
88
2.2.2. Properties of Sigma Notation
We start with finding a formula for the sum of

n
X
i = 1 + 2 + 3 + + n
i=1
in terms of n.
The sum can be evaluated in different ways. One informal but simple approach
is pictorial.
PY
O
C
D
n
X n(n + 1)
i = 1 + 2 + 3 + + n =
E
i=1
2
EP
Another way is to use the formula for an arithmetic series with a1 = 1 and
an = n:
n(a1 + an ) n(n + 1)
S= = .
2 2
We now derive some useful summation facts. They are based on the axioms
D
of arithmetic addition and multiplication.
n
X n
X
cf (i) = c f (i), c any real number.
i=m i=m
Proof.
n
X
cf (i) = cf (m) + cf (m + 1) + cf (m + 2) + + cf (n)
i=m
89
= c[f (m) + f (m + 1) + + f (n)]
Xn
=c f (i) 2
i=m
n
X n
X n
X
[f (i) + g(i)] = f (i) + g(i)
i=m i=m i=m
Proof.
PY
n
X
[f (i) + g(i)]
i=m
= [f (m) + g(m)] + + [f (n) + g(n)]
= [f (m) + + f (n)] + [g(m) + + g(n)]
O
Xn X n
= f (i) + g(i)
C 2
i=m i=m
n
X
c = c(n m + 1)
D
i=m
E
Proof.
EP
n
X
c = c| + c + c{z+ + }c
i=m nm+1 terms
= c(n m + 1) 2
D
A special case of the above result which you might encounter more often is
the following:
Xn
c = cn.
i=1
Telescoping Sum
n
X
[f (i + 1) f (i)] = f (n + 1) f (m)
i=m
90
Proof.
n
X
f (i + 1) f (i)
i=m
= [f (m + 1) f (m)] + [f (m + 2) f (m + 1)]
+ [f (m + 3) f (m + 2)] + + [f (n + 1) f (n)]
Note that the terms, f (m + 1), f (m + 2), . . . , f (n), all cancel out. Hence, we have
n
X
[f (i + 1) f (i)] = f (n + 1) f (m). 2
i=m
PY
30
X
Example 2.2.3. Evaluate: (4i 5).
i=1
O
Solution.
30
X 30
X 30
X
(4i 5) = 4i 5
i=1
C i=1 i=1
X30 X30
=4 i 5
D
i=1 i=1
(30)(31)
=4 5(30)
2
E
= 1710 2
Example 2.2.4. Evaluate:

EP
1 1 1 1
+ + + + .
12 23 34 99 100
Solution.
D
1 1 1 1
+ + + +
12 23 34 99 100
99
X 1
=
i=1
i(i + 1)
99
X i+1i
=
i=1
i(i + 1)
99
X i+1 i
=
i=1
i(i + 1) i(i + 1)
91
99
X 1 1
=
i=1
i i+1
99
X 1 1
=
i=1
i+1 i
1
Using f (i) = and the telescoping-sum property, we get
i
99
X 1 1 1 99
= = . 2
i=1
i(i + 1) 100 1 100
PY
n
X
Example 2.2.5. Derive a formula for i2 using a telescoping sum with terms
i=1
f (i) = i3 .
O
Solution. The telescoping sum property implies that
n
X 3
i (i 1)3 = n3 03 = n3 .
C
i=1
On the other hand, using expansion and the other properties of summation,
we have
D
n
X n
3 X
i (i 1)3 = (i3 i3 + 3i2 3i + 1)
E
i=1 i=1
Xn Xn n
X
2
=3 i 3 i+ 1
EP
i=1 i=1 i=1

n
X n(n + 1)
=3 i2 3 + n.
i=1
2
D
Equating the two results above, we obtain
n
X 3n(n + 1)
3 i2 + n = n3
i=1
2
Xn
6 i2 3n(n + 1) + 2n = 2n3
i=1
Xn
6 i2 = 2n3 2n + 3n(n + 1)
i=1
92
= 2n(n2 1) + 3n(n + 1)
= 2n(n 1)(n + 1) + 3n(n + 1)
= n(n + 1)[2(n 1) + 3]
= n(n + 1)(2n + 1).
Finally, after dividing both sides of the equation by 6, we obtain the desired
formula n
X n(n + 1)(2n + 1)
i2 = . 2
i=1
6
PY
1. Expand the following sums and simplify if possible:
O
5
X
(a) (i2 i + 1)
i=1
6
X
2

i+1
2
C
(b) i
i=3
2
D
5
X
(c) x3i y 153i
i=0
E
9
X x2i+1
(d)
(i + 1)2
EP
i=1

X
(e) 3i+2 2i+1
i=1
Solution:
D
5
X
(a) (i2 i + 1) = (12 1 + 1) + (22 2 + 1) + . . . + (52 5 + 1) = 45 or
i=1
5(5 + 1)(2(5) + 1) 5(5 + 1)
+ 5 = 45
6 2
6 2 2 2
X
2 i+1 2 4 2 7
(b) i =3 + ... + 6 = 802
i=3
2 2 2
5
X
(c) x3i y 153i = x3(0) y 153(0) + . . . + x3(5) y 153(5) = xy 15 + x3 y 12 + x6 y 9 +
i=0
x9 y 6 + x12 y 3 + x15 y
93
9
X x2i+1 x3 x5 x19
(d) 2
= 2
+ 2
+ . . . + 2
= 4x3 + 9x5 + 16x7 +
i=1
(i + 1) (1 + 1) (2 + 1) (9 + 1)
. . . + 100x19
i+1
X
i+2 i+1
X 2
(e) 3 2 = 27 , which is an infinite geometric series with
i=1 i=1
3

2 4 X 4/9
|r| = < 1 and a1 = , giving us 3i+2 2i+1 = 27 = 36.
3 9 i=1
1 (2/3)
20
X
2. Evaluate [2(i 1) + 2].
i=1
PY
20 20
X X (20)(21)
Solution: (2(i 1) + 2) = 2i = 4 = 840.
i=1 i=1
2
1 1 1 1
3. Find a formula for + + + + given any positive
O
1(3) 2(4) 3(5) n(n + 2)
integer n.
n
1 1 1 1 1
Solution: We have + +
1(3) 2(4) 3(5)
+ +
Cn(n + 2)
=
X
i(i + 2)
. Rewriting
i=1
yields
1 (2 1) + (i i) 1 1 1
D
= =
i(i + 2) i(i + 2) i i + 2 i(i + 2)
or equivalently
E

1 1 1 1
= .
i+2 2 i i+2
EP
Expanding the sum term by term,
n n
X 1 X 1 1 1
=
i(i + 2) 2 i i+2
D
i=1 i=1

1 1 1 1 1
= 1 + +
3 2 4 3 5

1 1 1 1 1 1
+ + +
n2 n n1 n+1 n n+2
1 1 1
=1+
2 n+1 n+2
n(3n + 2)
= .
2(n + 1)(n + 2)
94
N
X 1 97
4. Determine the value of N such that = .
i=0
i2 + 3i + 2 98
Solution: Rewrite the sum as
N N
X 1 X 1
2
=
i=1
i + 3i + 2 i=1
(i + 1)(i + 2)
N
X 1 1
=
i=1
i + 1 i+2
PY
1
Set f (i) = and use telescoping sums to get
i+1
O
N N
X 1 X 1 1
=
i=1
i2 + 3i + 2
C i=1
i+2 i+1

1 1
=
N +2 1
N +1
= .
D
N +2
E
97
Since we want the sum to be equal to , N = 96.
98
EP

D
1. Expand the following sums:

10
X i
(a) 3
i=3
2
5
X x2i
(b)
i=1
2i
5
X
(c) (1)i xi1
i=2
2. Write the following in sigma notation.
95
(a) (x + 5) (x + 3)2 + (x + 1)3 (x 1)4
1 22 32 102
(b) + + + . . . +
33 43 53 113
(c) a3 + a6 + a9 + . . . + a81
3. Evaluate the following sums

150
X
(a) (4i + 2)
i=1
120
X
(b) i(i 5)
PY
i=3
50
X
(c) (2i 1)(2i + 1)
i=1
50 50 50
g(i) + 3f (i)
O
X X X
4. If f (i) = 20 and g(i) = 30, what is the value of ?
i=1 i=1 i=1
2
5. If s =
200
X 2 2

(i 1) i , express
200
X
C
i in terms of s.
i=1 i=1
n n n
D
X X X ai s
6. If s = ai and t = bi , does it follow that = ?
i=1 i=1 i=1
bi t
E
4
EP
Lesson 2.3. Principle of Mathematical Induction

D

(1) illustrate the Principle of Mathematical Induction; and
(2) apply mathematical induction in proving identities.
Lesson Outline
(1) State the Principle of Mathematical Induction
(2) Prove summation identities using mathematical induction
(3) Prove divisibility statements using mathematical induction
(4) Prove inequalities using mathematical induction
96
Introduction
We have derived and used formulas for the terms of arithmetic and geometric
sequences and series. These formulas and many other theorems involving positive
integers can be proven with the use of a technique called mathematical induction.
2.3.1. Proving Summation Identities
The Principle of Mathematical Induction

Let P (n) be a property or statement about an integer n. Suppose
that the following conditions can be proven:
PY
(1) P (n0 ) is true (that is, the statement is true when n = n0 ).
(2) If P (k) is true for some integer k n0 , then P (k + 1) is true
(that is, if the statement is true for n = k, then it is also true for
n = k + 1).
O
Then the statement P (n) is true for all integers n n0 .
C
The Principle of Mathematical Induction is often compared to climbing an
infinite staircase. First, you need to be able to climb up to the first step. Second,
D
if you are on any step (n = k), you must be able to climb up to the next step
(n = k + 1). If you can do these two things, then you will be able to climb up
the infinite staircase.
E
EP
D
Part 1 Part 2
Another analogy of the Principle of Mathematical Induction that is used is

toppling an infinite line of standing dominoes. You need to give the first domino
a push so that it falls down. Also, the dominoes must be arranged so that if the
kth domino falls down, the next domino will also fall down. These two conditions
will ensure that the entire line of dominoes will fall down.
97
PY
O
Standing Domino Tiles, by Nara Cute, 16 October 2015,
C
https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Wallpaper kartu domino.png. Public Domain.
There are many mathematical results that can be proven using mathematical
D
induction. In this lesson, we will focus on three main categories: summation
identities, divisibility statements, and inequalities.
E
Let us now take a look at some examples on the use of mathematical induction
in proving summation identities.
EP
Example 2.3.1. Using mathematical induction, prove that

n(n + 1)
1 + 2 + 3 + + n =
2
for all positive integers n.
D
Solution. We need to establish the two conditions stated in the Principle of Math-
ematical Induction.
Part 1.
Prove that the identity is true for n = 1.
The left-hand side of the equation consists of one term equal to 1. The right-
hand side becomes
1(1 + 1) 2
= = 1.
2 2
Hence, the formula is true for n = 1.
98
Part 2. Assume that the formula is true for n = k 1:
k(k + 1)
1 + 2 + 3 + + k = .
2
We want to show that the formula is true for n = k + 1; that is,
(k + 1)(k + 1 + 1)
1 + 2 + 3 + + k + (k + 1) = .
2
Using the formula for n = k and adding k + 1 to both sides of the equation,
we get
PY
k(k + 1)
1 + 2 + 3 + + k + (k + 1) = + (k + 1)
2
k(k + 1) + 2(k + 1)
=
2
(k + 1)(k + 2)
O
=
2
(k + 1) [(k + 1) + 1]
=
C 2
We have proven the two conditions required by the Principle of Mathematical

Induction. Therefore, the formula is true for all positive integers n. 2
D
Example 2.3.2. Use mathematical induction to prove the formula for the sum
of a geometric series with n terms:
E
a1 (1 rn )
Sn = , r 6= 1.
EP
1r
Solution. Let an be the nth term of a geometric series. From Lesson 2.1, we know
that an = a1 rn1 .
Part 1.
D
Prove that the formula is true for n = 1.

a1 (1 r1 )
= a1 = S 1
1r
The formula is true for n = 1.
a1 (1 rk )
Part 2. Assume that the formula is true for n = k 1: Sk = . We
1r
want to prove that it is also true for n = k + 1; that is,
a1 (1 rk+1 )
Sk+1 = .
1r
99
We know that
Sk+1 = a1 + a2 + + ak +ak+1
| {z }
Sk
= Sk + ak+1

a1 1 r k
= + a1 rk
1r
a1 1 rk + a1 rk (1 r)
=
1r
a1 1 r + rk rk+1
k
=
1 r
PY
k+1
a1 1 r
=
1r
By the Principle of Mathematical Induction, we have proven that
O
a1 (1 rn )
Sn =
C 1r
for all positive integers n. 2
Example 2.3.3. Using mathematical induction, prove that

D
n(n + 1)(2n + 1)
12 + 22 + 32 + + n2 =
6
E
for all positive integers n.

EP
Solution. We again establish the two conditions stated in the Principle of Math-
ematical Induction.
Part 1
1(1 + 1)(2 1 + 1) 123
= = 1 = 12
D
6 6
Part 2
k(k + 1)(2k + 1)
Assume: 12 + 22 + 32 + + k 2 = .
6
Prove: 12 + 22 + 32 + + k 2 + (k + 1)2
(k + 1)(k + 2) [2(k + 1) + 1]
=
6
(k + 1)(k + 2)(2k + 3)
= .
6
100
12 + 22 + 32 + + k 2 + (k + 1)2
k(k + 1)(2k + 1)
= + (k + 1)2
6
k(k + 1)(2k + 1) + 6(k + 1)2
=
6
(k + 1) [k(2k + 1) + 6(k + 1)]
=
6
(k + 1) (2k 2 + 7k + 6)
=
6
(k + 1)(k + 2)(2k + 3)
PY
=
6
Therefore, by the Principle of Mathematical Induction,

n(n + 1)(2n + 1)
O
12 + 22 + 32 + + n2 =
6
for all positive integers n. 2
C
2.3.2. Proving Divisibility Statements
D
We now prove some divisibility statements using mathematical induction.
Example 2.3.4. Use mathematical induction to prove that, for every positive
E
integer n, 7n 1 is divisible by 6.
EP
Solution. Similar to what we did in the previous session, we establish the two
conditions stated in the Principle of Mathematical Induction.
Part 1
71 1 = 6 = 6 1
D
71 1 is divisible by 6.
Part 2
Assume: 7k 1 is divisible by 6.
To show: 7k+1 1 is divisible by 6.
7k+1 1 = 7 7k 1 = 6 7k + 7k 1 = 6 7k + (7k 1)
By definition of divisibility, 6 7k is divisible by 6. Also, by the hypothesis
(assumption), 7k 1 is divisible by 6. Hence, their sum (which is equal to
7k+1 1) is also divisible by 6.
101
Therefore, by the Principle of Math Induction, 7n 1 is divisible by 6 for all
positive integers n. 2
Note that 70 1 = 1 1 = 0 = 6 0 is also divisible by 6. Hence, a stronger

and more precise result in the preceding example is: 7n 1 is divisible by 6 for
every nonnegative integer n. It does not make sense to substitute negative values
of n since this will result in non-integer values for 7n 1.
Example 2.3.5. Use mathematical induction to prove that, for every nonnega-
tive integer n, n3 n + 3 is divisible by 3.
Solution. We again establish the two conditions in the Principle of Mathematical
PY
Induction.
Part 1 Note that claim of the statement is that it is true for every nonnegative
integer n. This means that Part 1 should prove that the statement is true for
n = 0.
O
03 0 + 3 = 3 = 3(1)
03 0 + 3 is divisible by 3.
C
Part 2. We assume that k 3 k + 3 is divisible by 3. By definition of divisibility,
we can write k 3 k + 3 = 3a for some integer a.
D
To show: (k + 1)3 (k + 1) + 3 is divisible by 3.
E
(k + 1)3 (k + 1) + 3 = k 3 + 3k 2 + 2k + 3
EP
= (k 3 k + 3) + 3k 2 + 3k
= 3a + 3k 2 + 3k
= 3(a + k 2 + k)
D
Since a + k 2 + k is also an integer, by definition of divisibility, (k + 1)3 (k + 1) + 3

is divisible by 3.
Therefore, by the Principle of Math Induction, n3 n + 3 is divisible by 3 for
all positive integers n. 2
? 2.3.3. Proving Inequalities
Finally, we now apply the Principle of Mathematical Induction in proving some

inequalities involving integers.
Example 2.3.6. Use mathematical induction to prove that 2n > 2n for every
integer n 3.
102
Solution. Just like the previous example, we establish the two conditions in the
Principle of Mathematical Induction.
Part 1
23 = 8 > 6 = 2(3)
This confirms that 23 > 2(3).
Part 2
Assume: 2k > 2k, where k is an integer with k 3
To show: 2k+1 > 2(k + 1) = 2k + 2
PY
We compare the components of the assumption and the inequality we need to
prove. On the left-hand side, the expression is doubled. On the right-hand side,
the expression is increased by 2. We choose which operation we want to apply to
both sides of the assumed inequality.
O
Alternative 1. We double both sides.
Since 2k > 2k, by the multiplication property of inequality, we have 2 2k >
C
2 2k.
2k+1 > 2(2k) = 2k + 2k > 2k + 2 if k 3.
Hence, 2k+1 > 2(k + 1).
D
Alternative 2. We increase both sides by 2.
Since 2k > 2k, by the addition property of inequality, we have 2k + 2 > 2k + 2.
E
2(k + 1) = 2k + 2 < 2k + 2 < 2k + 2k if k 3.

EP

The right-most expression above, 2k + 2k , is equal to 2 2k = 2k+1 .
Hence, 2(k + 1) < 2k+1 .
Therefore, by the Principle of Math Induction, 2n > 2n for every integer
n 3. 2
D
We test the above inequality for integers less than 3.

20 = 1 > 0 = 2(0) True
21 = 2 = 2(1) False
22 = 4 = 2(2) False
The inequality is not always true for nonnegative integers less than 3. This
illustrates the necessity of Part 1 of the proof to establish the result. However,
the result above can be modified to: 2n 2n for all nonnegative integers n.
Before we discuss the next example, we review the factorial notation. Recall
103
that 0! = 1 and, for every positive integer n, n! = 1 2 3 n. The factorial also
satisfies the property that (n + 1)! = (n + 1) n!.
Example 2.3.7. Use mathematical induction to prove that 3n < (n + 2)! for
every positive integer n. Can you refine or improve the result?
Solution. We proceed with the usual two-part proof.
Part 1
31 = 3 < 6 = 3! = (1 + 2)! = 31 < (1 + 2)!
Thus, the desired inequality is true for n = 1.
PY
Part 2
Assume: 3k < (k + 2)!
To show: 3k+1 < (k + 3)!
O
Given that 3k < (k + 2)!, we multiply both sides of the inequality by 3 and
obtain
3 3k < 3 [(k + 2)!] .
C
This implies that
3 3k < 3 [(k + 2)!] < (k + 3) [(k + 2)!] ,

since k > 0,
D
and so
3k+1 < (k + 3)!.
E
Therefore, by the Principle of Math Induction, we conclude that 3n < (n + 2)!

EP
for every positive integer n.

The left-hand side of the inequality is defined for any integer n. The right-
hand side makes sense only if n + 2 0, or n 2.
1
When n = 2: 32 =
D
< 1 = 0! = (2 + 2)!
9
1
When n = 1: 31 = < 1 = 1! = (1 + 2)!
3
0
When n = 0: 3 = 1 < 2 = 2! = (0 + 2)!
Therefore, 3n < (n + 2)! for any integer n 2. 2
104
Use mathematical induction to prove the given statements below.
1. 2 3 + 2 32 + . . . + 2 3n1 = 3n 3 for n 1
Solution:
Part 1.
2 3 = 6 = 32 3.

Part 2.
PY
Assume: P = 2 3 + 2 32 + . . . + 2 3k1 = 3k 3.
To show: 2 3 + 2 32 + . . . + 2 3k = 3k+1 3.
O
2 3 + 2 32 + . . . + 2 3k = P + 2 3k
C = 3k 3 + 2 3k
= 3 3k 3
= 3k+1 3.
1 n
D
2. 1 + 4 + 42 + . . . + 4n1 = (4 1) for n 1
3
Solution:
E
Part 1.
1 1
EP
1= (4 1).
3
Part 2.
1 k
D

Assume: P = 1 + 4 + 42 + . . . + 4k1 = 4 1 .
3
1
To show: 1 + 4 + 42 + . . . + 4k = 4k+1 1 .
3
1 + 4 + 42 + . . . + 4k = P + 4k
1 k
4 1 + 4k

=
3
4 1
= 4k
3 3
1 k+1
= 4 1 .
3
105

1 1 1 1 n+1
3. 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 = for n 2.
2 3 (n 1) n 2n
Solution:
Part 1.
1 3 2+1
1 2
= = .
2 4 2(2)
Part 2.
PY

1 1 1 1 k+1
Assume: P = 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 = .
2 3 (k 1) k 2k

1 1 1 k+2
To show: 1 2 1 2 1 = .
2 k (k + 1)2 2(k + 1)
O

1 1 1
1 2 1 =P 1
2 (k + 1)2 (k + 1)2
C
k + 1 (k 2 + 2k + 1) 1
=
2k (k + 1)2
k + 1 k(k + 2)
D
=
2k (k + 1)2
k+2
= .
E
2(k + 1)
4. Prove that 4n+1 + 52n1 is divisible by 21 for all integers n 1.

EP
Solution:
Part 1.
41+1 + 52(1)1 = 21.

D
The number is divisible by 21 for n = 1.
Part 2.
Assume: 4k+1 + 52k1 is divisible by 21.
Prove: 4k+2 + 52(k+1)1 is divisible by 21.

4k+2 + 52(k+1)1 = 4 4k+1 + 25 52k1 = 4 4k+1 + 52k1 + 21 52k1
21 52k1 is divisible by 21 and by the hypothesis (assumption), 4k+1 + 52k1 is
divisible by 21. Hence, their sum which is equal to 4k+2 + 52(k+1)1 is divisible
by 21.
106
5. n2 > 2n + 3 for n 4.
Solution:
Part 1.
24 = 16 > 7 = 2(2) + 3 The inequality is true for n = 4.
Part 2
Assume: k 2 > 2k + 3
Prove: (k + 1)2 > 2(k + 1) + 3
We expand (k + 1)2 and use the inequality in the hypothesis to get
PY
(k + 1)2 = k 2 + 2k + 1 > (2k + 3) + 2k + 1 = 4(k + 1) > 2(k + 1) + 3 if k > 0.
Therefore, by the principle of math induction, n2 > 2n + 3 for n 4.
O
6. Prove that 2n+3 < (n + 3)! for n 4. C
Solution:
Part 1.
24+3 = 27 < 1 2 3 7 = (4 + 3)! The inequality is true for n = 1.
D
Part 2
Assume: 2k+3 < (k + 3)!
E
Prove: 2k+4 < (k + 4)!

EP
Given that 2k+3 < (k + 3)!, we multiply both sides of the inequality by 2 and
obtain

2 2k+3 < 2 [(k + 3)!].
D
This implies that
2k+4 < 2 [(k + 3)!] < (k + 4) [(k + 3)!], if k > 0.
Therefore, by the principle of math induction, 2k+3 < (k+3)! for every positive
integer n.
107
Prove the following by mathematical induction:
1 2 3 n n+2
1. + 2 + 3 + + n = 2 n for n 1
2 2 2 2 2
n
X n(n + 3)
2. (i + 1) =
i=1
2
3. 1(1!) + 2(2!) + . . . + n(n!) = (n + 1)! 1.

4. The sum of the first n odd numbers is equal to n2 .
PY

1 1 1 1 1
5. 1 1 1 ... 1 = .
2 3 4 n 2n
n
X (1)n n(n + 1)
6. (1)i i2 =
2
O
i=1
7. 43n+1 + 23n+1 + 1 is divisible by 7 C

8. 11n+2 + 122n+1 is divisible by 133
9. 52n+1 2n+2 + 3n+2 22n+1 is divisible by 19
D
10. 11n 6 is divisible by 5
10n 5
11. + + 4n+2 is divisible by 3
E
3 3
12. n2 < 2n for n 5.
EP
1 1 1 1 1
13. + + + . . . + 2 for n 1.
13 23 33 n3 n
p
14. The sequence an = 2an1 , a1 = 2 is increasing; that is, an < an+1 .
D
Lesson 2.4. The Binomial Theorem

(1) illustrate Pascals Triangle in the expansion of (x + y)n for small positive
integral values of n;
108
(2) prove the Binomial Theorem;
(3) determine any term in (x + y)n , where n is a positive integer, without ex-
panding; and
(4) solve problems using mathematical induction and the Binomial Theorem.
Lesson Outline
(1) Expand (x + y)n for small values of n using Pascals Triangle
(2) Review the definition of and formula for combination
(3) State and prove the Binomial Theorem
(4) Compute all or specified terms of a binomial expansion
PY
(5) Prove some combination identities using the Binomial Theorem
Introduction
In this lesson, we study two ways to expand (a + b)n , where n is a positive
O
integer. The first, which uses Pascals Triangle, is applicable if n is not too big,
and if we want to determine all the terms in the expansion. The second method
gives a general formula for the expansion of (a + b)n for any positive integer n.
C
This formula is useful especially when n is large because it avoids the process of
going through all the coefficients for lower values of n obtained through Pascals
Triangle.
D
2.4.1. Pascals Triangle and the Concept of Combination
E
Consider the following powers of a + b:

(a + b)1 = a + b
EP
(a + b)2 = a2 + 2ab + b2
(a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2 b + 3ab2 + b3
(a + b)4 = a4 + 4a3 b + 6a2 b2 + 4ab3 + b4
(a + b)5 = a5 + 5a4 b + 10a3 b2 + 10a2 b3 + 5ab4 + b5
D
We now list down the coefficients of each expansion in a triangular array as

follows:
n=1: 1 1
n=2: 1 2 1
n=3: 1 3 3 1
n=4: 1 4 6 4 1
n=5: 1 5 10 10 5 1
109
The preceding triangular array of numbers is part of what is called the Pas-
cals Triangle, named after the French mathematician, Blaise Pascal (1623-1662).
Some properties of the Triangle are the following:
(1) Each row begins and ends with 1.
(2) Each row has n + 1 numbers.
(3) The second and second to the last number of each row correspond to the
row number.
(4) There is symmetry of the numbers in each row.
PY
(5) The number of entries in a row is one more than the row number (or one
more than the number of entries in the preceding row).
(6) Every middle number after first row is the sum of the two numbers above
it.
O
It is the last statement which is useful in constructing the succeeding rows of the
triangle.
C
Example 2.4.1. Use Pascals Triangle to expand the expression (2x 3y)5 .
Solution. We use the coefficients in the fifth row of the Pascals Triangle.
D
(2x 3y)5 = (2x)5 + 5(2x)4 (3y) + 10(2x)3 (3y)2
+ 10(2x)2 (3y)3 + 5(2x)(3y)4
E
+ (3y)5
= 32x5 240x4 y + 720x3 y 2 1080x2 y 3
EP
+ 810xy 4 243y 5 2
Example 2.4.2. Use Pascals Triangle to expand (a + b)8 .
Solution. We start with the sixth row (or any row of the Pascals Triangle that
D
we remember).
n=6: 1 6 15 20 15 6 1
n=7: 1 7 21 35 35 21 7 1
n=8: 1 8 28 56 70 56 28 8 1
Therefore, we get
(a + b)8 = a8 + 8a7 b + 28a6 b2 + 56a5 b3
+ 70a4 b4 + 56a3 b5 + 28a2 b6
+ 8ab7 + b8 2
110
We observe that, for each n, the expansion of (a + b)n starts with an
and the exponent of a in the succeeding terms decreases by 1, while
the exponent of b increases by 1. This observation will be shown to
be true in general.
Let us review the concept of combination. Recall that C(n, k) or nk counts

the number of ways of choosing k objects from a set of n objects. It is also useful
to know some properties of C(n, k):
(1) C(n, 0) = C(n, n) = 1,
PY
(2) C(n, 1) = C(n, n 1) = n, and
(3) C(n, k) = C(n, n k).
These properties can explain some of the observations we made on the num-
O
bers in the Pascals Triangle. Also recall the general formula for the number of
combinations of n objects taken k at a time:
C(n, k) =

n
k
=
C
n!
k!(n k)!
,
where 0! = 1 and, for every positive integer n, n! = 1 2 3 n.

D

5 8
Example 2.4.3. Compute and .
3 5
E
Solution.
5 5! 5!
EP
= = = 10
3 (5 3)!3! 2!3!

8 8! 10!
= = = 56 2
5 (8 5)!5! 3!5!
D
You may observe that the value of 53 and the fourth coefficient

in the fifth
8

row of Pascals Triangle are the same. In the same manner, 5 is equal to the
sixth coefficient in the expansion of (a + b)8 (see Example 2.4.2). These observed
equalities are not coincidental, and they are, in fact, the essence embodied in the
Binomial Theorem, as you will see in the succeeding sessions.
2.4.2. The Binomial Theorem
As the power n gets larger, the more laborious it would be to use Pascals Triangle
(and impractical to use long multiplication) to expand (a + b)n . For example,
using Pascals Triangle, we need to compute row by row up to the thirtieth row
111
to know the coefficients of (a + b)30 . It is, therefore, delightful to know that it is
possible to compute the terms of a binomial expansion of degree n without going
through the expansion of all the powers less than n.
We now explain how the concept of combination is used in the expansion of
(a + b)n .
(a + b)n = (a + b)(a + b)(a + b) (a + b)
| {z }
n factors
When the distributive law is applied, the expansion of (a + b)n consists of
terms of the form am bi , where 0 m, i n. This term is obtained by choosing
a for m of the factors and b for the rest of the factors. Hence, m + i = n, or
PY
m = n i. This means that the number of times the term ani bi will appear
in the expansion of (a + b)n equals the number of ways of choosing (n i) or i
factors from the n factors, which is exactly C(n, i). Therefore, we have
n
n
X n ni i
(a + b) = a b.
O
i=0
i
C
To explain the reasoning above, consider the case n = 3.
(a + b)3 = (a + b)(a + b)(a + b)

= aaa + aab + aba + abb + baa + bab + bba + bbb
D
= a3 + 3a2 b + 3ab2 + b3
That is, each term in the expansion is obtained by choosing either a or b in each
E
factor. The term a3 is obtained when a is chosen each time, while a2 b is obtained
when a is selected 2 times, or equivalently, b is selected exactly once.
EP
We will give another proof of this result using mathematical induction. But
first, we need to prove a result about combinations.
Pascals Identity
D
If n and k are positive integers with k n, then

n+1 n n
= + .
k k k1
Proof. The result follows from the combination formula.

n n n! n!
+ = +
k k1 k!(n k)! (k 1)!(n k + 1)!
n!(n k + 1) + n!(k)
=
k!(n k + 1)!
112
n!(n k + 1 + k)
=
k!(n + 1 k)!
n!(n + 1)
=
k!(n + 1 k)!
(n + 1)!
=
k!(n + 1 k)!

n+1
= 2
k
Pascals identity explains the method of constructing Pascals Triangle, in

which an entry is obtained by adding the two numbers above it. This identity
PY
is also an essential part of the second proof of the Binomial Theorem, which we
now state.
The Binomial Theorem
O
For any positive integer n,
n
n
X n
(a + b) = ani bi .
C i=0
i
Proof. We use mathematical induction.

D
Part 1
1
E
X 1 1i i 1 1 0 1 0 1
a b = ab + a b =a+b
i=0
i 0 1
EP
Hence, the formula is true for n = 1.
Part 2. Assume that

k
k
X k
(a + b) = aki bi .
i
D
i=0
We want to show that

k+1
k+1
X k + 1 k+1i i
(a + b) = a b.
i=0
i
(a + b)k+1 = (a + b)(a + b)k

k
X k ki i
= (a + b) a b
i=0
i
113
k k
X k ki i X k ki i
=a a b +b a b
i=0
i i=0
i
k k
X k ki+1 i X k ki i+1
= a b + a b
i=0
i i=0
i
k
k k+1 0 X k k+1i i
= a b + a b
0 i=1
i

k k 1 k k1 2 k k2 3
+ a b + a b + a b
0 1 2

k 1 k k 0 k+1
+ + ab + ab
PY
k1 k
k
k+1
X k k+1i i
=a + a b
i=1
i
k
O
X k
+ ak+1i bi + bk+1
i 1
i=1
k + 1 k+1 0
=
0
Ca b
k
X k k
+ + ak+1i bi
i i 1
D
i=1

k + 1 0 k+1
+ ab
k+1
E
k+1
X k + 1 k+1i i
= a b
EP
i=0
i
The last expression above follows from Pascals Identity.

Therefore, by the Principle of Mathematical Induction,
D
n
n
X n ni i
(a + b) = a b
i=1
i
for any positive integer n. 2
2.4.3. Terms of a Binomial Expansion
We now apply the Binomial Theorem in different examples.
Example 2.4.4. Use the Binomial Theorem to expand (x + y)6 .
114
Solution.
6
X
6 6 6k k
(x + y) = x y
k=0
k

6 6 0 6 5 1 6 4 2
= xy + xy + xy
0 1 2

6 3 3 6 2 4 6 1 5
+ xy + xy + xy
3 4 5

6 0 6
+ xy
6
= x6 + 6x5 y + 15x4 y 2 + 20x3 y 3
PY
+ 15x2 y 2 + 6xy 5 + y 6 2
Since the expansion of (a + b)n begins with k = 0 and ends with k = n, the
n n n
expansion has n + 1 terms. The first term in the expansion is 0 a = an1
, the
O
n n1 n=1 n
second term is 1 a b = na b, the second to the last term is n1 ab =
n n
n1
n
nab , and the last term is n b = b . C
n
nk+1 k1
The kth term of the expansion is k1 a b . If n is even, there is a
n

middle term, which is the 2 +1 th term. If n is odd, there are two middle
terms, the n+1 n+1

2
th and 2
+ 1 th terms.
D
The general term is often represented by nk ank bk . Notice that, in any term,

the sum of the exponents of a and b is n. The combination nk is the coefficient

of the term involving bk . This allows us to compute any particular term without
E
needing to expand (a + b)n and without listing all the other terms.
20
EP
Example 2.4.5. Find the fifth term in the expansion of 2x y .
Solution. The fifth term in the expansion of a fifth power corresponds to k = 4.

20
(2x)204 ( y)4 = 4845 65536x16 y 2

D
4
= 317521920x16 y 2 2
x 6
Example 2.4.6. Find the middle term in the expansion of + 3y .
2
Solution. Since there are seven terms in the expansion, the middle term is the
fourth term (k = 3), which is
3
135x3 y 3

6 x 3 x
3
(3y) = 20 27y 3 = . 2
3 2 8 2
115
Example 2.4.7. Find the term involving x (with exponent 1) in the expansion
8
2 2y
of x .
x
Solution. The general term in the expansion is

k
8 162k (2)k y k

8 2 8k
2y
x = x
k x k xk

8
= (2)k x162kk y k
k

8
= (2)k x163k y k .
PY
k
The term involves x if the exponent of x is 1, which means 16 3k = 1, or

k = 5. Hence, the term is
O

8
(2)5 xy 5 = 1792xy 5 . 2
5 C
? 2.4.4. Approximation and Combination Identities
We continue applying the Binomial Theorem.

D
? Example 2.4.8. (1) Approximate (0.8)8 by using the first three terms in the
expansion of (1 0.2)8 . Compare your answer with the calculator value.
E
(2) Use 5 terms in the binomial expansion to approximate (0.8)8 . Is there an

improvement in the approximation?
EP
Solution.
8
8 8
X 8
(0.8) = (1 0.2) = (1)8k (0.2)k
k
D
k=0
8
X 8
= (0.2)k
k=0
k
2
X 8 k 8 8 8
(1) (0.2) = + (0.2) + (0.2)2
k=0
k 0 1 2
= 1 1.6 + 1.12 = 0.52
The calculator value is 0.16777216, so the error is 0.35222784.
116
4
X 8 8 k 8 8
(2) (0.2) = + (0.2) + (0.2)2
k=0
k 0 1 2

8 3 8
+ (0.2) + (0.2)4
3 4
= 0.52 0.448 + 0.112 = 0.184
The error is 0.01622784, which is an improvement on the previous estimate.
2
Example 2.4.9. Use the Binomial Theorem to prove that, for any positive in-
teger n,
n
n
PY
X
= 2n .
k=0
k
Solution. Set a = b = 1 in the expansion of (a + b)n . Then

n n
O
X n X n
n
2 = (1 + 1) = n
(1) nk k
(1) = . 2
k=0
C k k=0
k
Example 2.4.10. Use the Binomial Theorem to prove that

100 100 100 100
+ + + +
0 2 4 100
D

100 100 100 100
= + + + +
1 3 5 99
E
Solution. Let a = 1 and b = 1 in the expansion of (a + b)100 . Then

EP
100
100 X 100
(1)100k (1)k .

1 + (1) =
k=0
k
D

100 100 100 2 100
0= + (1) + (1) + (1)3
0 1 2 3

100 99 100
+ + (1) + (1)100
99 100
If k is even, then (1)k = 1. If k is odd, then (1)k = 1. Hence, we have

100 100 100 100
0= +
0 1 2 3

100 100
+ +
99 100
117
Therefore, after transposing the negative terms to other side of the equation, we
obtain

100 100 100 100
+ + + +
0 2 4 100

100 100 100 100
= + + + + 2
1 3 5 99
PY
5
1. Use the Binomial Theorem to expand (2x4 3y 2 ) .
5
5 X 5k k
Solution: 2x4 3y 2 = 2x4 3y 2 = 32x20 240x16 y 2 + 720x12 y 4
k=0
1080x8 y 6 + 810x4 y 8 243y 10
O
28
2. Determine the 20th term in the expansion of (x3 3y) .
C
28 27 19 19
Solution: We see that k = 19 should yield the 20th term, yielding 3 x y .
19
20
x2 y2

x
D
3. Find the term containing 2 in the expansion of .
y y 2x2
x y2
E
Solution: Setting a = , b = 2 , the (k + 1)th term in the binomial

y 2x
20k 2 k
(1)k n 203k 3k20

k 20 x y
expansion is (1) = x y . To get
EP
k y 2x2 k
2 k
x2

1 20 2 2
2
, we get 20 3k = 2 k = 6, yielding 6 xy .
y 2 6
16
2
D
4. Determine the term not involving x in the expansion of x3 + 5 .

x
2
Solution: Setting a = x3 , b = 5 , the (k + 1)th term in the binomial expansion
k x

16 16k 2 16 488k
x3 = 2k

is 5
x . To get the term without x, we get
k x k
16
48 8k = 0 k = 6, yielding 26 .
6
5. Determine the coefficient of x9 in the expansion of (1 + 2x)10 .
118
Solution: Setting a = 1,b = 2x, the (k + 1)th term
in the binomial expansion
10 10 k
of the first factor is (1)10k (2x)k = 2k x . To get x9 , we set k = 9,
k k
9 10
yielding 2 x9 .
9
n
k n
X
6. Prove that (1) 3nk = 2n .
i=0
k
Solution: Set a = 3, b = 1.
5
7. If 3 + 2 is written in the form a 3 + b 2 where a, b are integers, what
PY
is a + b?
5
5 X 5 5k k
Solution: We have 3+ 2 = 3 2 . Note that if
k
k=0
5 k is odd (or equivalently, k is even), the term
has a factor
of 3, while

O
5 5 5
the rest have a factor of 2. Thus, a = + + = 16 and
0 2 4
5 5 5
b= + + = 16 yields a + b = 32.
1 3 5
C
D
E
1. Use the Binomial Theorem to expand the following:
(a) (2x 3y)5

EP
4
x 2
(b) 2
3 x
4
(c) (1 + x)
D
2. Without expanding completely, find the indicated value(s) in the expansion of

the following:
(a) (2 + x)9 , two middle terms

10
p 2
(b) + , 3rd term
2 q
21
(c) (x2 + y 4 ) , last 2 terms
20
1
(d) , middle term
x
119
15
2y 4 x5

(e) + , term not involving y
x3 4y
13
1 2
(f) 2
x , term involving x2
2x
(g) (1 2x)6 , coefficient of x3
30
1 1
(h) 2y 7/3 5/3 , coefficient of 2
2y y
8
(i) ( x 3) , coefficient of x7/2
6
(j) ( x + 2) , coefficient of x3/2
PY
3. Approximate (2.1)10 by using the first 5 terms in the expansion of (2 + 0.1)20 .
Compare your answer with the calculator result.
4. In the expansion of (4x + 3)34 , the kth value and the (k + 1)st terms have
equal coefficients. What is the value of k?
O
5. Determine the value of C

19 19 19 2 19 3 19 18 19 19
3+ 3 3 + ... + 3 3
0 1 2 3 18 19
D
4
E
EP
D
120
1. Determine if the given sequence is arithmetic, geometric, or neither by writing
A, G, or O, respectively.
1 1 3 9 27
(a) , , , , ,...
3 2 4 16 32
1 1 1 1 1
(b) , , , , , . . .
2 7 12 17 21
(c) 0, 3, 8, 15, 24, . . .
2. Three numbers form an arithmetic sequence, the common difference being 5.
PY
If the last number is increased by 1, the second by 2, and the first by 4, the
resulting numbers form a geometric sequence. Find the numbers.
50
X 2i3 + 9i2 + 13i + 6
3. Evaluate the sum .
i2 + 3i + 2
O
i=1
4. Find the indicated terms in the expansion of the given expression.

C
8 28
2 1 (b) (n3 3m) , 20th term
(a) x , term involving x8
2
5. Prove the statement below for all positive integers n by mathematical induc-
D
tion.
1 1 1 n
+ + + =
E
13 35 (2n 1)(2n + 1) 2n + 1
6. On his 20th birthday, Ian deposited an amount of 10,000 pesos to a time-
EP
deposit scheme with a yearly interest of 4%. Ian decides not to withdraw any
amount of money or earnings and vows to keep it in the same time-deposit
scheme year after year. Show that the new amounts in Ians time-deposit
account in each succeeding birthday represent a geometric sequence, and use
this to determine the value of the money during Ians 60th birthday.
D
121
1. Determine if the given sequence is arithmetic, geometric, or neither by writing
A, G, or O, respectively.
2 8 32 128 512
(a) , , , , ,...
3 15 75 375 1875
1 2 3 4 5
(b) , , , , , . . .
2 3 4 5 6
11 21
(c) 3, , 8, , 13, . . .
2 2
2. The sum of the first two terms of an arithmetic sequence is 9 and the sum of
PY
the first three terms is also 9. How many terms must be taken to give a sum
of 126?
3. Evaluate the following sums.
O
50 30
r
X X i2 2i + 1
(a) (2i + 1)(i 3) (b)
i=1
C i=1
4
8
3 1
4. Find the term not involving x in the expansion of x + .
x
D
5. Prove that the following statements are true for all positive integers n by
mathematical induction.
E
n(3n 1)
(a) 1 + 4 + 7 + . . . + (3n 2) =
2
EP
n n1
(b) 3 + 7 + 8 is divisible by 12.
D
122
Unit 3
Trigonometry
PY
O
C
E D
EP
Puerto Princesa Subterranean River National Park, by Giovanni G. Navata, 12 November 2010,
D
https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File%3AUnderground River.jpg. Public Domain
Named as one of the New Seven Wonders of Nature in 2012 by the New7Wonders
Foundation, the Puerto Princesa Subterranean River National Park is world-
famous for its limestone karst mountain landscape with an underground river.
The Park was also listed as UNESCO World Heritage Site in 1999. The under-
ground river stretches about 8.2 km long, making it one of the worlds longest
rivers of its kind.
123
Lesson 3.1. Angles in a Unit Circle

(1) illustrate the unit circle and the relationship between the linear and angular
measures of arcs in a unit circle.
(2) convert degree measure to radian measure, and vice versa.
(3) illustrate angles in standard position and coterminal angles.
PY
Lesson Outline
(1) Linear and angular measure of arcs
(2) Conversion of degree to radian, and vice versa
O
(3) Arc length and area of the sector
(4) Angle in standard position and coterminal angles
C
Introduction
Angles are being used in several fields like engineering, medical imaging, elec-
tronics, astronomy, geography and many more. Added to that, surveyors, pilots,
D
landscapers, designers, soldiers, and people in many other professions heavily use
angles and trigonometry to accomplish a variety of practical tasks. In this les-
son, we will deal with the basics of angle measures together with arc length and
E
sectors.
EP
3.1.1. Angle Measure
An angle is formed by rotating a ray about its endpoint. In the figure shown
below, the initial side of AOB is OA, while its terminal side is OB. An angle
D
is said to be positive if the ray rotates in a counterclockwise direction, and the

angle is negative if it rotates in a clockwise direction.
124
An angle is in standard position if it is drawn in the xy-plane with its vertex
at the origin and its initial side on the positive x-axis. The angles , , and in
the following figure are angles in standard position.
PY
O
To measure angles, we use degrees, minutes, seconds, and radians.
C
A central angle of a circle measures one degree, written 1 , if it inter-
1
cepts 360 of the circumference of the circle. One minute, written 10 , is
1
of 1 , while one second, written 100 , is 60
1
of 10 .
D
60
E
For example, in degrees, minutes, and seconds,

0
0 00 18
EP
10 30 18 = 10 30 +
60
0
= 10 30.3

30.3
= 10 +
60
D

= 10.505
and
79.251 = 79 (0.251 60)0

= 79 15.060
= 79 150 (0.06 60)00
= 79 150 3.600 .
Recall that the unit circle is the circle with center at the origin and radius 1
unit.
125
A central angle of the unit circle that intercepts an arc of the circle
with length 1 unit is said to have a measure of one radian, written 1
rad. See Figure 3.1.
PY
O
Figure 3.1
C
In trigonometry, as it was studied in Grade 9, the degree measure is often used.
On the other hand, in some fields of mathematics like calculus, radian measure of
angles is preferred. Radian measure allows us to treat the trigonometric functions
D
as functions with the set of real numbers as domains, rather than angles.
Example 3.1.1. In the following figure, identify the terminal side of an angle in
E
standard position with given measure.

EP
(1) degree measure: 135 , 135 , 90 , 405

(2) radian measure: 4
rad, 3
4
rad, 3
2
rad, 2 rad
D
126

Solution. (1) 135 : OC; 135 : OD; 90 : OE; and 405 : OB

(2) radian measure: 4
rad: OB; 3
4
rad: OD; 3
2
rad: OE; and 2 rad:

OE 2
Since a unit circle has circumference 2, a central angle that measures 360
has measure equivalent to 2 radians. Thus, we obtain the following conversion
rules.
Converting degree to radian, and vice versa

1. To convert a degree measure to radian, multiply it by .
PY
180
180
2. To convert a radian measure to degree, multiply it by
.
Figure 3.2 shows some special angles in standard position with the indicated
O
terminal sides. The degree and radian measures are also given.
C
E D
EP
D
Figure 3.2
Example 3.1.2. Express 75 and 240 in radians.
Solution. 5 5
75 = = 75 = rad
180 12 12
4 4
240 = = 240 = rad 2
180 3 3
127
11
Example 3.1.3. Express 8
rad and 6
rad in degrees.
Solution.
180
= 22.5 = rad = 22.5
8 8

11 180 11
= 330 = rad = 330 2
6 6
3.1.2. Coterminal Angles
PY
Two angles in standard position that have a common terminal side are called
coterminal angles. Observe that the degree measures of coterminal angles differ
by multiples of 360 .
Two angles are coterminal if and only if their degree measures differ
O
by 360k, where k Z.
Similarly, two angles are coterminal if and only if their radian mea-
C
sures differ by 2k, where k Z.
As a quick illustration, to find one coterminal angle with an angle that mea-
D
sures 410 , just subtract 360 , resulting in 50 . See Figure 3.3.
E
EP
D
Figure 3.3
Example 3.1.4. Find the angle coterminal with 380 that has measure
(1) between 0 and 360 , and
128
(2) between 360 and 0 .
Solution. A negative angle moves in a clockwise direction, and the angle 380
lies in Quadrant IV.
(1) 380 + 2 360 = 340

(2) 380 + 360 = 20 2
3.1.3. Arc Length and Area of a Sector
In a circle, a central angle whose radian measure is subtends an arc that is the
PY

fraction 2 of the circumference of the circle. Thus, in a circle of radius r (see
Figure 3.4), the length s of an arc that subtends the angle is

s= circumference of circle = (2r) = r.
2 2
O
C
E D
EP
Figure 3.4
D
In a circle of radius r, the length s of an arc intercepted by a central

angle with measure radians is given by
s = r.
Example 3.1.5. Find the length of an arc of a circle with radius 10 m that
subtends a central angle of 30 .
Solution. Since the given central angle is in degrees, we have to convert it into
radian measure. Then apply the formula for an arc length.

30 = rad
180 6
129
5
s = 10
m = 2
6 3
Example 3.1.6. A central angle in a circle of radius 4 m is subtended by an
arc of length 6 m. Find the measure of in radians.
Solution.
s 6 3
= = = rad 2
r 4 2
A sector of a circle is the portion of the interior of a circle bounded by the
initial and terminal sides of a central angle and its intercepted arc. It is like a
slice of pizza. Note that an angle with measure 2 radians will define a sector
that corresponds to the whole pizza. Therefore, if a central angle of a sector
PY

has measure radians, then the sector makes up the fraction 2 of a complete
circle. See Figure 3.5. Since the area of a complete circle with radius r is r2 , we
have
1
Area of a sector = (r2 ) = r2 .
2 2
O
C
E D
EP
Figure 3.5
D
In a circle of radius r, the area A of a sector with a central angle

measuring radians is
1
A = r2 .
2
Example 3.1.7. Find the area of a sector of a circle with central angle 60 if
the radius of the circle is 3 m.
Solution. First, we have to convert 60 into radians. Then apply the formula for
computing the area of a sector.

60 = rad
180 3
130
1 3 2
A = (32 ) = m 2
2 3 2
Example 3.1.8. A sprinkler on a golf course fairway is set to spray water over
a distance of 70 feet and rotates through an angle of 120 . Find the area of the
fairway watered by the sprinkler.
Solution. 2
120 = rad
180 3
1 2 4900
A = (702 ) = 5131 ft2 2
2 3 3
PY
5
1. Find the equivalent degree measure of radians.
O
48
5 5 180 75

Solution: 48 rad = 48
= 4
C
2. Find the equivalent angle measure in degrees and in radians of an angle tracing
2 53 revolutions.
Solution: One revolution around a circle is equivalent to tracing 360 .
D

3 3 360
2 rev = 2 rev = 936
5 5 1 rev
E
26

936 = 936 = rad
180 5
EP
3. Find the smallest positive angle coterminal with 2016 .

Solution: Add 6 complete revolutions or 6(360 ) = 2160 to the given angle
(or keep on adding 360 until you get a positive angle).
D
2016 + 2160 = 144
137
4. Find the largest negative angle coterminal with 5
.
Solution: Subtract 14 complete revolutions or 14(2) = 28 to the given angle
(or keep on subtracting 2 until you get a negative angle).
137 3
28 = rad
5 5
131
5. Find the length of the arc of a circle with radius 15 cm that subtends a central
angle of 84 .
Solution:
7
84 = 84 = rad
180 15
7
s = 15 = 7 cm
15
6. A central angle in a circle of radius 12 inches is subtended by an arc of length

27 inches. Find the measure of in degrees.
Solution:
PY
s
s = r = =
r
12 9
= = rad
27 4
9 9 180 405
O
rad = =
4 4
7. Find the area of a sector of a circle with central angle of 108 if the radius of
the circle is 15 cm.
C
Solution:
3
D
108 = 108 = rad
180 5
1 3 135
A = (15)2 = cm2
E
2 5 2
8. Given isosceles right triangle ABC with AC as the hypotenuse (as shown
EP
below), a circle with center at A and radius AB intersects AC at D. What is

the ratio of the area of sector BAD to the area of the region BCD?
D
132
Solution: Let r be the radius of the circle; that is, r = AB.
1 2 r2
A = rad = Area of sector BAD = r =
4 2 4 8
4r2 r2
Area of region BCD = Area of 4ABC Area of sector BAD =
8
r2
area of sector BAD 8
= 4r2 r 2 =
area of the region BCD 8
4
PY
1. How many degrees is 1 15 of a complete revolution?
O
11
2. How many radians is 5
of a complete revolution?
3. What is the length of an arc of a circle with radius 4 cm that subtends a

central angle of 216 ?
C
6
4. Find the length of an arc of a circle with radius
cm that subtends a central
angle of 99 .
D
5. What is the smallest positive angle coterminal with 2110 ?
E
107
6. Find the largest negative angle coterminal with 6
.
7
7. Find the area of a sector of a circle with central angle of if the diameter of
EP
6
the circle is 9 cm.
8. Find the area of a sector of a circle with central angle of 108 if the radius of
the circle is 15 cm.
D
9. What is the radius of a circle in which a central angle of 150 determines a

sector of area 15 in2 ?
5
10. Find the radius of a circle in which a central angle of 4
determines a sector
of area 32 in2 .
? 11. A central angle of a circle of radius 6 inches is subtended by an arc of length 6
inches. What is the central angle in degrees (rounded to two decimal places)?
? 12. An arc of length cm subtends a central angle of a circle with radius 2
cm.
5 3
What is in degrees?
133
13. Two overlapping circles of radii 1 cm are drawn such that each circle passes
through the center of the other. What is the perimeter of the entire region?
14. The length of arc AB of a circle with center at O is equal to twice the length
of the radius r of the circle. Find the area of sector AOB in terms of r.
15. The angle of a sector in a given circle is 20 and the area of the sector is equal
to 800 cm2 . Find the arc length of the sector.
16. In Figure 3.6, AE and BC are arcs of two concentric circles with center at D.
If AD = 2 cm, BD = 8 cm, and ADE = 75 , find the area of the region
AECB.
17. In Figure 3.7, AB and DE are diameters. If AB = 12 cm and AOD = 126 ,
PY
find the area of the shaded region.
O
C
D
18. A point moves outside an equilateral triangle of side 5 cm such that its distance
from the triangle is always 2 cm. See Figure 3.8. What is the length of one
E
complete path that the point traces?

EP
D
Figure 3.9
19. The segment of a circle is the region bounded by a chord and the arc subtended
by the chord. See Figure 3.9. Find the area of a segment of a circle with a
central angle of 120 and a radius of 64 cm.
134
PY
Figure 3.10
20. In Figure 3.10, diameter AB of circle O measures 12 cm and arc BC measures
120 . Find the area of the shaded region.
O
C
Lesson 3.2. Circular Functions
D
E

(1) illustrate the different circular functions; and
EP
(2) use reference angles to find exact values of circular functions.
Lesson Outline
(1) Circular functions
D
(2) Reference angles
Introduction
We define the six trigonometric function in such a way that the domain of
each function is the set of angles in standard position. The angles are measured
either in degrees or radians. In this lesson, we will modify these trigonometric
functions so that the domain will be real numbers rather than set of angles.
135
3.2.1. Circular Functions on Real Numbers
Recall that the sine and cosine functions (and four others: tangent, cosecant,
secant, and cotangent) of angles measuring between 0 and 90 were defined in
the last quarter of Grade 9 as ratios of sides of a right triangle. It can be verified
that these definitions are special cases of the following definition.
Let be an angle in standard position and P () = P (x, y) the point

on its terminal side on the unit circle. Define
1
sin = y csc = , y 6= 0
y
PY
1
cos = x sec = , x 6= 0
x
y x
tan = , x 6= 0 cot = , y 6= 0
x y
O
Example 3.2.1. Find the values of cos 135 , tan 135 , sin(60 ), and sec(60 ).
C
Solution. Refer to Figure 3.11(a).
E D
EP
D
(a) (b)
Figure 3.11
From properties of 45 -45 and 30 -60 right triangles (with hypotenuse 1

unit), we obtain the lengths of the legs as in Figure 3.11(b). Thus, the coordinates
of A and B are
! !
2 2 1 3
A= , and B = , .
2 2 2 2
136
Therefore, we get

2
cos 135 = , tan 135 = 1,
2

3
sin(60 ) = , and sec(60 ) = 2. 2
2
From the last example, we may then also say that
2
3
cos rad = , sin rad = ,
4 2 3 2
PY
and so on.
From the above definitions, we define the same six functions on real numbers.
These functions are called trigonometric functions.
O
Let s be any real number. Suppose is the angle in standard position
with measure s rad. Then we define
sin s = sin
C csc s = csc
cos s = cos sec s = sec

D
tan s = tan cot s = cot
E
From the last example, we then have

2
EP
cos = cos rad = cos 45 =

4 4 2
and
3
sin = sin rad = sin(60 ) = .
3 3 2
D
In the same way, we have
tan 0 = tan(0 rad) = tan 0 = 0.
Example 3.2.2. Find the exact values of sin 3

2
, cos 3
2
, and tan 3
2
.
Solution. Let P 3

2
be the point on the unit circle and on the terminal side of
3 3

the angle in the standard position with measure 2 rad. Then P 2 = (0, 1),
and so
3 3
sin = 1, cos = 0,
2 2
but tan 3
2
is undefined. 2
137
Example 3.2.3. Suppose s is a real number such that sin s = 43 and cos s > 0.
Find cos s.
Solution. We may consider s as the angle with measure s rad. Let P (s) = (x, y)
be the point on the unit circle and on the terminal side of angle s.
Since P (s) is on the unit circle, we know that x2 + y 2 = 1. Since sin s = y =
34 ,we get
2
2 3 2 7 7
x =1y =1 = = x= .
4 16 4

PY
Since cos s = x > 0, we have cos s = 4
7
. 2
O
C
E D
EP
D
Let P (x1 , y1 ) and Q(x, y) be points on the terminal side of an angle in

standard position, where P is on the unit circle and Q on the circle of radius r
(not necessarily 1) with center also at the origin, as shown above. Observe that
we can use similar triangles to obtain
x1 x y1 y
cos = x1 = = and sin = y1 = = .
1 r 1 r
We may then further generalize the definitions of the six circular functions.
138
Let be an angle in standard
p position, Q(x, y) any point on the ter-
minal side of , and r = x2 + y 2 > 0. Then
y r
sin = csc = , y 6= 0
r y
x r
cos = sec = , x 6= 0
r x
y x
tan = , x 6= 0 cot = , y 6= 0
x y
We then have a second solution for Example 3.2.3 as follows. With sin s = 43
PY
and sin s = yr , we may choose y = 3 and r = 4 (which is always positive). In
this case, we can solve for x, which is positive since cos s = x4 is given to be
positive.

7
O
p
4 = x2 + (3)2 = x = 7 = cos s =
4
3.2.2. Reference Angle

C
We observe that if 1 and 2 are coterminal angles, the values of the six circular
D
or trigonometric functions at 1 agree with the values at 2 . Therefore, in finding
the value of a circular function at a number , we can always
reduce to a number
14 14 2
between 0 and 2. For example, sin 3 = sin 3 4 = sin 3 . Also, observe
E
from Figure 3.12 that sin 23

= sin 3 .
EP
D
Figure 3.12
139
In general, if 1 , 2 , 3 , and 4 are as shown in Figure 3.13 with P (1 ) =
(x1 , y1 ), then each of the x-coordinates of P (2 ), P (3 ), and P (4 ) is x1 , while
the y-coordinate is y1 . The correct sign is determined by the location of the
angle. Therefore, together with the correct sign, the value of a particular circular
function at an angle can be determined by its value at an angle 1 with radian
measure between 0 and 2 . The angle 1 is called the reference angle of .
PY
O
C
Figure 3.13
E D
The signs of the coordinates of P () depends on the quadrant or axis where

it terminates. It is important to know the sign of each circular function in each
EP
quadrant. See Figure 3.14. It is not necessary to memorize the table, since the
sign of each function for each quadrant is easily determined from its definition.
We note that the signs of cosecant, secant, and cotangent are the same as sine,
cosine, and tangent, respectively.
D
Figure 3.14
Using the fact that the unit circle is symmetric with respect to the x-axis, the
y-axis, and the origin, we can identify the coordinates of all the points using the
140
coordinates of corresponding points in the Quadrant I, as shown in Figure 3.15
for the special angles.
PY
O
C Figure 3.15
Example 3.2.4. Use reference angle and appropriate sign to find the exact value
D
of each expression.
(1) sin 11
6
and cos 11
6
(3) sin 150
E
(2) cos 7 (4) tan 8

6 3
EP
Solution. (1) The reference angle of 11

6
is 6 , and it lies in Quadrant IV wherein
sine and cosine are negative and positive, respectively.
11 1
sin = sin =
6 6 2
D

11 3
cos = cos =
6 6 2
(2) The angle 7
6
lies in Quadrant II wherein cosine is negative, and its refer-

ence angle is 6 .

7 3
cos = cos =
6 6 2
(3) sin 150 = sin 30 = 1
2

sin
3
(4) tan 8
3
= tan
3
= cos 3 = 2
1 = 3 2
3 2
141
17
1. If P () is a point on the unit circle and = 3
, what are the coordinates of
P ()?
17 5
Solution: 3
is coterminal with
which terminates in QIV. The reference
3
angle is 3 , therefore P 17 = 21 , 23 .

3

6
, find the values of the six
trigonometric functions of .
Solution: The angle 56
terminates in QIII, the reference angle is 6 , therefore

PY
P 5 = 23 , 12 .

6

5 3 5 2 2 3
cos = sec = =
6 2 6 3 3
O

5 1 5
sin = csc = 2
6 2 6

3

5 1 3 5
tan
6
= =
3 3
Ccot
6
=
1
= 3
3. Find the six trigonometric functions of the angle if the terminal side of in
D
standard position passes through the point (5, 12).
p
Solution: x = 5, y = 12, r = (5)2 + (12)2 = 13.
E
x 5 r 13
EP
cos = = sec = =
r 13 x 5
y 12 r 13
sin = = csc = =
r 13 y 12
y 12 x 5
tan = = cot = =
D
x 5 y 12
4. Given sec = 25
24
and 3
2
,
find sin + cos .
p
Solution: r = 25, x = 24, y = (25)2 (24)2 = 7.
Since is in QIII, y = 7.
7 24 31
sin + cos = + = .
25 25 25
5. If tan A = 45 , determine 2 sin Acos A

3 cos A
.
142
Solution:
4 sin A 4
tan A = = =
5 cos A 5
2 sin A cos A 2 sin A 1 cos A 2 4 1 1
= = (1) =
3 cos A 3 cos A 3 cos A 3 5 3 5
6. What is the reference angle of 29 ? Find the value of tan 29

6 6
.
Solution: 29
6
is coterminal with 7
in QIII, so its reference angle is 6 .
6

29
3
tan = tan =
6 6 3
PY
7. For what angle in the third quadrant is cos = sin 5
3
?
Solution:
5
O
sin = cos
3
3 7
cos = and in QIII = =
2
C 6
D
33
1. In what quadrant is P () located if = ?
E
2. In what quadrant is P () located if = 17

6
?
EP
3. In what quadrant is P () located if sec > 0 and cot < 0?
4. In what quadrant is P () located if tan > 0 and cos < 0 ?

5
5. If P () is a point on the unit circle and = , what are the coordinates of
D
6
P ()?

6
, what are the coordinates
of P ()?
7. If cos > 0 and tan = 23 , find sec +tan

sec tan
3
8. If tan = 5
and is in QIII, what is sec ?
9. If csc = 2 and cos < 0, find sec .
10. Find the values of the other trigonometric functions of if cot = 43 and
sin < 0.
143
11. Find the values of the other trigonometric functions of if csc = 4 and
does not terminate in QIII.
12. The terminal side of an angle in standard position contains the point (7, 1).
Find the values of the six trigonometric functions of .
13. The terminal side of an angle in standard position contains the point (2, 4).
Find the values of the six trigonometric functions of .
14. If the terminal point of an arc of length lies on the line joining the origin
and the point (3, 1), what is cos2 sin2 ?
15. If the terminal point of an arc of length lies on the line joining the origin
PY
and the point (2, 6), what is sec2 csc2 ?
35
16. Determine the reference angle of 4
, and find cos 35
4
.
3
17. If 2
< < 2, find if cos = sin 2
3
.
O
18. Evaluate the sum of sin 30 + sin 60 + sin 90 + + sin 510 + sin 540 .
7

19. If f (x) = sin 2x + cos 2x + sec 2x + csc 2x + tan 2x + cot 2x, what is f ?
C 8
20. Evaluate the sum of sec 6 + sec 13

6
+ sec 25
6
+ + sec 109
6
.
D
4
E
Lesson 3.3. Graphs of Circular Functions and Situational

EP
Problems

D
(1) determine the domain and range of the different circular functions;
(2) graph the six circular functions with its amplitude, period, and phase shift;
and
(3) solve situational problems involving circular functions.
Lesson Outline
(1) Domain and range of circular functions
(2) Graphs of circular functions
(3) Amplitude, period, and phase shift
144
Introduction
There are many things that occur periodically. Phenomena like rotation of
the planets and comets, high and low tides, and yearly change of the seasons
follow a periodic pattern. In this lesson, we will graph the six circular functions
and we will see that they are periodic in nature.
3.3.1. Graphs of y = sin x and y = cos x
Recall that, for a real number x, sin x = sin for an angle with measure x
radians, and that sin is the second coordinate of the point P () on the unit
circle. Since each x corresponds to an angle , we can conclude that
PY
(1) sin x is defined for any real number x or the domain of the sine function is
R, and
(2) the range of sine is the set of all real numbers between 1 and 1 (inclusive).
O
From the definition, it also follows that sin(x+2) = sin x for any real number
C
x. This means that the values of the sine function repeat every 2 units. In this
case, we say that the sine function is a periodic function with period 2.
Table 3.16 below shows the values of y = sin x, where x is the equivalent radian
measure of the special angles and their multiples from 0 to 2. As commented
D
above, these values determine the behavior of the function on R.
E
2 3 5
x 0 6 4 3 2 3 4 6

1 2 3 3 2 1
y 0 1 0
EP
2 2 2 2 2 2
0 0.5 0.71 0.87 1 0.87 0.71 0.5 0
7 5 4 3 5 7 11
x 6 4 3 2 3 4 6
2

D
2 3 3 2
y 12 2
2
1 2
2
12 0
0.5 0.71 0.87 1 0.87 0.71 0.5 0
Table 3.16
From the table, we can observe that as x increases from 0 to 2 , sin x also
increases from 0 to 1. Similarly, as x increases from 3
2
to 2, sin x also increases
from 1 to 0. On the other hand, notice that as x increases from 2 to , sin x
decreases from 1 to 0. Similarly, as x increases from to 3
2
, sin x decreases from
0 to 1.
145
To sketch the graph of y = sin x, we plot the points presented in Table 3.16,
and join them with a smooth curve. See Figure 3.17. Since the graph repeats
every 2 units, Figure 3.18 shows periodic graph over a longer interval.
PY
Figure 3.17
O
C
D
Figure 3.18
E
EP
We can make observations about the cosine function that are similar to the
sine function.
y = cos x has domain R and range [1, 1].

D
y = cos x is periodic with period 2. The graph of y = cos x is shown in

Figure 3.19.
Figure 3.19
146
From the graphs of y = sin x and y = cos x in Figures 3.18 and 3.19, re-
spectively, we observe that sin(x) = sin x and cos(x) = cos x for any real
number x. In other words, the graphs of y = cos(x) and y = cos x are the same,
while the graph of y = sin(x) is the same as that of y = sin x.
In general, if a function f satisfies the property that f (x) = f (x) for all x
in its domain, we say that such function is even. On the other hand, we say that
a function f is odd if f (x) = f (x) for all x in its domain. For example, the
functions x2 and cos x are even, while the functions x3 3x and sin x are odd.
3.3.2. Graphs of y = a sin bx and y = a cos bx
PY
Using a table of values from 0 to 2, we can sketch the graph of y = 3 sin x, and
compare it to the graph of y = sin x. See Figure 3.20 wherein the solid curve
belongs to y = 3 sin x, while the dashed curve to y = sin x. For instance, if x = 2 ,
then y = 1 when y = sin x, and y = 3 when y = 3 sin x. The period, x-intercepts,
and domains are the same for both graphs, while they differ in the range. The
O
range of y = 3 sin x is [3, 3].
C
E D
Figure 3.20
EP
In general, the graphs of y = a sin x and y = a cos x with a > 0 have the same
shape as the graphs of y = sin x and y = cos x, respectively. If a < 0, there is a
reflection across the x-axis.
D
In the graphs of y = a sin x and y = a cos x, the number |a| is called

its amplitude. It dictates the height of the curve. When |a| < 1,
the graphs are shrunk vertically, and when |a| > 1, the graphs are
stretched vertically.
Now, in Table 3.21, we consider the values of y = sin 2x on [0, 2].
147
2 3 5
x 0 6 4 3 2 3 4 6

3 3 3 3
y 0 2
1 2
0 2
1 2
0
0 0.87 1 0.87 0 0.87 1 0.87 0
7 5 4 3 5 7 11
x 6 4 3 2 3 4 6
2

3 3 3
y 2
1 2
0 2
1 23 0
0.87 1 0.87 0 0.87 1 0.87 0
Table 3.21
PY
O
C
Figure 3.22
E D
Figure 3.22 shows the graphs of y = sin 2x (solid curve) and y = sin x (dashed
curve) over the interval [0, 2]. Notice that, for sin 2x to generate periodic values
similar to [0, 2] for y = sin x, we just need values of x from 0 to . We then
EP
expect the values of sin 2x to repeat every units thereafter. The period of
y = sin 2x is .
2
If b 6= 0, then both y = sin bx and y = cos bx have period given by .
D
|b|
If 0 < |b| < 1, the graphs are stretched horizontally, and if |b| > 1, the
graphs are shrunk horizontally.
To sketch the graphs of y = a sin bx and y = a cos bx, a, b 6= 0, we may proceed

with the following steps:
(1) Determine the amplitude |a|, and find the period 2|b|
. To draw one cycle
of the graph (that is, one complete graph for one period), we just need to
complete the graph from 0 to 2
|b|
.
148
(2) Divide the interval into four equal parts, and get five division points: x1 = 0,
x2 , x3 , x4 , and x5 = 2
|b|
, where x3 is the midpoint between x1 and x5 (that
1
is, 2 (x1 + x5 ) = x3 ), x2 is the midpoint between x1 and x3 , and x4 is the
midpoint between x3 and x5 .
(3) Evaluate the function at each of the five x-values identified in Step 2. The
points will correspond to the highest point, lowest point, and x-intercepts
of the graph.
(4) Plot the points found in Step 3, and join them with a smooth curve similar
to the graph of the basic sine curve.
PY
(5) Extend the graph to the right and to the left, as needed.
Example 3.3.1. Sketch the graph of one cycle of y = 2 sin 4x.
2
Solution. (1) The period is 4
= 2 , and the amplitude is 2.
O
(2) Dividing the interval [0, 2 ] into 4 equal parts, we get the following x-
coordinates: 0, 8 , 4 , 3
8
, and 2 . C
(3) When x = 0, 4 , and 2 , we get y = 0. On the other hand, when x = 8 , we
have y = 2 (the amplitude), and y = 2 when x = 3 8
.
(4) Draw a smooth curve by connecting the points. There is no need to proceed
D
to Step 5 because the problem only asks for one cycle.
E
EP
D
Example 3.3.2. Sketch the graph of y = 3 cos x2 .
2
Solution. (1) The amplitude is | 3| = 3, and the period is 1 = 4.
2
(2) We divide the interval [0, 4] into four equal parts, and we get the following
x-values: 0, , 2, 3, and 4.
149
(3) We have y = 0 when x = and 3, y = 3 when x = 0 and 4, and y = 3
when x = 2.
(4) We trace the points in Step 3 by a smooth curve.
(5) We extend the pattern in Step 4 to the left and to the right.
PY
Example 3.3.3. Sketch the graph of two cycles of y = 21 sin 2x

3
.
O
Solution. Since the sine function is odd, the graph of y = 12 sin 2x

3
is the same
1 2x
as that of y = 2 sin 3 . C 2
(1) The amplitude is 12 , and the period is 2 = 3.
3
D
(2) Dividing the interval [0, 3] into four equal parts, we get the x-coordinates
of the five important points:
E
0 + 3 3 0 + 3
2 3 3
2
+ 3 9
= , = , = .
2 2 2 4 2 4
EP
3
(3) We get y = 0 when x = 0, 2
, and 3, y = 21 when 3
4
, and y = 1
2
when
9
4
.
(4) We trace the points in Step 3 by a smooth curve.

D
(5) We extend the pattern in Step 4 by one more period to the right.
150
3.3.3. Graphs of y = a sin b(x c) + d and y = a cos b(x c) + d

We first compare the graphs of y = sin x and y = sin x 3
using a table of
values and the 5-step procedure discussed earlier.
As x runs from 3 to 7 3
, the value of the expression x 3 runs from 0 to 2. So
for one cycle of the graph of y = sin x 3 , we then expect to have the graph of
y = sin x starting from x = 3 . This is confirmed by the values in Table 3.23. We
then apply a similar procedure to complete one cycle of the graph; that is, divide
the interval [ 3 , 7
3
] into four equal parts, and then determine the key values of
x in sketching the graphs as discussed earlier. The one-cycle graph of y = sin x
(dashed curve) and the corresponding one-cycle graph of y = sin x 3 (solid
PY
curve) are shown in Figure 3.24.
5 4 11 7
x 3 6 3 6 3
3
x 3
0 2
2
2
O

sin x 3
0 1 0 1 0
Table 3.23
C
E D
EP
Figure 3.24
D
Observe that the graph of y = sin x 3 shifts 3 units to the right of

y = sin x. Thus, they have the same period, amplitude, domain, and range.
The graphs of
y = a sin b(x c) and y = a cos b(x c)
have the same shape as y = a sin bx and y = a cos bx, respectively, but
shifted c units to the right when c > 0 and shifted |c| units to the left
if c < 0. The number c is called the phase shift of the sine or cosine
graph.
151
Example 3.3.4. In the same Cartesian plane, sketch one cycle of the graphs of

y = 3 sin x and y = 3 sin x + 4 .
Solution. We have sketched the graph of y = 3 sin x earlier at the start of the

lesson. We consider y = 3 sin x + 4 . We expect that it has the same shape as
that of y = 3 sin x, but shifted some units.
Here, we have a = 3, b = 1, and c = 4 . From these constants, we get
the amplitude, the period, and the phase shift, and these are 3, 2, and 4 ,
respectively.
One cycle starts at x = 4 and ends at x = 4 + 2 = 7
4
. We now compute
the important values of x.
PY
4 + 7
4 3 4 + 3
4 3
4
+ 7
4 5
= , = , =
2 4 2 4 2 4
O
x 4
4
3
4
5
4
7
4

y = 3 sin x + 0 3 0 3 0
C
4
E D
EP
D
While the effect of c in y = a sin b(x c) and y = a cos b(x c) is

a horizontal shift of their graphs from the corresponding graphs of
y = a sin bx and y = a cos bx, the effect of d in the equations y =
a sin b(x c) + d and y = a cos b(x c) + d is a vertical shift. That is,
the graph of y = a sin b(x c) + d has the same amplitude, period, and
phase shift as that of y = a sin b(x c), but shifted d units upward
when d > 0 and |d| units downward when d < 0.
152
Example 3.3.5. Sketch the graph of

y = 2 cos 2 x 3.
6
Solution. Here, a = 2, b = 2, c= 6 , and d = 3. We first sketch one cycle of
the graph of y = 2 cos 2 x 6 , and then extend this graph to the left and to
the right, and then move the resulting graph 3 units downward.
The graph of y = 2 cos 2 x 6 has amplitude 2, period , and phase shift

6
.

Start of one cycle: 6
PY
7
End of the cycle: 6
+ = 6

6
+ 7
6 2
6
+ 2
3 5 2
3
+ 7
6 11
= , = , =
2 3 2 12 2 12
O
6
5
12
2
3
11
12
7
6
y = 2 cos 2 x 6

C 2 0 2 0 2
y = 2 cos 2 x 6 3

5 3 1 3 5
E D
EP
D
Before we end this sub-lesson, we make the following observation, which will
be used in the discussion on simple harmonic motion (Sub-Lesson 3.3.6).
153
Different Equations, The Same Graph
1. The graphs of y = sin x and y = sin(x + 2k), k any integer, are

the same.
2. The graphs of y = sin x, y = sin(x + ), y = cos(x 2 ), and
y = cos(x + 2 ) are the same.
3. In general, the graphs of
y = a sin b(x c) + d,
y = a sin[b(x c) + + 2k] + d,
PY

y = a cos[b(x c) 2
+ 2k] + d,
and

y = a cos[b(x c) + 2
+ 2k] + d,
O
where k is any integer, are all the same.
Similar observations are true for cosine.
C
3.3.4. Graphs of Cosecant and Secant Functions
D
1
We know that csc x = sin x
if sin x 6= 0. Using this relationship, we can sketch the
graph of y = csc x.
E
First, we observe that the domain of the cosecant function is
{x R : sin x 6= 0} = {x R : x 6= k, k Z}.
EP
Table 3.25 shows the key numbers (that is, numbers where y = sin x crosses the
x-axis, attain its maximum and minimum values) and some neighboring points,
where und stands for undefined, while Figure 3.26 shows one cycle of the
graphs of y = sin x (dashed curve) and y = csc x (solid curve). Notice the
D
asymptotes of the graph y = csc x.
5 7 3 11
x 0 6 2 6
6 2 6
2
1 1
y = sin x 0 2
1 2
0 12 1 12 0
y = csc x und 2 1 2 und 2 1 2 und
Table 3.25
154
PY
Figure 3.26
O
We could also sketch the graph of csc x directly from the graph of y = sin x
by observing the following facts:
C
(1) If sin x = 1 (or 1), then csc x = 1 (or 1).
D
(2) At each x-intercept of y = sin x, y = csc x is undefined; but a vertical
asymptote is formed because, when sin x is close to 0, the value of csc x will
E
have a big magnitude with the same sign as sin x.

EP
Refer to Figure 3.27 for the graphs of y = sin x (dashed curve) and y = csc x
(solid curve) over a larger interval.
D
Figure 3.27
155
Like the sine and cosecant functions, the cosine and secant functions are also
reciprocals of each other. Therefore, y = sec x has domain
k
{x R : cos x 6= 0} = {x R : x 6= , k odd integer}.
2
Similarly, the graph of y = sec x can be obtained from the graph of y = cos x.
These graphs are shown in Figure 3.28.
PY
O
C
Figure 3.28
D
Example 3.3.6. Sketch the graph of y = 2 csc x2 .

E
Solution. First, we sketch the graph of y = 2 sin x2 , and use the technique dis-
cussed above to sketch the graph of y = 2 csc x2 .
EP
D
The vertical asymptotes of y = 2 csc x2 are the x-intercepts of y = 2 sin x2 :

x = 0, 2, 4, . . .. After setting up the asymptotes, we now sketch the graph
of y = 2 csc x2 as shown below.
156
PY
Example 3.3.7. Sketch the graph of y = 2 sec 2x.
Solution. Sketch the graph of y = cos 2x (note that it has period ), then sketch
the graph of y = sec 2x (as illustrated above), and then move the resulting
graph 2 units upward to obtain the graph of y = 2 sec 2x.
O
C
E D
EP
D
157
3.3.5. Graphs of Tangent and Cotangent Functions
sin x
We know that tan x = cos x
6 0. From this definition of the tangent
, where cos x =
function, it follows that its domain is the same as that of the secant function,
which is
k
{x R : cos x 6= 0} = {x R : x 6= , k odd integer}.
2
We note that tan x = 0 when sin x = 0 (that is, when x = k, k any integer), and
that the graph of y = tan x has asymptotes x = k2
, k odd integer. Furthermore,
by recalling the signs of tangent from Quadrant I to Quadrant IV and its values,
we observe that the tangent function is periodic with period .
PY
To sketch the graph of y = tan x, it will be enough to know its one-cycle

graph on the open interval 2 , 2 . See Table 3.29 and Figure 3.30.
x 2 3 4 6 0
O

3
y = tan x und
C 3 1 3
0

x 6 4 3 2

3

y = tan x 3
1 3 und
Table 3.29
E D
EP
D
Figure 3.30
cos x
In the same manner, the domain of y = cot x = sin x
is
{x R : sin x =
6 0} = {x R : x =
6 k, k Z},
and its period is also . The graph of y = cot x is shown in Figure 3.31.
158
Figure 3.31
PY
In general, to sketch the graphs of y = a tan bx and y = a cot bx, a 6= 0 and
b > 0, we may proceed with the following steps:
O
(1) Determine the period b . Then

we draw one cycle of the graph on 2b , 2b

for y = a tan bx, and on 0, b for y = a cot bx.
C
(2) Determine the two adjacent vertical asymptotes. For y = a tan bx, these

vertical asymptotes are given by x = 2b . For y = a cot bx, the vertical
asymptotes are given by x = 0 and x = b .
D
(3) Divide the interval formed by the vertical asymptotes in Step 2 into four
equal parts, and get three division points exclusively between the asymp-
E
totes.
(4) Evaluate the function at each of these x-values identified in Step 3. The
EP
points will correspond to the signs and x-intercept of the graph.
(5) Plot the points found in Step 3, and join them with a smooth curve ap-
proaching to the vertical asymptotes. Extend the graph to the right and to
the left, as needed.
D
Example 3.3.8. Sketch the graph of y = 21 tan 2x.
Solution. The period of the function is 2 , and the adjacent asymptotes are x =
4 , 3
4
, . . .. Dividing the interval 4 , 4 into four equal parts, the key x-values
are 8 , 0, and 8 .
x 8 0
8
y = 21 tan 2x 21 0 1
2
159
PY
Example 3.3.9. Sketch the graph of y = 2 cot x3 on the interval (0, 3).
O
Solution. The period of the function is 3, and the adjacent asymptotes are x = 0
and x = 3. We now divide the interval (0, 3) into four equal parts, and the
key x-values are 3 , 3 , and 9 .
4 2 4
C
3 3 9
x 4 2 4
D
y = 2 cot x3 2 0 2
E
EP
D
3.3.6. Simple Harmonic Motion
Repetitive or periodic behavior is common in nature. As an example, the time-

telling device known as sundial is a result of the predictable rising and setting
of the sun everyday. It consists of a flat plate and a gnomon. As the sun moves
across the sky, the gnomon casts a shadow on the plate, which is calibrated to
tell the time of the day.
160
PY
O
C
Sundial, by liz west, 29 March 2007,
https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Sundial 2r.jpg. Public Domain.

D
Some motions are also periodic. When a weight is suspended on a spring,
pulled down, and released, the weight oscillates up and down. Neglecting resis-
E
tance, this oscillatory motion of the weight will continue on and on, and its height
is periodic with respect to time.
EP
D
t = 0 sec t = 2.8 sec
161
t = 6.1 sec t = 9 sec
PY
Periodic motions are usually modeled by either sine or cosine function, and are
called simple harmonic motions. Unimpeded movements of objects like oscilla-
tion, vibration, rotation, and motion due to water waves are real-life occurrences
O
that behave in simple harmonic motion.
C
Equations of Simple Harmonic Motion
The displacement y (directed height or length) of an object behaving
in a simple harmonic motion with respect to time t is given by one of
the following equations:
D
y = a sin b(t c) + d
E
or
y = a cos b(t c) + d.
EP
In both equations, we have the following information:
amplitude = |a| = 21 (M m) - the maximum displacement above

and below the rest position or central position or equilibrium, where
D
M is the maximum height and m is the minimum height;

period = 2|b|
- the time required to complete one cycle (from one
highest or lowest point to the next);
|b|
frequency = 2
- the number of cycles per unit of time;
c - responsible for the horizontal shift in time; and
d - responsible for the vertical shift in displacement.
Example 3.3.10. A weight is suspended from a spring and is moving up and

down in a simple harmonic motion. At start, the weight is pulled down 5 cm below
the resting position, and then released. After 8 seconds, the weight reaches its
162
highest location for the first time. Find the equation of the motion.
Solution. We are given that the weight is located at its lowest position at t = 0;
that is, y = 5 when t = 0. Therefore, the equation is y = 5 cos bt.
Because it took the weight 8 seconds from the lowest point to its immediate
highest point, half the period is 8 seconds.
1 2 t
= 8 = b = = y = 5 cos 2
2 b 8 8
? Example 3.3.11. Suppose you ride a Ferris wheel. The lowest point of the
wheel is 3 meters off the ground, and its diameter is 20 m. After it started, the
Ferris wheel revolves at a constant speed, and it takes 32 seconds to bring you
PY
back again to the riding point. After riding for 150 seconds, find your approximate
height above the ground.
Solution. We ignore first the fixed value of 3 m off the ground, and assume that
the central position passes through the center of the wheel and is parallel to the
O
ground.
Let t be the time (in seconds) elapsed that you have been riding the Ferris
C
wheel, and y is he directed distance of your location with respect to the assumed
central position at time t. Because y = 10 when t = 0, the appropriate model
is y = 10 cos bt for t 0.
D
Given that the Ferris wheel takes 32 seconds to move from the lowest point
to the next, the period is 32.
E
2 t
= 32 = b = = y = 10 cos
b 16 16
EP
When t = 150, we get y = 10 cos 150

16
3.83.
Bringing back the original condition given in the problem that the riding point
is 3 m off the ground, after riding for 150 seconds, you are approximately located
3.83 + 13 = 16.83 m off the ground. 2
D
In the last example, the central position or equilibrium may be vertically

shifted from the ground or sea level (the role of the constant d). In the same way,
the starting point may also be horizontally shifted (the role of the constant c).
Moreover, as observed in Sub-Lesson 3.3.3 (see page 154), to find the function
that describes a particular simple harmonic motion, we can either choose
y = a sin b(t c) + d
or
y = a cos b(t c) + d,
and determine the appropriate values of a, b, c, and d. In fact, we can assume
that a and b are positive numbers, and c is the smallest such nonnegative number.
163
Example 3.3.12. A signal buoy in Laguna Bay bobs up and down with the
height h of its transmitter (in feet) above sea level modeled by h(t) = a sin bt + d
at time t (in seconds). During a small squall, its height varies from 1 ft to 9 ft
above sea level, and it takes 3.5 seconds from one 9-ft height to the next. Find
the values of the constants a, b, and d.
Solution. We solve the constants step by step.
The minimum and maximum values of h(t) are 1 ft and 9 ft, respectively.
Thus, the amplitude is a = 12 (M m) = 12 (9 1) = 4.
Because it takes 3.5 seconds from one 9-ft height to the next, the period is
PY
3.5. Thus, we have 2b
= 3.5, which gives b = 4
7
.
Because the lowest point is 1 ft above the sea level and the amplitude is 4,
it follows that d = 5. 2
O
Example 3.3.13. A variable star is a star whose brightness fluctuates as ob-
served from Earth. The magnitude of visual brightness of one variable star ranges
from 2.0 to 10.1, and it takes 332 days to observe one maximum brightness to
C
the next. Assuming that the visual brightness of the star can be modeled by the
equation y = a sin b(t c) + d, t in days, and putting t = 0 at a time when the
star is at its maximum brightness, find the constants a, b, c, and d, where a, b > 0
D
and c the least nonnegative number possible.
Solution.
E
M m 10.1 2.0
a= = = 4.05
2 2
2
EP
= 332 = b =
b 166
d = a + m = 4.05 + 2.0 = 6.05
For the (ordinary) sine function to start at the highest point at t = 0, the least
possible horizontal movement to the right (positive value) is 3 units.
D
3 3 3
bc = = c= = = 249 2
2 2b 2 166
? Example 3.3.14. The path of a fast-moving particle traces a circle with equa-
tion
(x + 7)2 + (y 5)2 = 36.
It starts at point (1, 5), moves clockwise, and passes the point (7, 11) for the
first time after traveling 6 microseconds. Where is the particle after traveling 15
microseconds?
164
Solution. As described above, we may choose sine or cosine function. Here, we
choose the sine function to describe both x and y in terms of time t in microsec-
onds; that is, we let
x = a sin b(t c) + d and y = e sin f (t g) + h,
where we appropriately choose the positive values for a, b, e, and f , and the least
nonnegative values for c and g.
The given circle has radius 6 and center (7, 5). Defining the central position
of the values of x as the line x = 7 and that of the values of y as the line y = 5,
we get a = e = 6, d = 7, and h = 5.
From the point (1, 5) to the point (7, 11) (moving clockwise), the particle
PY
has traveled three-fourths of the complete cycle; that is, three-fourths of the
period must be 2.
3 2 3 2
= =6 = b=f =
4 b 4 f 4
O
As the particle starts at (1, 5) and moves clockwise, the values of x start
at its highest value (x = 1) and move downward toward its central position
C
(x = 7) and continue to its lowest value (x = 13). Therefore, the graph of
a sin bt + d has to move 3
2b
= 6 units to the right, and so we get c = 6.
As to the value of g, we observe the values of y start at its central position
D
(y = 5) and go downward to its lowest value (y = 1). Similar to the argument
used in determining c, the graph of y = e sin f t + h has to move b = 4 units to
E
the right, implying that g = 4.

Hence, We have the following equations of x and y in terms of t:
EP
x = 6 sin 4 (t 6) 7 and y = 6 sin 4 (t 4) + 5.

When t = 15, we get

x = 6 sin 4 (15 6) 7 = 7 + 3 2 2.76
D
and
y = 6 sin 4 (15 4) + 5 = 5 + 3 2 9.24.
That is, after traveling for 15 microseconds, the particle is located near the point
(2.76, 9.24). 2

1. Find the period of the function y = 4 sin x

4
3.
x 1 2

Solution: y = 4 sin 4 3 = y = 4 sin 3 (x ) 3 = P = 1 = 6
3
165
2. In the function y = 3 tan(2kx ), the period is 4. Find the value of k and
the phase shift of the graph of the function.
Solution: The period of the tangent function is P = b .

y = 3 tan(2kx ) = y = 3 tan 2k x = P = = 4.
2k 2k
1 1
= 4 = k = and Phase shift = = = 4
2k 8 2k 2 81
3. Sketch the graph of function y = 12 sin 21 x +

6
+2 over one period. Determine
the domain and range of the function.
PY
Solution: The graph is a vertical translation of y = 12 sin 12 x + 6 by 2 units

upward. The period of the given function is 2

1 = 4. One complete cycle may
2
start at x = 6 and end at x = 6 + 4 = 23
6
.
The critical points for the graph are
O
5 11 17 23
x= , x= , x= , x= , and x = .
6 6 6 6 6
C
E D
EP
5 3

The domain of the function is R and its range is ,
2 2
.
D
4. Sketch the graph of the function y = 2 cos(x 2 ) + 3 over two periods. Find
Solution: The graph of the given function is a vertical translation of y =
2 cos(x 2 ) by 3 units upward. The period of the function is 2. One
complete cycle may start and end at x = 2 and x = 5 2
, respectively. The
next complete cycle starts at x = 5
2
and ends at x = 9
2
.
3 5 7 9
critical points: , , , 2, , 3, , 4,
2 2 2 2 2
166
PY
The domain of the given cosine function is R, and its range is [1, 5].
5. Sketch the graph of the function y = 41 tan x 4 over three periods. Find

O
Solution: The period of the function is . One complete cycle may start at
x = 4 and end at x = 5 .
4
C
E D
EP
D
3
The domain of the function is {x|x 6= + k, k Z}, and its range is R.
4
6. Sketch the graph of the function y = 3 cot 12 x + 12

+ 2 over three periods.
Find the domain and range of the function.

Solution: y = 3 cot 21 x + 12 + 2 = 3 cot 21 x + 6 + 2 = P = 2

One complete cycle may start at x = 6 and end at x = 11

6
.
167
PY
The domain of the function is {x|x 6= 6 + 2k, k Z}, and its range is R.
O
7. The graph of the function g(x) is the same as that of f (x) = 3 sin x 3 but

shifted 2 units downward and 2 units to the right. What is g()?

C
Solution: The function f (x) = 3 sin x 3 when shifted 2 units downward

and 2 units to the right is

D

5
g(x) = 3 sin x 2 = 3 sin x 2.
3 2 6
E

5 1
g() = 3 sin 2=
6 2
EP
8. The graph of the function h(x) is the same as that of f (x) = 3 sin(2x 3) + 1
but shifted 3 units upward and 2 units to the left. What is h( 56
)?
Solution: h(x) = 3 sin 2 x + 2 3 + 1 + 3 = 3 sin(2x 2) + 4

D

5 5 83 3
h = 3 sin 2 2 + 4 =
6 6 2
9. Sketch the graph of y = 2 sec 12 x

4
over two periods. Find the domain
and range of the function.
Solution: The period of the function is 4. One complete cycle may start at
x = 4 and end at x = 17
4
.
168
PY
The domain of the function is {x|x 6= 54
+ 2k, k Z}, and its range is
O
(, 2] [2, ).
10. Sketch the graph of y = csc x + 3 + 2 over two periods. Find the domain

and range of the function.

C
Solution: The period of the function is 2. One complete cycle may start and
end at x = 3 and x = 5
3
, respectively.
E D
EP
D
The domain of the function is {x|x 6= 3 + k, k Z}, and its range is

(, 1] [3, ).
169
1. What is the period of the function y = 2 cos 14 x

2
?
2. The amplitude and period of the function y = 4 a2 cos bx

3
are 3 and 4,
respectively. Find |a| + b.
3. In the function y = 2 3 cot 4
k
(x 2), the period is 2. Find the value of k.
4. What are the minimum and maximum values of the function y = 3 sin 34 x + 2

3

5?
5. Given the function y = 3 sin 43 x + 2 5, find the value of y when x = 8

3 9
.
PY
6. Given the function y = 2 cot 34 x 6 + 3, find the value of y when x = 7

6
.
7. Find the domain and range of the function y = 32 sin 13 x 3

4
+ 2?
8. Find the range of the function y = 3 sec 2x

3
.
O
9. Find the equation of the secant function whose graph is the graph of y =
3 sec 2x shifted units to the right and 3 units downward.
C
10. Find the equation of the sine function whose graph is the graph of y =
2 sin 2 x 4 + 1 shifted 2 units to the left and 3 units upward.

11. Given the tangent function y = 1 3 tan 2x

4
, find the equations of all its
D
vertical asymptotes.
12. Given the cosecant function y = csc x2 3 , find the equations of all its

E
vertical asymptotes.
13. Sketch the graph over one period, and indicate the period, phase shift, domain,
EP
and range for each.

(a) y = 2 sin 14 x + 4 1 (c) y = 12 csc 34 (2x ) 1

(b) y = tan 12 2x + 3 2 (d) y = sec 21 4x + 2

3
+2
D
14. A point P in simple harmonic motion has a frequency of 21 oscillation per

minute and amplitude of 4 ft. Express the motion of P by means of an
equation in the form d = a sin bt.
? 15. A mass is attached to a spring, and then pulled and released 8 cm below its
resting position at the start. If the simple harmonic motion is modeled by
1
y = a cos 10 (t c), where a > 0, c the least nonnegative such number, and t
in seconds, find the location of the mass 10 seconds later.
170
Lesson 3.4. Fundamental Trigonometric Identities

(1) determine whether an equation is an identity or a conditional equation;
(2) derive the fundamental trigonometric identities;
(3) simplify trigonometric expressions using fundamental trigonometric identi-
ties; and
(4) prove other trigonometric identities using fundamental trigonometric identi-
PY
ties.
Lesson Outline
(1) Domain of an equation
O
(2) Identity and conditional equation
(3) Fundamental trigonometric identities
(4) Proving trigonometric identities
C
Introduction
In previous lessons, we have defined trigonometric functions using the unit
D
circle and also investigated the graphs of the six trigonometric functions. This
lesson builds on the understanding of the different trigonometric functions by
E
discovery, deriving, and working with trigonometric identities.

EP
3.4.1. Domain of an Expression or Equation
Consider the following expressions:

x x
2x + 1, x2 1, , .
x2 3x 4 x1
D
What are the real values of the variable x that make the expressions defined in
the set of real numbers?
In the first expression, every real value of x when substituted to the expression
makes it defined in the set of real numbers; that is, the value of the expression is
real when x is real.
In the second expression, not every real value of x makes
the expression defined
in R. For example, when x = 0, the expression becomes 1, which is not a real
number.

x2 1 R x2 1 0 x 1 or x 1
171

Here, for x2 1 to be defined in R, x must be in (, 1] [1, ).
In the third expression, the values of x that make the denominator zero make
the entire expression undefined.
x2 3x 4 = (x 4)(x + 1) = 0 x = 4 or x = 1
x
Hence, the expression is real when x 6= 4 and x 6= 1.
x2
3x 4

In the fourth expression, because the expression x 1 is in the denominator,
x must be greater than 1. Although the value of the entire expression is 0 when
x = 0, we do not include 0 as allowed value of x because part of the expression
is not real when x = 0.
PY
In the expressions above, the allowed values of the variable x constitute the
domain of the expression.
The domain of an expression (or equation) is the set of all real values of
O
the variable for which every term (or part) of the expression (equation)
is defined in R. C
In the expressions above, the domains of the first, second, third, and fourth
expressions are R, (, 1] [1, ), R \ {1, 4}, and (1, ), respectively.
D
Example 3.4.1. Determine the domain of the expression/equation.

E
x2 1 x+1
(a) 3 2

x + 2x 8x 1x
EP
(b) tan sin cos 2

2
(c) x2 1 + x2 =
3
x2 1
cos2 z
D
(d) z = 4 sin z 1
1 + sin z
Solution. (a) x3 + 2x2 8x = x(x + 4)(x 2) = 0 x = 0, x =

4, or x = 2

x + 1 R x + 1 0 x 1
1x=0 x=1
Domain = [1, ) \ {4, 0, 1, 2}
= [1, 0) (0, 1) (1, 2) (2, )
172
sin
(b) tan sin cos 2 = cos
sin cos 2
k
cos = 0 = 2
, k odd integer
Domain = R \ { k
2
| k odd integer}

(c) The expression 1+x2 is always positive,
and so 1 + x2 is defined in R. On
3 2
the other hand, the expression x 1 is also defined in R, but it cannot
be zero because it is in the denominator. Therefore, x should not be 1
and 1.
Domain = R \ {1, 1}
3
(d) 1 + sin z = 0 z= 2
+ 2k, k Z
PY
Domain = R \ { 3
2
+ 2k|k Z} 2
3.4.2. Identity and Conditional Equation
O
Consider the following two groups of equations:
Group A Group B
(A1) x2 1 = 0
C (B1) x2 1 = (x 1)(x + 1)
(A2) (x + 7)2 = x2 + 49 (B2) (x + 7)2 = x2 + 14x + 49
x2 4 x2 4
D
(A3) = 2x 1 (B3) =x+2
x2 x2
E
In each equation in Group A, some values of the variable that are in the
domain of the equation do not satisfy the equation (that is, do not make the
EP
equation true). On the other hand, in each equation in Group B, every element
in the domain of the equation satisfies the given equation. The equations in
Group A are called conditional equations, while those in Group B are called
identities.
D
An identity is an equation that is true for all values of the variable

in the domain of the equation. An equation that is not an identity is
called a conditional equation. (In other words, if some values of the
variable in the domain of the equation do not satisfy the equation,
then the equation is a conditional equation.)
Example 3.4.2. Identify whether the given equation is an identity or a condi-

tional equation. For each conditional equation, provide a value of the variable in
the domain that does not satisfy the equation.

(1) x3 2 = x 3
2 x2 + 3 2x + 3 4
173
(2) sin2 = cos2 + 1
(3) sin = cos 1

1 x 12 x+x
(4) =
1+ x 1x
Solution. (1) This is an identity because this is simply factoring of difference of

two cubes.
(2) This is a conditional equation. If = 0, then the left-hand side of the equation
is 0, while the right-hand side is 2.
(3) This is also a conditional equation. If = 0, then both sides of the equation
PY
are equal to 0. But if = , then the left-hand side of the equation is 0,
while the right-hand side is 2.
(4) This is an identity because the right-hand side of the equation is obtained by
rationalizing the denominator of the left-hand side. 2
O
3.4.3. The Fundamental Trigonometric Identities C
Recall that if P (x, y) is the terminal point on the unit circle corresponding to ,
then we have
1 y
sin = y csc = tan =
y x
D
1 x
cos = x sec = cot = .
x y
E
From the definitions, the following reciprocal and quotient identities immedi-
ately follow. Note that these identities hold if is taken either as a real number
EP
or as an angle.
Reciprocal Identities
1 1 1
csc = sec = cot =
D
sin cos tan
Quotient Identities
sin cos
tan = cot =
cos sin
We can use these identities to simplify trigonometric expressions.
174
Example 3.4.3. Simplify:
tan cos cos
(1) (2)
sin cot
sin
tan cos cos
cos
Solution. (1) = =1
sin sin
cos cos
(2) = cos = sin 2
cot sin
If P (x, y) is the terminal point on the unit circle corresponding to , then

x + y 2 = 1. Since sin = y and cos = x, we get
2
PY
sin2 + cos2 = 1.
By dividing both sides of this identity by cos2 and sin2 , respectively, we obtain
tan2 + 1 = sec2 and 1 + cot2 = csc2 .
O
Pythagorean Identities
C
sin2 + cos2 = 1
tan2 + 1 = sec2 1 + cot2 = csc2
D
Example 3.4.4. Simplify:
E
1 + tan2
(1) cos2 + cos2 tan2 (2)
1 + cot2
EP
Solution. (1) cos2 + cos2 tan2 = (cos2 )(1 + tan2 )

= cos2 sec2
=1
1
1 + tan2 sec2 sin2
D
(2) = = cos2
1 = = tan2 2
1 + cot2 csc2 sin2
cos2
In addition to the eight identities presented above, we also have the following
identities.
Even-Odd Identities
sin() = sin cos() = cos

tan() = tan
175
The first two of the negative identities can be obtained from the graphs of
the sine and cosine functions, respectively. (Please review the discussion on page
147.) The third identity can be derived as follows:
sin() sin
tan() = = = tan .
cos() cos
The reciprocal, quotient, Pythagorean, and even-odd identities constitute

what we call the fundamental trigonometric identities.
We now solve Example 3.2.3 in a different way.
Example 3.4.5. If sin = 34 and cos > 0. Find cos .
PY
Solution. Using the identity sin2 + cos2 = 1 with cos > 0, we have
s 2
p 3 7
2
cos = 1 sin = 1 = . 2
O
4 4
Example 3.4.6. If sec = 52 and tan < 0, use the identities to find the values
C
of the remaining trigonometric functions of .
Solution. Note that lies in QIV.

D
1 2
cos = =
sec 5
E
s 2
2 21
sin = 1 cos2 = 1 =
5 5
EP

1 5 21
csc = =
sin 21

sin 521 21
tan = = 2 =
D
cos 5
2

1 2 21
cot = = 2
tan 21
3.4.4. Proving Trigonometric Identities
We can use the eleven fundamental trigonometric identities to establish other

identities. For example, suppose we want to establish the identity
sin
csc cot = .
1 + cos
176
To verify that it is an identity, recall that we need to establish the truth of the
equation for all values of the variable in the domain of the equation. It is not
enough to verify its truth for some selected values of the variable. To prove it, we
use the fundamental trigonometric identities and valid algebraic manipulations
like performing the fundamental operations, factoring, canceling, and multiplying
the numerator and denominator by the same quantity.
Start on the expression on one side of the proposed identity (preferably the
complicated side), use and apply some of the fundamental trigonometric identities
and algebraic manipulations, and arrive at the expression on the other side of the
proposed identity.
Expression Explanation
PY
csc cot Start on one side.
1 cos
= Apply some reciprocal and
sin sin
quotient identities.
O
1 cos
= Add the quotients.
sin
1 cos 1 + cos
= Multiply the numerator
sin 1 + cos
C and denominator by
1 + cos .
1 cos2
= Multiply.
D
(sin )(1 + cos )
sin2
= Apply a Pythagorean
(sin )(1 + cos )
E
identity.
sin
= Reduce to lowest terms.
EP
1 + cos
Upon arriving at the expression of the other side, the identity has been estab-
lished. There is no unique technique to prove all identities, but familiarity with
the different techniques may help.
D
Example 3.4.7. Prove: sec x cos x = sin x tan x.
Solution.
1
sec x cos x = cos x
cos x
1 cos2 x sin2 x sin x
= = = sin x = sin x tan x 2
cos x cos x cos x
1 + sin 1 sin
Example 3.4.8. Prove: = 4 sin sec2
1 sin 1 + sin
177
Solution.
1 + sin 1 sin (1 + sin )2 (1 sin )2
=
1 sin 1 + sin (1 sin )(1 + sin )
1 + 2 sin + sin2 1 + 2 sin sin2
=
1 sin2
4 sin
=
cos2
= 4 sin sec2 2
PY
1. Express each of the other circular functions of in terms of cos .
Solution:
O
1
sec =
cos

C
sin2 + cos2 = 1 = sin2 = 1 cos2 = sin = 1 cos2
1 1
csc = =
sin
D
1 cos2
cos cos
cot = =
sin
E
1 cos2

sin 1 cos2
tan = =
EP
cos cos
2. If tan = a, express cos2 in terms of a.
Solution:
sin sin2 1 cos2
D
a= = a2 = = a 2
=
cos cos2 cos2
2 2 2
a cos = 1 cos
1
a2 cos2 + cos2 = 1 = cos2 (a2 + 1) = 1 = cos2 =
a2 + 1
3. Given a = cos x, simplify and express sin4 x cos4 x in terms of a.

Solution: sin4 x cos4 x = (sin2 x + cos2 x)(sin2 x cos2 x)
= sin2 x cos2 x
= 1 cos2 x cos2 x
= 1 2 cos2 x = 1 2a2
178
4. Simplify (csc x sec x)2 + (csc x + sec x)2 .
Solution: (csc x sec x)2 + (csc x + sec x)2
= (csc2 x 2 csc x sec x + sec2 x) + (csc2 x + 2 csc x sec x + sec2 x)
= 2 csc2 x + 2 sec2 x
2 2
= 2 +
sin x cos2 x
2(cos2 x + sin2 x) 2
= 2 2
= 2 2
= 2 csc2 x sec2 x
sin x cos x sin x cos x
csc
5. Verify the identity = cos .
tan + cot
PY
Solution:
1 1
csc sin sin 1 cos sin
= = 2 = = cos
tan + cot sin cos sin + cos 2 sin 1
+
O
cos sin cos sin
csc + cot 1 1 + cos

6. Establish the identity = .
cot csc + 1
csc + cot 1
C sin
Solution:
cot csc + 1
csc + cot 1 csc + cot
D
=
cot csc + 1 csc + cot
(csc + cot 1)(csc + cot )
=
E
(cot csc )(csc + cot ) + (csc + cot )

=
EP
cot2 csc2 + csc + cot

=
1 + csc + cot
1 cos 1 + cos
= csc + cot = + =
sin sin sin
D

tan x sin x
1. Using fundamental identities, simplify the expression .
sin x
1
2. Using fundamental identities, simplify the expression .
csc x cot x
cos2 A
3. Simplify sin A + .
1 + sin A
179
4. Simplify (1 cos2 A)(1 + cot2 A).
csc x + sec x
5. Express in terms of sine and cosine.
cot x + tan x
tan x cot x
6. Express in terms of sine and cosine.
tan x + cot x
tan x + sin x
7. Express in terms cosine only.
csc x + cot x
1
8. Express in terms sine only.
1 + tan2 x
9. If cot = a, express sin cos in terms of a.
PY
10. If sec = a > 0 and sin > 0, express sin cos in terms of a.
For numbers 11 - 20, establish the identities.
O
csc a + 1 1 + sin a
11. =
csc a 1 1 sin a C
1 + sin a 1 sin a
12. = 4 tan a sec a
1 sin a 1 + sin a
cos a
13. = 1 sin a
D
sec a + tan a
csc a + sec a tan a
14. = tan a sec a
E
csc2 a
1 1
15. + = 2 csc2 a
EP
1 cos a 1 + cos a
sin3 cos3
16. = 1 + sin cos
sin cos
tan sin cos
17. =
D
2
1 tan 2 cos2 1
tan2 + sec + 1
18. = tan + sin
tan + cot
cot sin sec
19. = cos2 sin2
sec csc
20. tan2 sec2 sec2 + 1 = tan4
180
Lesson 3.5. Sum and Difference Identities

(1) derive trigonometric identities involving sum and difference of two angles;
(2) simplify trigonometric expressions using fundamental trigonometric identities
and sum and difference identities;
(3) prove other trigonometric identities using fundamental trigonometric identi-
ties and sum and difference identities; and
PY
(4) solve situational problems involving trigonometric identities.
Lesson Outline
(1) The sum and difference identities for cosine, sine, and tangent functions
O
(2) Cofunction identities
(3) More trigonometric identities C
Introduction
In previous lesson, we introduced the concept of trigonometric identity, pre-
sented the fundamental identities, and proved some identities. In this lesson, we
D
derive the sum and difference identities for cosine, sine, and tangent functions,
establish the cofunction identities, and prove more trigonometric identities.
E
3.5.1. The Cosine Difference and Sum Identities

EP
Let u and v be any real numbers with 0 < v u < 2. Consider the unit circle
with points A = (1, 0), P1 , P2 , P3 , and u and v with corresponding angles as
shown below. Then P1 P2 = AP3 .
D
181
Recall that P1 = P (u) = (cos u, sin u), P2 = P (v) = (cos v, sin v), and P3 =
P (u v) = (cos(u v), sin(u v)), so that
p
P1 P2 = (cos u cos v)2 + (sin u sin v)2 ,
while p
AP3 = [cos(u v) 1]2 + [sin(u v) 0]2 .
Equating these two expressions and expanding the squares, we get
(cos u cos v)2 + (sin u sin v)2 = [cos(u v) 1]2 + sin2 (u v)
PY
cos2 u 2 cos u cos v + cos2 v + sin2 u 2 sin u sin v + sin2 v
= cos2 (u v) 2 cos(u v) + 1 + sin2 (u v)
O
Applying the Pythagorean identity cos2 +sin2 = 1 and simplifying the resulting
equations, we obtain
C
(cos2 u + sin2 u) + (cos2 v + sin2 v) 2 cos u cos v 2 sin u sin v
= [cos2 (u v) + sin2 (u v)] 2 cos(u v) + 1
1 + 1 2 cos u cos v 2 sin u sin v = 1 2 cos(u v) + 1

D
cos(u v) = cos u cos v + sin u sin v.
E
We have thus proved another identity.

Although we assumed at the start that 0 < v u < 2, but because
EP
cos() = cos (one of the even-odd identities), this new identity is true for
any real numbers u and v. As before, the variables can take any real values or
angle measures.
Cosine Difference Identity

D
cos(A B) = cos A cos B + sin A sin B
Replacing B with B, and applying the even-odd identities, we immediately

get another identity.
Cosine Sum Identity
cos(A + B) = cos A cos B sin A sin B
Example 3.5.1. Find the exact values of cos 105 and cos 12

.
182
Solution.
cos 105 = cos(60 + 45 )

= cos 60 cos 45 sin 60 sin 45

1 2 3 2
=
2 2 2 2
2 6
=
4

cos = cos
PY
12 4 6

= cos cos + sin sin
4 6 4 6
2 3 2 1
= +
2 2 2 2
O
6+ 2
= 2
4
C
3 12
Example 3.5.2. Given cos = 5
and sin = 13
, where lies in QIV and in
QI, find cos( + ).
Solution. We will be needing sin and cos .

D
s 2
3 4
sin = 1 cos2 = 1 =
E
5 5
s
EP
2
12 5
q
2
cos = 1 sin = 1 =
13 13
cos( + ) = cos cos sin sin

D

3 5 4 12
=
5 13 5 13
63
= 2
65
3.5.2. The Cofunction Identities and the Sine Sum and Difference
Identities
In the Cosine Difference Identity, if we let A = 2 , we get

cos B = cos cos B + sin sin B
2 2 2
183
= (0) cos B + (1) sin B
= sin B.
From this identity, if we replace B with 2 B, we have
h i
cos B = sin B
2 2 2

cos B = sin B .
2
As for the tangent function, we have
sin B
2
tan B =
cos 2 B

2
PY
cos B
=
sin B
= cot B.
O
We have just derived another set of identities.
Cofunction Identities
C

cos B = sin B sin B = cos B
2 2

D
tan B = cot B
2
E
Using the first two cofunction identities, we now derive the identity for sin(A+
B).
EP
h i
sin(A + B) = cos (A + B)
h2 i
= cos A B)
2
= cos A cos B + sin A sin B
D
2 2
= sin A cos B + cos A sin B
Sine Sum Identity
sin(A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B
In the last identity, replacing B with B and applying the even-odd identities
yield
sin(A B) = sin[A + (B)]
184
= sin A cos(B) + cos A sin(B)
= sin A cos B cos A sin B.
Sine Difference Identity
sin(A B) = sin A cos B cos A sin B
5

Example 3.5.3. Find the exact value of sin 12
.
Solution.

5
PY
sin = sin +
12 4 6

= sin cos + cos sin
4 6 4 6
2 3 2 1
= +
O
2 2
2 2
6+ 2
= 2
4
Example 3.5.4. If sin = 13 3
C
and sin = 21 , where 0 < <
and
< < ,
2 2
find sin( + ) and sin( ).
D
Solution. We first compute cos and cos .
s 2
3 4 10
E
p
2
cos = 1 sin = 1 =
13 13

EP
s 2
1 3
q
cos = 1 sin2 = 1 =
2 2
sin( + ) = sin cos + cos sin

!
D
3 3 4 10 1
= +
13 2 13 2

4 10 3 3
=
26
sin( ) = sin cos cos sin

!
1 4 10 3 3
=
2 13 2 13

4 10 + 3 3
= 2
26
185
Example 3.5.5. Prove:
sin(x + y) = (1 + cot x tan y) sin x cos y.
Solution.
(1 + cot x tan y) sin x cos y = sin x cos y + cot x tan y sin x cos y
cos x sin y
= sin x cos y + sin x cos y
sin x cos y
= sin x cos y + cos x sin y = sin(x + y) 2
PY
3.5.3. The Tangent Sum and Difference Identities
Recall that tan x is the ratio of sin x over cos x. When we replace x with A + B,
we obtain
sin(A + B)
tan(A + B) = .
O
cos(A + B)
Using the sum identities for sine and cosine, and then dividing the numerator
C
and denominator by cos A cos B, we have
sin A cos B + cos A sin B
tan(A + B) =
cos A cos B sin A sin B
D
sin A cos B cos A sin B
cos A cos B
+ cos A cos B
= cos A cos B sin A sin B
cos A cos B
cos A cos B
E
tan A + tan B
= .
1 tan A tan B
EP
We have just established the tangent sum identity.

In the above identity, if we replace B with B and use the even-odd identity
tan() = tan , we get
tan A + tan(B) tan A tan B

D
tan(A B) = tan[A + (B)] = = .

1 tan A tan(B) 1 + tan A tan B
This is the tangent difference identity.
Tangent Sum and Difference Identities

tan A + tan B
tan(A + B) =
1 tan A tan B
tan A tan B
tan(A B) =
1 + tan A tan B
186
1. Given cos A = 35 , < A < 3
2
7
, and tan B = 24 , B in QI, find: (a) sin(A + B),
(b) cos(A + B), and (c) tan(A + B).
3 4
Solution: cos A = and A in QIII = sin A =
5 5
7 7 24
tan B = and B in QIII = sin B = and cos B =
24 25 25
(a) sin(A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B

4 24 3 7 117
= + =
5 25 5 25 125
PY
(b) cos(A + B) = cos A cos B sin A sin B

3 24 4 7 44
= =
5 25 5 25 125
117
sin(A + B) 117
O
125
(c) tan(A + B) = = 44 =
cos(A + B) 125
44
5
2. Find the exact value of cos .
12
C
5 2 2 2
Solution: cos = cos = cos cos + sin sin
12 3 4 3 4 3 4
D
! ! !
1 2 3 2
= +
2 2 2 2
E

6 2
=
4
EP

3. If A + B = + 2k, k Z, prove that sin A = cos B.
2

Solution: sin A = sin + 2k B
2

= sin + 2k cos B cos + 2k sin B = cos B
D
2 2
4. Find the value of
(tan 10 )(tan 15 )(tan 20 )(tan 15 ) (tan 65 )(tan 70 )(tan 75 )(tan 80 ).
Solution: From the previous item, we know that sin = cos(90 ). We

write each tangent in terms of sine and cosine.
(tan 10 )(tan 15 )(tan 20 )(tan 15 ) (tan 65 )(tan 70 )(tan 75 )(tan 80 )

sin 10 sin 15 sin 20 sin 70 sin 75 sin 80
=
cos 10 cos 15 cos 20 cos 70 cos 75 cos 80
=1
187
5. If A, B and C are the angles of a triangle and

3
(tan A)(tan B)(tan C) = ,
3
find tan A + tan B + tan C.
Solution:
A + B + C = 180 = tan(A + B + C) = tan 180 = 0

tan A + tan(B + C)
= 0 = tan A + tan(B + C) = 0
1 tan A tan(B + C)
tan B + tan C
tan A + =0
PY
1 tan B tan C
tan A tan A tan B tan C + tan B + tan C
=0
1 tan B tan C
= tan A tan A tan B tan C + tan B + tan C = 0

O
3
tan A + tan B + tan C = tan A tan B tan C =
C 3
sin(A + B) tan A + tan B

6. Establish the identity = .
cos(A B) 1 + tan A tan B
Solution:
D
sin(A + B) sin A cos B + cos A sin B
=
cos(A B) cos A cos B + sin A sin B
E
1
sin A cos B + cos A sin B cos A cos B
=
cos A cos B + sin A sin B 1
EP
cos A cos B
sin A cos B cos A sin B
+
= cos A cos B cos A cos B
cos A cos B sin A sin B
+
D
cos A cos B cos A cos B

tan A + tan B
=
1 + tan A tan B

3
1. If 2
< < 2, find the radian measure of if cos = sin 2
3
.
2. For what angle in QIV is sin = cos 4

3
?

3. If A + B = 2
+ k, k Z, prove that tan A = cot B.
188
4. What is the exact value of cot 5

12
?
5. What is the exact value of sin 105 cos 15 ?
6. What is the exact value of tan 1875 ?

7. Let and be acute angles such that cot = 7 and csc = 10. Find
cos( + ).
8
8. Given sin = 17 and sin = 12 , find cos( + ) if both and are in QIV.
9. If 3 sin x = 2, find sin(x ) + sin(x + ).
10. Simplify: cos x + 2 + cos 2 x .

PY
11. Given sin A = 45 , 2 A , and cos B = 45 , B not in QI, find: (a) sin(A B),
(b) cos(A B), and (c) tan(A B). Also, determine the quadrant in which
A B terminate.

O
12. Given csc A = 3, A in QI, and sec B = 2, sin B < 0, find: (a) sin(A B),
(b) cos(A B), and (c) tan(A B). Also, determine the quadrant in which
A B terminate.
4 5
C
13. Given sin = 5
and cos = 13
, find sin( + ) + sin( ).
14. Given sin = 23 , in QII, and cos = 34 , find cos( + ) + cos( ).

D

15. If

A and B are acute angles (in degrees) such that csc A = 17 and csc B =
34
E
3
, what is A + B?
1
16. If tan(x + y) = 3
and tan y = 12 , what is tan x?
EP
tan 9 + tan 23
36
17. Evaluate: .
1 tan 9 tan 23

36
18. Establish the identity:

D
sin(A + B + C) = sin A cos B cos C + cos A sin B cos C

+ cos A cos B sin C sin A sin B sin C.
19. Prove: sin 2 = 2 sin cos .

cot2 1
20. Prove: cot 2 = .
2 cot
189
1. A central angle in a circle of radius 6 cm measures 37.5 . Find: (a) length of
the intercepted arc and (b) the area of the sector.
2. The point (1, 2) lies on the terminal side of the angle in standard position.
Find sin + cos + tan .
3. Given sin A = 1213

, where A is not in QI, and csc B = 53 , where B is not in
QIII, find: (a) cos(A B) and (b) tan(A B).
tan 57 + tan 78
4. Find the exact value of .
1 tan 57 tan 78
PY
cos x tan x + sin x
5. If sin x = a and cos x 0, express in terms of a.
tan x
6. Prove the identity cos6 x + sin6 x = 3 cos4 x 3 cos2 x 1.
O
7. A regular hexagon of side length 1 unit is inscribed in a unit circle such that
two of its vertices are located on the x-axis. Determine the coordinates of the
C
hexagon.
8. Determine the amplitude, period and phase shift of the graph of

x
D
y = 2 sin + 1,
2 3
and sketch its graph over one period. Find the range of the function.
E
EP
D
190
1. The area of a sector of a circle formed by a central angle of 30 is d 3 cm2 .
Find the length of the intercepted arc.
2. The point (8, 6) lies on the terminal side of the angle in standard position.
Find (sin + cos )2 .
8
3. Given sin A = and cos A > 0, evaluate sin A + cos A .
17 2 2
4. Find the exact value of sin 160 cos 35 sin 70 cos 55 .
7
PY
5. Find the exact value of tan .
12
6. Given cos A = 53 , where A is not in QII, and tan B = 24
7
, where B is not in
QI, find: (a) sin(A + B) and (b) cot(A + B).
O
tan2 x
7. Establish the identity = sin x cos x.
tan x + tan3 x
C
1 sin x
8. If sin x cos x = , find .
3 sec x
x
9. Determine the period and phase shift of the graph of y = tan + 2,
D
18 3
and sketch its graph over two periods.
E
EP
D
191
Lesson 3.6. Double-Angle and Half-Angle Identities

(1) derive the double-angle and half-angle identities;
(2) simplify trigonometric expressions using known identities;
(3) prove other trigonometric identities using known identities; and
(4) solve situational problems involving trigonometric identities.
Lesson Outline
PY
(1) The double-angle and half-angle identities for cosine, sine, and tangent
(2) More trigonometric identities
Introduction
O
Trigonometric identities simplify the computations of trigonometric expres-
sions. In this lesson, we continue on establishing more trigonometric identities.
C 1

In particular, we derive the formulas for f (2) and f 2 , where f is the sine,
cosine, or tangent function.
D
3.6.1. Double-Angle Identities
Recall the sum identities for sine and cosine.

E
sin(A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B

EP
cos(A + B) = cos A cos B sin A sin B
When A = B, these identities becomes

sin 2A = sin A cos A + cos A sin A = 2 sin A cos A
D
and
cos 2A = cos A cos A sin A sin A = cos2 A sin2 A.
Double-Angle Identities for Sine and Cosine
sin 2A = 2 sin A cos A cos 2A = cos2 A sin2 A
The double-identity for cosine has other forms. We use the Pythagorean
identity sin2 + cos2 = 1.
cos 2A = cos2 A sin2 A
192
= cos2 A (1 cos2 A)
= 2 cos2 A 1
cos 2A = cos2 A sin2 A

= (1 sin2 A) sin2 A
= 1 2 sin2 A
Other Double-Angle Identities for Cosine
cos 2A = 2 cos2 A 1 cos 2A = 1 2 sin2 A
PY
3
Example 3.6.1. Given sin t = 5
and 2
< t < , find sin 2t and cos 2t.
Solution. We first find cos t using the Pythagorean identity. Since t lies in QII,
O
we have s 2
p
2 3 4
cos t = 1 sin t = 1 = .
5 5
C
sin 2t = 2 sin t cos t cos 2t = 1 2 sin2 t
D
2
3 4 3
=2 =12
5 5 5
24 7
E
= = 2
25 25
EP
In the last example, we may compute cos 2t using one of the other two double-
angle identities for cosine. For the sake of answering the curious minds, we include
the computations here.
cos 2t = cos2 t sin2 t cos 2t = 2 cos2 t 1

D
2 2 2
4 3 4
= =2 1
5 5 5
7 7
= =
25 25
In the three cosine double-angle identities, which formula to use depends on

the convenience, what is given, and what is asked.
Example 3.6.2. Derive an identity for sin 3x in terms of sin x.
193
Solution. We use the sum identity for sine, the double-angle identities for sine
and cosine, and the Pythagorean identity.
sin 3x = sin(2x + x)
= sin 2x cos x + cos 2x sin x
= (2 sin x cos x) cos x + (1 2 sin2 x) sin x
= 2 sin x cos2 x + sin x 2 sin3 x
= 2(sin x)(1 sin2 x) + sin x 2 sin3 x
= 3 sin x 4 sin3 x 2
For the double-angle formula for tangent, we recall the tangent sum identity:
PY
tan A + tan B
tan(A + B) = .
1 tan A tan B
When A = B, we obtain
tan A + tan A 2 tan A
O
tan(A + A) = = .
1 tan A tan A 1 tan2 A
C
Tangent Double-Angle Identity
2 tan A
tan 2A =
1 tan2 A
D
Example 3.6.3. If tan = 13 and sec > 0, find sin 2, cos 2, and tan 2.
E
Solution. We can compute immediately tan 2.

2 13

2 tan 3
EP
tan 2 = 2
= 2 =
1 tan 1 13 4

From the given information, we deduce that lies in QIV. Using one Pythagorean
identity, we compute cos through sec . (We may also use the technique dis-
D
cussed in Lesson 3.2 by solving for x, y, and r.) Then we proceed to find cos 2.
s 2
p
2 1 10
sec = 1 + tan = 1 + =
3 3

1 1 3 10
cos = = =
sec 10 10
3
!2
3 10 4
cos 2 = 2 cos2 1 = 2 1=
10 5
sin 2 3
tan 2 = = sin 2 = tan 2 cos 2 = 2
cos 2 5
194
3.6.2. Half-Angle Identities
Recall two of the three double-angle identities for cosine:

cos 2A = 2 cos2 A 1 and cos 2A = 1 2 sin2 A.
From these identities, we obtain two useful identities expressing sin2 A and cos2 A
in terms of cos 2A as follows:
1 + cos 2A 1 cos 2A
cos2 A = and sin2 A = .
2 2
Some Useful Identities
PY
1 + cos 2A 1 cos 2A
cos2 A = sin2 A =
2 2
A
From these identities, replacing A with 2
, we get
O
A

A 1 + cos 2 1 + cos A
cos2 = 2
=
2 C2 2
and
1 cos 2 A2

A 2 1 cos A
sin = = .
2 2 2
These are the half-angle identities for sine and cosine.
D
Half-Angle Identities for Sine and Cosine
E

2 A 1 + cos A 2 A 1 cos A
cos = sin =
2 2 2 2
EP
Because of the square in the formulas, we get

r r
A 1 + cos A A 1 cos A
cos = and sin = .
2 2 2 2
D
The appropriate signs of cos A2 and sin A2 depend on which quadrant A

2
lies.
Example 3.6.4. Find the exact values of sin 22.5 and cos 22.5 .
Solution. Clearly, 22.5 lies in QI (and so sin 22.5 and cos 22.5 are both posi-
tive), and 22.5 is the half-angle of 45 .

s p
r 2
1 cos 45 1 2 2
sin 22.5 = = 2
=
2 2 2

s p
r 2
1 + cos 45 1 + 2 + 2
cos 22.5 = = 2
= 2
2 2 2
195

tan + sin
2
Example 3.6.5. Prove: cos = .
2 2 tan
Solution.

2 1 + cos
cos =
2 2

1 + cos tan
=
2 tan
tan + cos tan
=
2 tan
sin
tan + cos cos
PY
=
2 tan
tan + sin
= 2
2 tan
We now derive the first version of the half-angle formula for tangent.
O
A sin A2
tan =
2 cos A2
C sin A2 2 sin A2
!
=
cos A2 2 sin A2
2 sin2 2 A

D
=
2 sin A2 cos A2
2 1cos A
E
2
=
sin 2 A2
EP
1 cos A
=
sin A
There is another version of the tangent half-angle formula, and we can derive
it from the first version.
D
A 1 cos A
tan =
2 sin A
1 cos A 1 + cos A
=
sin A 1 + cos A
2
1 cos A
=
(sin A)(1 + cos A)
sin2 A
=
(sin A)(1 + cos A)
sin A
=
1 + cos A
196
Tangent Half-Angle Identities
A 1 cos A A sin A
tan = tan =
2 sin A 2 1 + cos A
sin A2

A A 1 cos A
tan = tan2 =
2 cos A2 2 1 + cos A

Example 3.6.6. Find the exact value of tan 12 .
Solution.
1 cos 6 1 3
2
2
PY
tan = = 1 =2 3
12 sin 6 2
Example 3.6.7. If sin = 25 , cot > 0, and 0 < 2, find sin 2 , cos 2 , and
tan 2 .
O
3
Solution. Since sin < 0 and cot > 0, we conclude the < < 2
. It follows
that
3
2
< <
2 4
,
C
which means that 2 lies in QII.
D
s 2
p
2 2 21
cos = 1 sin = 1 =
5 5
E
v

u
r u 1 21 p
1 cos 50 + 10 21
EP
t 5
sin = = =
2 2 2 10
v

u
r u 1 + 21 p
1 + cos t 5 50 10 21
cos = = =
2 2 2 10
D

1 521
1 cos 5 + 21
tan = = = 2
2 sin 25 2

5
1. If cos = 13 with 0 < < , find sin 2 and cos 2.
197
Solution: In this problem, we use the Pythagorean identity sin2 + cos2 = 1.
5
Because cos = 13 , we must have
25 144
sin2 = 1 cos2 = 1 = .
169 169
Moreover, since 0 < < , we take the square root of both sides of the above
equation to get
12
sin = .
13
Now, using the double-angle identities we get
PY
sin 2 = 2 sin cos and cos 2 = cos2 sin2
= 2 12 5 25
144

13
13 = 169 169
120
= 169 = 119
169
.
O
2. Derive an identity for cos 3x in terms of cos x.
C
Solution: We use the sum identity for cosine, the double-angle identities for
sine and cosine, and the Pythagorean identity.
cos 3x = cos(2x + x)
D
= cos 2x cos x sin 2x sin x
= (2 cos2 x 1) cos x (2 sin x cos x) sin x
E
= 2 cos3 x cos x 2 sin2 x cos x

= 2 cos3 x cos x 2(1 cos2 x) cos x
EP
= 4 cos3 x 3 cos x.
3. Derive the identity for tan 3t in terms of tan t.

Solution: Using the sum identity for tangent, we obtain
D
tan 2t + tan t
tan 3t = tan(2t + t) = .
1 tan 2t tan t
Now, using the tangent double-angle identity, we have
2 tan t
1tan2 t
+ tan t
tan 3t = 2 tan t .
1 1tan 2 t tan t
Upon simplifying the terms on the right side of the equation, we finally obtain
3 tan t tan3 t
tan 3t = .
1 3 tan2 t
198

4. Find the exact value of sin 12 .
1cos y

Solution: To find the value of sin 12 , we use the identity sin2 21 y = 2
.
With y = 6 , we obtain
1 cos

3

1 1 2 3
sin2 = sin2 = 6
= 2
= .
12 2 6 2 2 4

Now, since 0 < 12
< , sin 12 must be positive, and so
p
2 3
sin = .
12 2
PY

2sec 1
5. Prove: sin = .
2 2 sec
Solution:

2 1 cos
sin =
O
2 2

1 cos sec
=
2 sec
=
C
sec cos sec
2 sec
sec cos cos1
=
D
2 sec
sec 1
= .
2 sec
E
6. Use the half-angle identity to find the exact value of tan 75 .

EP

1
1cos 150 1+ 23
Solution: tan 75 = tan 2 150 = sin 150 = 1 = 2 + 3.
2
7. A ball is thrown following a projectile motion. It is known that the horizontal

distance (range) the ball can travel is given by
D
v02
R= sin 2,
g
where R is the range (in feet), v0 is the initial speed (in ft/s), is the angle
of elevation the ball is thrown, and g = 32 f t/s2 is the acceleration due to
gravity.
(a) Express the new range in terms of the original range when an angle
(0 < 45 ) is doubled?
(b) If a ball travels a horizontaldistance of 20 ft when kicked at an angle
of with initial speed of 20 2 ft/s, find the horizontal distance it can
travel when you double . Hint: Use the result of item (a)
199
Solution:
v02
(a) Let R = g
sin 2 be the original range. When the angle is doubled, the
v2
new range will become R0 = g0 sin 4. Now, we solve sin 4 in terms of
the original range.
Note that sin 2 = gR
v02
. So, as a consequence of the fundamental identity,
we obtain s p
g 2 R2 v04 g 2 R2
cos 2 = 1 4 = .
v0 v02
Since sin 4 = 2 sin 2 cos 2, it follows that
PY
p ! p
2 2 4
0 v0 v 0 gR v 0 g 2 R2 2R v04 g 2 R2
R = sin 4 = 2 2 = .
g g v0 v02 v02
(b) Using the result in (a), if is doubled, then the new range is given by
O
p
0 2R v04 g 2 R2 40 640000 409600
R = = = 24.
v02 800
C
Therefore, the new horizontal distance is 24 ft.
D
E
1. Let be an angle in the first quadrant and sin = 13 . Find

EP
(a) sin 2 (c) tan 2 (e) csc 2

(b) cos 2 (d) sec 2 (f) cot 2
2. Find the approximate value of csc 46 and sec 46 , given that sin 23 0.3907.
D
3. If cos t = 43 , what is cos 2t?
4. Derive a formula for sin 4x in terms of sin x and cos x.
5. Let 4 < x < 0. Given that tan 2x = 2, solve for tan x.
6. Obtain an identity for tan 4 in terms of tan .
7. Solve for the exact value of cot 4 if tan = 12 .
8. Use half-angle identities to find the exact value of (a) sin2 15 and (b) cos2 15 .
9. Use half-angle identities to find the exact value of (a) sin2 5

8
and (b) cos2 5
8
.
200
10. Find the exact value of cos 8 .
tan 12 y 1 sin y cos y 1

11. Prove that 1 = .
tan 2 y + 1 sin y + cos y + 1
12. Verify that the following equation is an identity: cot 21 t = cot t(sec t + 1).
13. Use half-angle identities to find the exact value of (a) cos 105 and (b) tan 22.5 .
PY
Lesson 3.7. Inverse Trigonometric Functions
O
(1) graph the six basic inverse trigonometric functions;
C
(2) illustrate the domain and range of the inverse trigonometric functions;
(3) evaluate inverse trigonometric expressions; and
(4) solve situational problems involving inverse trigonometric functions.
D
Lesson Outline
E
(1) Definitions of the six inverse trigonometric functions

(2) Graphs of inverse trigonometric functions
EP
(3) Domain and range of inverse trigonometric functions

(4) Evaluation of inverse trigonometric expressions
Introduction
D
In the previous lessons on functions (algebraic and trigonometric), we com-

puted for the value of a function at a number in its domain. Now, given a value
in the range of the function, we reverse this process by finding a number in the
domain whose function value is the given one. Observe that, in this process,
the function involved may or may not give a unique number in the domain. For
example, each of the functions f (x) = x2 and g(x) = cos x do not give a unique
number in their respective domains for some values of each function. Given
f (x) = 1, the function gives x = 1. If g(x) = 1, then x = 2k, where k is an
integer. Because of this possibility, in order for the reverse process to produce a
function, we restrict this process to one-to-one functions or at least restrict the
domain of a non-one-to-one function to make it one-to-one so that the process
201
works. Loosely speaking, a function that reverses what a given function f does
is called its inverse function, and is usually denoted by f 1 .
More formally, two functions f and g are inverse functions if
g(f (x)) = x for any x in the domain of f ,
and
f (g(x)) = x for any x in the domain of g.
We denote the inverse function of a function f by f 1 . The graphs of a function
and its inverse function are symmetric with respect to the line y = x.
In this lesson, we first restrict the domain of each trigonometric function
because each of them is not one-to-one. We then define each respective inverse
PY
function and evaluate the values of each inverse trigonometric function.
3.7.1. Inverse Sine Function
O
All the trigonometric functions that we consider are periodic over their entire
domains. This means that all trigonometric functions are not one-to-one if we
consider their whole domains, which implies that they have no inverses over those
C
sets. But there is a way to make each of the trigonometric functions one-to-one.
This is done by restricting their respective domains. The restrictions will give us
well-defined inverse trigonometric functions.
D
The domain of the sine function is the set R of real numbers, and its range is
the closed interval [1, 1]. As observed in the previous lessons, the sine function
E
is not one-to-one, and the first step is to restrict its domain (by agreeing what the
convention is) with the following conditions: (1) the sine function is one-to-one
in that restricted domain, and (2) the range remains the same.
EP
The inverse of the (restricted) sine function

f (x)
= sin x, where the
domain is restricted to the closed interval 2 , 2 , is called the inverse
sine function or arcsine function, denoted by f 1 (x) = sin1 x or
D
f 1 (x) = arcsin x. Here, the domain of f 1 (x) = arcsin x is [1, 1],
and its range is 2 , 2 . Thus,

y = sin1 x or y = arcsin x
if and only if
sin y = x,
where 1 x 1 and 2 y 2 .
Throughout the lesson, we interchangeably use sin1 x and arcsin x to mean

the inverse sine function.
202
Example 3.7.1. Find the exact value of each expression.
(1) sin1 21 (3) arcsin 0
(4) sin1 12

(2) arcsin(1)
Solution. (1) Let = sin1 21 . This is equivalent to sin = 12 . This

means that

we are looking for the number in the closed interval 2 , 2 whose sine is
1
2
. We get = 6 . Thus, we have sin1 21 = 6 .
(2) arcsin(1) = 2 because sin 2 = 1 and 2 2 , 2 .

(3) arcsin 0 = 0
PY
(4) sin1 12 = 6

in the last example, as long as 1 x1

As emphasized 1, sin1 x is that
number y 2 , 2 such that sin y = x. If |x| > 1, then sin x is not defined in
R.
O
We can sometimes find the exact value of sin1 x (that is, we can find a value
in terms of ), but if no such special value exists, then we leave it in the form
sin1 x. For example, as shown above, sin1 12 is equal to 6 . However, as studied
C
in Lesson 3.2, no special number satisfies sin = 23 , so we leave sin1 32 as is.

D
(1) sin sin1 12 (3) arcsin(sin )

(4) sin sin1 12

(2) arcsin sin 3
E
Solution. (1) sin sin1 12 = sin 6 = 1

2

EP
(2) arcsin sin 3 = arcsin 23 = 3

(3) arcsin(sin ) = arcsin 0 = 0
(4) sin sin1 12 = sin 6 = 12 2

D
From the last example, we have the following observations:
1. sin(arcsin x) = x for any x [1, 1]; and
2. arcsin(sin ) = if and only if 2 , 2 , and if 6 2 , 2 , then

arcsin(sin ) = , where 2 , 2 such that sin = sin .
To sketch the graph of y = sin1 x, Table 3.32 presents the tables of values
for y = sin x and y = sin1 x. Recall that the graphs of y = sin x and y = sin1 x
are symmetric with respect to the line y = x. This means that if a point (a, b) is
on y = sin x, then (b, a) is on y = sin1 x.
203
x 2 3 4 6 0
6

4

3

2
y = sin x
3 2 2 3
y 1 2
2
12 0 1
2 2 2
1

3 2 2 3
x 1 2
2
21 0 1
2 2 2
1
y = sin1 x
y 2 3 4 6 0
6

4

3

2
Table 3.32
The graph (solid thick curve) of the restricted sine function y = sin x is shown
PY
in Figure 3.33(a), while the graph of inverse sine function y = arcsin x is shown
in Figure 3.33(b).
O
C
E D
EP
(a) y = sin x (b) y = sin1 x

D
Figure 3.33
Example 3.7.3. Sketch the graph of y = sin1 (x + 1).
Solution 1. In this solution, we use translation of graphs.

Because y = sin1 (x + 1) is equivalent to y = sin1 [x (1)], the graph of
y = sin1 (x + 1) is 1-unit to the left of y = sin1 x. The graph below shows
y = sin1 (x + 1) (solid line) and y = sin1 x (dashed line).
204
PY
Solution 2. In this solution, we graph first the corresponding sine function, and
then use the symmetry with respect to y = x to graph the inverse function.
y = sin1 (x + 1) sin y = x + 1 x = sin y 1
O
The graph below shows the process of graphing of y = sin1 (x + 1) from y =
sin x 1 with 2 x 2 , and then reflecting it with respect to y = x.
C
E D
EP
D
3.7.2. Inverse Cosine Function
The development of the other inverse trigonometric functions is similar to that

of the inverse sine function.
205
y = cos1 x or y = arccos x
means
cos y = x,
where 1 x 1 and 0 y .
The graph (solid thick curve) of the restricted cosine function y = cos x is
shown in Figure 3.34(a), while the graph of inverse cosine function y = arccos x
is shown in Figure 3.34(b).
PY
O
C
D
(a) y = cos x (b) y = cos1 x
E
Figure 3.34
EP

(1) cos1 0 (4) cos1 cos 3
4

(2) arccos 23 (5) arccos cos 7

6
D

(3) cos cos1 23 (6) sin cos1 2
2
Solution. (1) cos1 0 =

2
because cos 2 = 0 and
2
[0, ].

(2) arccos 23 = 5 6

(3) cos cos1 23 = 23 because 23 [1, 1]
(4) cos1 cos 3 3 3

4
= 4
because 4
[0, ].
206

(5) arccos cos 7 23 = 5

6
= arccos 6

(6) sin cos1 2
2
= 2
2
2
Example 3.7.5. Simplify: sin arcsin 23 + arccos 21 .

Solution. We know that arccos 12 = 3 . Using the Sine Sum Identity, we have
sin arcsin 32 + arccos 12

= sin arcsin 23 + 3

= sin arcsin 23 cos 3 + cos arcsin 23 sin 3

PY

= 23 21 + cos arcsin 23 23

= 13 + 23 cos arcsin 23 .

We compute cos arcsin 23 . Let = arcsin 23 . By definition, sin = 23 , where

O
lies in QI. Using the Pythagorean identity, we have
p
cos arcsin 32 = cos = 1 sin2 = 35 .
C
Going back to the original computations above, we have

sin arcsin 32 + arccos 12 = 13 + 23 cos arcsin 32

D

1 3 5
= 3
+ 2
3

= 2+ 15
. 2
E
Example 3.7.6. Simplify: sin 2 cos1 45

.
EP
Solution. Let = cos1 45 . Then cos = 54 . Because cos < 0 and range

of inverse cosine function is [0, ], we know that must be within the interval

, . Using the Pythagorean Identity, we get sin = 53 .

2
Using the Sine Double-Angle Identity, we have

D
sin 2 cos1 54 = sin 2

= 2 sin cos
= 2 35 54

= 24
25
. 2
Example 3.7.7. Sketch the graph of y = 41 cos1 (2x).
Solution.
1 1
y= cos1 (2x) 4y = cos1 (2x) x = cos(4y)
4 2
207
We graph first y = 12 cos(4x). The domain of this graph comes from the restriction
of cosine as follows:

0 4x = 0 x .
4
Then reflect this graph with respect to y = x, and we finally obtain the graph of
y = 41 cos1 (2x) (solid line).
PY
O
In the last example, we may also use the following technique. In graphing
C
y = 14 cos1 (2x), the horizontal length of cos1 x is reduced to half, while the
vertical height is reduced to quarter. This comparison technique is shown in
the graph below with the graph of y = cos1 x in dashed line and the graph of
y = 41 cos1 (2x) in solid line.
E D
EP
D
3.7.3. Inverse Tangent Function and the Remaining Inverse

Trigonometric Functions
The inverse tangent function is similarly defined as inverse sine and inverse cosine
functions.
208
y = tan1 x or y = arctan x
means
tan y = x,
where x R and 2 < y < 2 .
The graph (solid thick curve) of the restricted function y = tan x is shown
in Figure 3.35(a), while the graph of inverse function y = arctan x is shown in
Figure 3.35(b).
PY
O
C
D
(a) y = tan x (b) y = tan1 x
E
Figure 3.35
EP

(1) tan1 1 (4) tan1 tan 6

(5) tan1 tan 7

(2) arctan 3 6
(3) tan tan1 52 (6) arctan tan 19

D
Solution. Note the range of arctan is the open interval 2 , 2 .

(1) tan1 1 =
4

(2) arctan 3 = 3
(3) tan tan1 52 = 25

(4) tan1 tan 6 = 6 because 6 2 , 2 .

209
7
6 2 , 2 . Use the idea of reference angle, we know that

(5) Here, note that 6
tan 7
6
= tan 6 .

1 7
tan tan = tan1 tan =
6 6 6
(6) Here, we cannot use the idea of reference angle, but the idea can help in a
way. The number (or angle) 19
6
is in QII, wherein tangent is negative, and
its reference angle is 6 .

19
arctan tan = arctan tan
6 6
PY

= 2
6
Example 3.7.9. Findthe exact value of each expression.
(1) sin 2 tan1 38 (2) tan sin1 53 tan1 14

O
Solution. (1) Let = tan1 38 . Then tan = 83 . Following the notations in

Lesson 3.2 and the definition of inverse tangent

C p function, we
know that lies
in QIV, and x = 3 and y = 8. We get r = 32 + (8)2 = 73.
Applying the Sine Double-Angle Identity (page 192) gives

1 8
D
sin 2 tan = sin 2
3
= 2 sin cos
E
y x
=2
r r
8 3
EP
= 2
73 73
48
= .
73
D
(2) Using the Tangent Difference Identity, we obtain

1 3 1 1
tan sin tan
5 4
1 3
tan sin 5 tan tan1 41

=
1 + tan sin1 35 tan tan1 41

tan sin1 53 14

= .
1 + tan sin1 35 41
We are left to compute tan sin1 35 . We proceed as in (1) above. Let

= sin1 35 . Then sin = 53 . From the definition of inverse sine function and
210
the notations used
in Lesson 3.2, we know that lies in QI, and y = 3 and
r = 5. We get x = 52 32 = 4, so that tan = xy = 34 .
1 3
1
4

3 1 tan sin
tan sin1 tan1 = 5
1 3
1 + tan sin 5 14

5 4
3
41
4
=
1 + 34 14
8
= 2
19
? Example 3.7.10. A student is
PY
viewing a painting in a museum.
Standing 6 ft from the painting,
the eye level of the student is 5 ft
above the ground. If the paint-
O
ing is 10 ft tall, and its base is
4 ft above the ground, find the
viewing angle subtended by the
painting at the eyes of the stu-
C
dent.
D
Solution. Let be the viewing angle, and let = + as shown below.
We observe that
E
1 9
tan = and tan = .
6 6
EP
Using the Tangent Sum Identity, we have

tan + tan
tan = tan( + ) =
1 tan tan
1
+9
D
= 6 169
1 6 6
20
= .
9
Using a calculator, the viewing angle is = tan1 20
9
65.8 . 2
We now define the remaining inverse trigonometric functions.
211
Define

tan1 x.
cot1 x =
2
It follows that the domain of y = cot1 x is R and its range is (0, ).
y = sec1 x or y = arcsec x
means
sec y = x,

, 3

where |x| 1 and y 0, 2 2
.
PY
Define

sec1 x.
csc1 x =
2
O
This means that thedomainof y = csc1 x is (, 1] [1, ) and
its range is , 2 0, 2 . C
The graphs of these last three inverse trigonometric functions are shown in
Figures 3.36, 3.37, and 3.38, respectively.
E D
EP
D
(a) y = cot x (b) y = cot1 x
Figure 3.36
212
PY
(a) y = sec x (b) y = sec1 x
Figure 3.37
O
C
E D
EP
(a) y = csc x (b) y = csc1 x
Figure 3.38
D
Observe that the process in getting the value of an inverse function is the
same to all inverse functions. That is, y = f 1 (x) is the same as f (y) = x. We
need to remember the range of each inverse trigonometric function. Table 3.39
summarizes all the information about the six inverse trigonometric functions.
213
Function Domain Range Graph
Figure
sin1 x 2 , 2

[1, 1]
3.33(b)
Figure
cos1 x [1, 1] [0, ]
3.34(b)
Figure
tan1 x 2 , 2

R
3.35(b)
Figure
cot1 x R (0, )
3.36(b)
PY
Figure
sec1 x
3
{x : |x| 1} 0, 2 , 2
3.37(b)
Figure
csc1 x , 2 0, 2

{x : |x| 1}
3.38(b)
O
Table 3.39
C

(1) sec1 (2)
(3) cot 1
3
D

1 2 3 1
3 32 csc1 2 3 3

(2) csc (4) sin sec
E
Solution. (1) sec1 (2) = 4

because sec 4 4
, 3

3 3
= 2 and 3 2

(2) csc1 2 3 3 = 2
EP
3

(3) cot1 3 = 5
6

1 2 3 1
= 2 3

(4) From (2), we know that csc 3 3
. Let = sec 2
. Then
D
sec = 32 . From defined range of inverse secant function and the notations
in Lesson
p 3.2, lies in QIII,
and r = 3 and x = 2. Solving for y, we get
y = 32 (2)2 = 5. It follows that sin = 35 and cos = 23 .
We now use the Sine Sum Identity.
!!
1 3 2 3
sin sec csc1
2 3

2
= sin
3

2
= sin +
3
214
2 2
= sin cos + cos sin
3 3
! !
5 1 2 3
= +
3 2 3 2

52 3
= 2
6
PY
1. Find the exact values of the following, if they exist.

(a) sin1 22 (b) arcsin 21 (c) sin1 2

Solution: Note that the range of f (x) = sin1 x is [ 2 , 2 ]. Thus, if we let
O
y = sin1 x, then we are looking for y [ 2 , 2 ] such that sin y = x. Hence,

(a) sin1 2
= 4 ,
2
(b) arcsin 12 = 6 , and

C
(c) sin1 2 is undefined because sin y 1.
D
2. Find the exact value of each expression.

(b) cos arcsin 12 (c) sin1 sin 11

(a) sin sin1 22
E
Solution:
EP

(a) sin sin1 22 = sin( 4 ) = 22

(b) cos arcsin 12 = cos( 6 ) = 23

(c) sin1 sin 11 = sin1 (1) = 2

D
3. Answer the following.
(a) What is the domain of y = sin1 2x?

(b) What is the range of y = sin1 2x?
(c) What is the xintercept of y = sin1 2x?
Solution:
(a) Consider the function f () = sin1 . The domain of sin1 is [1, 1].
So, = 2x [1, 1]. Therefore, the domain of sin1 2x is [1/2, 1/2].
215
(b) [/2, /2]
(c) (0, 0)
4. From the concept of projectile motion, if an object is directed at an angle

v2
(with [0, /2]), then the range will be R = g0 sin 2 (in feet) where v0 (in
f t/s) is the initial speed and g = 32 f t/s2 is the acceleration due to gravity.
At what angle shall the object be directed so that the range will be 100 f t,
given that the initial speed is v0 = 80 f t/s?
Solution: From the formula of the range, we get
802 1
100 = sin 2 = = sin 2
PY
32 2
Since must be from 0 to 2 (i.e. 0 2 ), this is equivalent to finding 2
such that 2 = sin1 12 . Hence,

O
2 = = = .
6 12
Therefore, the object must be directed at an angle of
12
rad (or 15 ), to have
a projectile range of 100 f t.
C

D
(a) cos1 2
2
(c) arccos(cos )
1 1

(b) cos cos 2 (d) arccos
E
Solution:
EP

(a) cos1 2
2
= 4
cos1 12 = cos 2 = 21

(b) cos 3
(c) arccos(cos ) = arccos(1) =
D
(d) Let y = arccos . Since cos y 1, we have y is undefined because > 3.

1 3 1 1
6. Simplify: (a) cos cos 2
cos 3

Solution: We know that cos1 23 = 6 . Let = cos1 13 . Which is equivalent
to cos = 31 with 0 . Using the Cosine Difference Identity, we have
!
3 1
cos cos1 cos1 = cos = cos cos + sin sin
2 3 6 6 6

3 1 1
= + sin .
2 3 2
216
Now, we solve for sin using the Pythagorean Identity which gives
sin2 = 1 (1/3)2 = 1 (1/9) = 8/9.

2 2
Thus, sin = because [0, ]. Finally, we obtain
3
!
1 3 1 1 3 1 1 2 2
cos cos cos = +
2 3 2 3 2 3

3 2 2
= +
6 6
3+2 2
= .
6
PY
7. Simplify: (a) cos 2 cos1 52 ; (b) sin cos1 25

Solution: Let = cos1 52 . Which is equivalent to cos = 25 with 0

. Using the Double-Angle Identity for Cosine and one of the Fundamental
O
Idenity, we have
2
1 2 2 2 8 17
cos 2 cos = cos(2) = 2 cos 1 = 2 1= 1=
5
C 5 25 25
and

r
2 4 21
sin cos1
D
= sin = 1 cos2 = 1 = .
5 25 5
Here, sin 0 because [0, ].
E
8. Graph: y = 1 + cos1 x
EP
Solution: The graph can be obtained by translating the graph of the inverse
cosine function one unit upward.
D
217
9. Find the exact value of each expression.
(a) arctan(tan 4
3
) (b) tan(tan1 54 )
Solution:

(a) arctan(tan 4
3
) = arctan 3 = /3
(b) tan(tan1 45 ) = 4
5
10. Find the exact value of tan(tan1 76 + tan1 12 ).
PY
Solution:
tan(tan1 76 ) + tan(tan1 12 )

1 7 1 1
tan tan + tan =
6 2 1 tan(tan1 76 ) tan(tan1 12 )
7
+ 12
6
O
=
1 76 12
C =4

D

(a) sec1 2 (c) cot1 33 (e) cos(arccsc1 2)
(b) csc1 1 (d) arcsec1 (cot( 4 )) (f) arccot1 (sin 20 )
E
Solution:
EP

(a) sec1 2=
4
(b) csc1 1 =
2

(c) cot1 3
3
=
3
D
(d) arcsec(cot( 4 )) = arcsec(1) =

3
(e) cos(arccsc(2)) = cos 6 = 2

(f) arccot(sin 20
3
) = arccot 23 . Let = arccot 23 . Then,

3 2
cot = = tan =
2 3
2
= = tan1 ( 0.8571).
3
Here, we needed to use a calculator to solve for the approximate value,
since 23 is not a special value for tangent function.
218
1. Find the exact value of the following.

(a) sin[sin1 (1/2)] (e) cos[arccos( 2)]

(b) cos[cos1 ( 2/2)]
(f) tan[arcsin(1/4)]
(c) tan[tan1 ( 3)]

(d) sin[arctan( 3)] (g) cos[sin1 ( 3/2)]
PY
(a) sin1 [sin(25/6)] (c) tan1 [tan(1)] (e) cos1 [sec(23)]
(b) arccos[cos(23/4)] (d) arcsin[cos(13/4)] (f) arctan[sin(/12)]
3. Solve the exact value of the following.
O
(a) sin[2 cos1 (4/5)]
(b) cos[2 sin1 (5/13)]
(c) sin(sin1 (3/5) + cos1 (5/13))
C
(d) cos[sin1 (1/2) cos1 (8/17)]
D
4. Consider the function f (x) = tan1 (x + 1). Do the following.
(a) Find the domain of f .

E
(b) Find the range of f .

EP
(c) Find the x and yintercept of f , if there are any.

(d) Graph f .
5. Evaluate and simplify the following, if they exist.

D
(a) arcsec( 2) (d) [sec1 (1)] [cos1 (1)]

(b) arccsc(2) (e) 2 cot1 3 + 3 csc1 2

(c) arccot 3 (f) csc1 0
6. Evaluate and simplify the following, if they exist.
cos(sec1 3 + tan1 2)
1
2 sin (1/2)
(a) (c) cos 2
cos(tan1 2)
(b) tan(2 arcsin(1/6)) (d) arcsec(sin(100/3))
219
7. A trough is in the shape of an inverted triangular prism whose cross section
has the shape of an inverted isoscelestriangle (see Figure 3.40). If the length
base of the cross section is 2 3 m. and the length of the trough is
of the
100 3 m., find the size of the vertex angle so that the volume is 900 m3 .
Hint: V = bhl/2.
PY
OFigure 3.40
C
D
4
E
Lesson 3.8. Trigonometric Equations

EP

(1) solve trigonometric equations; and
D
(2) solve situational problems involving trigonometric equations.
Lesson Outline
(1) Definition of a trigonometric equation
(2) Solution to a trigonometric equation
(3) Techniques of solving a trigonometric equation
Introduction
We have studied equations in Lesson 3.4. We differentiated an identity from
a conditional equation. Recall that an identity is an equation that is true for all
220
values of the variable in the domain of the equation, while a conditional equation
is an equation that is not an identity.
In this lesson, we mostly study conditional trigonometric equations. Though
not explicitly, we have started it in the preceding lesson. For example, the equa-
tion
sin x = 12 has the unique solution x = sin1 12 = 6 in the closed interval
2 , 2 . However, if we consider the entire domain (not the restricted domain)

of the sine function, which is the set R of real numbers, there are solutions (other
than 6 ) of the equation sin x = 12 . This current lesson explores the techniques of
solving (conditional) trigonometric equations.
We divide the lesson into two groups of equations: the ones using a basic way
of solving, and those using more advanced techniques.
PY
3.8.1. Solutions of a Trigonometric Equation
Any equation that involves trigonometric expressions is called a trigonometric
O
equation. Recall that a solution or a root of an equation is a number in the domain
of the equation that, when substituted to the variable, makes the equation true.
The set of all solutions of an equation is called the solution set of the equation.
C
Technically, the basic method to show that a particular number is a solution
of an equation is to substitute the number to the variable and see if the equation
becomes true. However, we may use our knowledge gained from the previous
D
lessons to do a quicker verification process by not doing the manual substitution
and checking. We use this technique in the example.
E
Example 3.8.1. Which numbers in the set 0, 6 , 4 , 3 , 2 , 2 , 3 , 5

3 4 6
, , 2 are
solutions to the following equations?
EP
(1) sin x = 12 (7) cos2 x = cos 2x + sin2 x

(2) tan x = 1 (8) sin x + cos 2x = 0

(3) 3 sec x = 2 3 (9) 2 sin x + tan x 2 cos x = 2

(4) 3| cot x| = 1 (10) sin2 x + cos2 x = 2
D
(5) sec2 x tan2 x = 1 (11) sin 2x = sin x

(6) sin x + cos x = 0 (12) 2 tan x + 4 sin x = 2 + sec x
Solution. Note that the choices (except 2) are numbers within the interval [0, ].
To quickly determine which numbers among the choices are solutions to a par-
ticular equation, we use some distinctive properties of the possible solutions.
(1) The sine function is positive on (0, ). From Lesson 3.2, we recall that 6 is
an obvious solution. We may imagine the graph of y = sin x. We may also
use the idea of reference angle. Thus, among the choices, only 6 and 5
6
are
1
the only solutions of sin x = 2 .
221
(2) Since tan x = 1 > 0, any solution of the equation among the choices must

be in the interval 0, 2 (that is, in QI). Again, among the choices, the only
solution to tan x = 1 is 4 .

(3) Here, the given equation is equivalent to sec x = 2 3 3 . Among the choices,

the only solution of the equation 3 sec x = 2 3 is 56
.
(4) Eliminating

the absolute

value sign, the given equation is equivalent tocot x =
3
or cot x = 3 . Among the choices, the only solution of cot x = 33 is 3 ,
3
3
while the other equation has 2 3
. Thus, the only solutions of 3| cot x| = 1
from the given set are 3 and 23
.
PY
(5) The given equation is one of the Pythagorean Identities (page 175). It means
that all numbers in the domain of the equation are solutions. The domain
of the equation is R \ {x : cos x = 0}. Thus, all except 2 are solutions of
sec2 x tan2 x = 1.
O
(6) For the sum of sin x and cos x to be 0, they must have equal absolute values
but different signs. Among the choices, only 3
4
satisfies these properties, and
it is the only solution of sin x + cos x = 0.
C
(7) This equations is one of the Double-Angle Identities for Cosine. This means
that all numbers in the domain of the equation are its solutions. Because the
domain of the given equation is R, all numbers in the given set are solutions
D
of cos2 x = cos 2x + sin2 x.
(8) We substitute each number in the choices to the expression on the left-side
E
of the equation, and select those numbers that give resulting values equal to
1.
EP
x = 0: sin 0 + cos 2(0) = 0 + 1 = 1

x = 6 : sin 6 + cos 2( 6 ) = 1
2
+ 12 = 1

2 2
x = 4 : sin 4 + cos 2( 4 ) = 2
+ 0 = 2
D

3 31
x = 3 : sin 3 + cos 2( 3 ) = 2
1
2
= 2
x = 2 : sin 2 + cos 2( 2 ) = 1 1 = 0

2 3 31
x= 3
: sin 2
3
+ cos 2( 2
3
)= 2
1
2
= 2

3 2 2
x= 4
: sin 3
4
+ cos 2( 3
4
)= 2
+0= 2
5
x= 6
: sin 5
6
+ cos 2( 5
6
)= 1
2
+ 12 = 1
x = : sin + cos 2 = 0 + 1 = 1
x = 2: sin 2 + cos 2(2) = 0 + 1 = 1
222
From these values, the only solution of sin x + cos 2x = 0 among the choices
is 2 .
(9) We again substitute the numbers in the given set one by one, and see which
resulting values are equal to 1.
x = 0: 2 sin 0 + tan 0 2 cos 0 = 2

32 3
x = 6 : 2 sin 6 + tan 6 2 cos 6 = 3
x = 4 : 2 sin 4 + tan 4 2 cos 4 = 1

x = 3 : 2 sin 3 + tan 3 2 cos 3 = 2 3 1
x = 2 : Since tan 2 is undefined, this value of x cannot be a solution of the
PY
equation.
2
x= 3
2 sin 2
: 3
+ tan 2
3
2 cos 2
3
=1

x = 3
4
: 2 sin 3
4
+ tan 3
4
2 cos 3
4
=2 21

O
5 3+2 3
x= 6
: 2 sin 5
6
+ tan 5
6
2 cos 5
6
= 3
x = : 2 sin + tan 2 cos = 2 C
x = 2: 2 sin 2 + tan 2 2 cos 2 = 2
Thus, the only solution of 2 sin x + tan x 2 cos x = 2 from the given set is .
D
(10) This equation has no solution because one of the Pythagorean Identities says
sin2 x + cos2 x = 1.
E
(11) We substitute each number in the given set to the expression of each side of
the equation, and see which resulting values are equal.
EP
x = 0: sin 2(0) = 0; sin 0 = 0

3
x = 6 : sin 2( 6 ) = 2
; sin 6 = 1
2

2
x = 4 : sin 2( 4 ) = 1; sin 4 = 2

D
3 3
x = 3 : sin 2( 3 ) = 2
; sin 3 = 2
x = 2 : sin 2( 2 ) = 0; sin 2 = 1

3 2
x= 4
: sin 2( 3
4
) = 1; sin 3
4
= 2

5 3
x= 6
: sin 2( 5
6
)= 2
; sin 3 = 1
2
x = : sin 2 = 0; sin = 0
x = 2: sin 2(2) = 0; sin 2 = 0
Thus, among the numbers in the given set, the solutions of sin 2x = sin x are
0, 3 , , and 2.
223
(12) We employ the same technique used in the previous item.
x=0: 2 tan 0 + 4 sin 0 = 0

2 + sec 0 = 3

2 3+6
x= 6
: 2 tan 6 + 4 sin 6 = 3

2 3+6
2 + sec 6 = 3

x= 4
: 2 tan 4 + 4 sin 4 = 2 2 + 2

2 + sec 4 = 2 + 2

x= 3
: 2 tan 3 + 4 sin 3 = 4 3
PY
2 + sec 3 = 4

x= 2
: Both tan 2 and sec 2 are undefined.
2
x= 3
: 2 tan 2
3
+ 4 sin 2
3
=0
O
2 + sec 2
3
=0
3

x= : 2 tan 3 + 4 sin 3 =2 22
4 4
2 + sec 3
4
= 2
4

2
C

5 62 3
x= 6
: 2 tan 5
6
+ 4 sin 5
6
= 3

D
62 3
2 + sec 5
6
= 3
x=: 2 tan + 4 sin = 0

E
2 + sec = 1
EP
x = 2 : 2 tan 2 + 4 sin 2 = 0
2 + sec 2 = 3
After checking the equal values, the solutions of 2 tan x + 4 sin x = 2 + sec x
among the given choices are 6 , 2 , and 5 . 2
D
3 6
3.8.2. Equations with One Term
From the preceding discussion, you may observe that there may be more solutions
of a given equation outside the given set. We now find all solutions of a given
equation.
We will start with a group of equations having straightforward techniques
in finding their solutions. These simple techniques involve at least one of the
following ideas:
224
(1) equivalent equations (that is, equations that have the same solutions as the
original equation);
(2) periodicity of the trigonometric function involved;
(3) inverse trigonometric function;
(4) values of the trigonometric function involved on the interval [0, ] or [0, 2]
(depending on the periodicity of the function); and
(5) Zero-Factor Law: ab = 0 if and only if a = 0 or b = 0.
To solve an equation means to find all solutions of the equation. Here,
PY
unless stated as angles measured in degrees, we mean solutions of the equation
that are real numbers (or equivalently, angles measured in radians).
Example 3.8.2. Solve the equation 2 cos x 1 = 0.
O
Solution. The given equation is equivalent to
1
cos x = .
C 2
On the interval [0, 2], there are only two solutions of the last equation, and these
are x = 3 (this is in QI) and x = 53
(in QIV).
D
Because the period of cosine function is 2, the complete solutions of the
equation are x = 3 + k(2) and x = 5
3
+ k(2) for all integers k. 2
E
In the preceding example, by saying that the complete solutions are x =

3
+ k(2) and x = 5 3
+ k(2) for all integers k, we mean that any integral
EP
value of k will produce a solution to the given equation. For example, when
k = 3, x = 3 + 3(2) = 19 3
is a solution of the equation. When k = 2,
5 7
x = 3 + (2)(2) = 3 is another solution of 2 cos x 1 = 0. The family of
solutions x = 3 + k(2) can be equivalently enumerated as x = 193
+ 2k, while
the family x = 5 + k(2) can also be stated as x = 7
+ 2k.
D
3 3
Example 3.8.3. Solve: (1 + cos )(tan 1) = 0.
Solution. By the Zero-Factor Law, the given equation is equivalent to
1 + cos = 0 or tan 1 = 0
cos = 1 tan = 1

= + 2k, k Z = 4
+ k, k Z.

Therefore, the solutions of the equation are = + 2k and = 4
+ k for all
k Z. 2
225
Example 3.8.4. Find all values of x in the interval [2, 2] that satisfy the
equation (sin x 1)(sin x + 1) = 0.
Solution.
sin x 1 = 0 or sin x + 1 = 0
sin x = 1 sin x = 1
3 3
x= 2
or 2
x= 2
or 2
Solutions:
2
, 3
2
, 3
2
, 2 2
Example 3.8.5. Solve: cos x = 0.1.
PY
Solution. There is no special number whose cosine is 0.1. However, because
0.1 [1, 1], there is a number whose cosine is 0.1. In fact, in any one-period
interval, with cos x = 0.1 > 0, we expect two solutions: one in QI and another in
QIV. We use the inverse cosine function.
O
From Lesson 3.7, one particular solution of cos x = 0.1 in QI is x = cos1 0.1.
We can use this solution to get a particular solution in QIV, and this is x =
C
2 cos1 0.1, which is equivalent to x = cos1 0.1.
From the above particular solutions, we can produce all solutions of cos x =
0.1, and these are x = cos1 0.1+2k and x = cos1 0.1+2k for all k Z. 2
D
Example 3.8.6. Solve: 3 tan + 5 = 0.
E
Solution.
3 tan + 5 = 0 = tan = 35
EP
We expect only one solution in any one-period interval.
tan = 35 = = tan1 53 + k, k Z 2

? Example 3.8.7. The voltage V (in volts) coming from an electricity distribut-
D
ing company is fluctuating according to the function V (t) = 200 + 170 sin(120t)
at time t in seconds.
(1) Determine the first time it takes to reach 300 volts.
(2) For what values of t does the voltage reach its maximum value?
Solution. (1) We solve for the least positive value of t such that V (t) = 300.
200 + 170 sin(120t) = 300

100
sin(120t) =
170
226
100
120t = sin1
170
sin1 100
170
t= 0.00167 seconds
120
(2) The maximum value of V (t) happens when and only when the maximum
value of sin(120t) is reached. We know that the maximum value of sin(120t)
is 1, and it follows that the maximum value of V (t) is 370 volts. Thus, we
need to solve for all values of t such that sin(120t) = 1.
sin(120t) = 1

120t = + 2k, k nonnegative integer
PY
2

+ 2k
t= 2
120
1
+ 2k
t= 2 0.00417 + 0.017k
120
O
This means that the voltage is maximum when t 0.00417 + 0.017k for each
nonnegative integer k. 2
C
3.8.3. Equations with Two or More Terms
D
We will now consider a group of equations having multi-step techniques of finding
their solutions. Coupled with the straightforward techniques we learned in the
preceding discussion, these more advanced techniques involve factoring of expres-
E
sions and trigonometric identities. The primary goal is to reduce a given equation
into equivalent one-term equations.
EP
Example 3.8.8. Solve: 2 cos x tan x = 2 cos x.
Solution.
2 cos x tan x = 2 cos x

D
2 cos x tan x 2 cos x = 0

(2 cos x)(tan x 1) = 0
2 cos x = 0 or tan x 1 = 0
cos x = 0 tan x = 1
x = 2 + 2k or x = 4 + k,
x = 3
2
+ 2k, kZ
kZ
Solutions:
2
+ 2k, 3
2
+ 2k,
4
+ k, k Z 2
227
Example 3.8.9. Solve for x [0, 2): sin 2x = sin x.
Solution.
sin 2x = sin x
sin 2x sin x = 0
2 sin x cos x sin x = 0 Sine Double-Angle Identity
(sin x)(2 cos x 1) = 0
sin x = 0 or 2 cos x 1 = 0
PY
1
x = 0 or x = cos x = 2
5
x= 3
or x = 3
Solutions: 0, , 5
3
, 3 2
O
Tips in Solving Trigonometric Equations
C
(1) If the equation contains only one trigonometric term, isolate that
term, and solve for the variable.
(2) If the equation is quadratic in form, we may use factoring, finding

D
square roots, or the quadratic formula.
E
(3) Rewrite the equation to have 0 on one side, and then factor (if
appropriate) the expression on the other side.
EP
(4) If the equation contains more than one trigonometric function,

try to express everything in terms of one trigonometric function.
Here, identities are useful.
(5) If half or multiple angles are present, express them in terms of a

D
trigonometric expression of a single angle, except when all angles

involved have the same multiplicity wherein, in this case, retain
the angle. Half-angle and double-angle identities are useful in
simplification.
Example 3.8.10. Solve for x [0, 2): 2 cos2 x = 1 + sin x.
Solution.
2 cos2 x = 1 + sin x
2(1 sin2 x) = 1 + sin x Pythagorean Identity
228
2 sin2 x + sin x 1 = 0
(2 sin x 1)(sin x + 1) = 0 Factoring
2 sin x 1 = 0 or sin x + 1 = 0
1
sin x = 2
sin x = 1
5 3
x= 6
or x = 6
x= 2
Solutions: 5 3
6
, 6, 2 2
Example 3.8.11. Solve for x [0, 2) in the equation 3 cos2 x + 2 sin x = 2.
PY
Solution.
3 cos2 x + 2 sin x = 2
3(1 sin2 x) + 2 sin x = 2 Pythagorean Identity
O
(3 sin x + 1)(sin x 1) = 0 Factoring
3 sin x + 1 = 0
C or sin x 1 = 0
sin x = 31 sin x = 1
x = sin1 ( 31 ) + 2 x=
D
2
or
x = sin1 ( 13 )
E
Solutions: 2 sin1 ( 13 )+, + sin1 ( 13 ),

2
2
EP
One part of the last solution needs further explanation. In the equation
sin x = 31 , we expect two solutions in the interval [0, 2): one in (, 3 2
) (which
is QIII), and another in ( 3
2
, 2) (which is QIV). Since no special number satisfies
1 1
sin x = 3 , we use inverse sine function. Because the range of sin is [ 2 , 2 ], we
know that 2 < sin1 ( 13 ) < 0. From this value, to get the solution in ( 3 , 2),
D
2
1 1
we simply add 2 to this value, resulting to x = sin ( 3 ) + 2. On the other
hand, to get the solution in (, 3 2
), we simply add sin1 ( 31 ) to , resulting to
x = sin1 ( 13 ).
Example 3.8.12. Solve: sin2 x + 5 cos2 x
2
= 2.
Solution.
sin2 x + 5 cos2 =2 x
2
sin2 x + 5 1+cos x

2
=2 Cosine Half-Angle Identity
2 sin2 x + 5 cos x + 1 = 0
229
2(1 cos2 x) + 5 cos x + 1 = 0 Pythagorean Identity
2 cos2 x 5 cos x 3 = 0
(2 cos x + 1)(cos x 3) = 0
2 cos x + 1 = 0 or cos x 3 = 0
cos x = 12 cos x = 3
x = 2
3
+ 2k or no solution
4
x = 3 + 2k,
kZ
PY
Solutions: 2
3
+ 2k, 4
3
+ 2k, k Z 2
Example 3.8.13. Solve for x [0, 2) in the equation tan 2x 2 cos x = 0.
Solution.
O
tan 2x 2 cos x = 0
sin 2x
C
cos 2x
2 cos x = 0
sin 2x 2 cos x cos 2x = 0
Apply the Double-Angle Identities for Sine and Cosine, and then factor.
D
2 sin x cos x 2(cos x)(1 2 sin2 x) = 0
E
(2 cos x)(2 sin2 x + sin x 1) = 0

(2 cos x)(2 sin x 1)(sin x + 1) = 0
EP
2 cos x = 0 or 2 sin x 1 = 0 or sin x + 1 = 0

1
cos x = 0 sin x = 2
sin x = 1
x = 2 or x = 6 or x= 3
2
D
x = 32
x = 56
These values of x should be checked in the original equation because tan 2x may
not be defined. Upon checking, this is not the case for each value of x obtained.
The solutions are 2 , 3
2
, 6 , 5
6
, and 3
2
. 2
? Example 3.8.14. A weight is suspended from a spring and vibrating vertically
according to the equation
f (t) = 20 cos 45 t 56 ,

where f (t) centimeters is the directed distance of the weight from its central
position at t seconds, and the positive distance means above its central position.
230
(1) At what time is the displacement of the weight 5 cm below its central
position for the first time?
(2) For what values of t does the weight reach its farthest point below its central
position?
Solution. (1) We find the least positive value of t such that f (t) = 5.
20 cos 54 t 56 = 5

cos 45 t 56 = 41

There are two families of solutions for this equation.
PY
45 t 65 = cos1 14 + 2k, k Z

cos1 ( 14 )+2k
t = 65 + 4

5
In this family of solutions, the least positive value of t happens when
k = 0, and this is
O
5 cos1 41 + 2(0)

t= + 4 1.5589.
6
5
C
54 t 65 = 2 cos1 14 + 2k, k Z

2cos1 ( 14 )+2k
t = 65 +
D
4

5
Here, the least positive value of t happens when k = 1, and this is
E
5 2 cos1 41 + 2(1)

t= + 4 0.1078.
6 5

EP
Therefore, the first time that the displacement of the weight is 5 cm below
its central position is at about 0.1078 seconds.
(2) The minimum value of f (t) happens when and only when the minimum
value of cos 45 t 56 is reached. The minimum value of cos 54 t 56 is

D
1, which implies that the farthest point the weight can reach below its
central position
is 20 cm. Thus, we need to solve for all values of t such that
cos 54 t 65 = 1.
cos 45 t 56 = 1

4 5
= cos1 (1) + 2k, k 0

5
t 6
4
t 56 = + 2k

5
5 +2k 25
t= 6
+ 4 = 12
+ 52 k

5
Therefore, the weight reaches its farthest point (which is 20 cm) below its
25
central position at t = 12 + 52 k for every integer k 0. 2
231
1. Give a particular solution of the following equation.
(a) sin2 x 1 = 0 (d) csc2 x csc x 2 = 0

(b) cot x = 3 (e) cos2 2x = sin2 x
(c) sec 3x = 1 (f) 2 cos x 3 = 0
Solution:
(a) x = 2 is a solution because sin2 ( 2 ) 1 = (1)2 1 = 0.

(b) Note that cos 6 = 23 and sin 6 = 21 . Thus, cot 6 = 3. So, x =
PY
6
is a
solution.
(c) Since sec = 1 if and only if cos = 1, a particular solution of the
equation in 3x is , that is, 3x = . Hence, x = 3 is a solution.
(d) Note that csc 3 = 1. So, csc2 3
= 1. As a consequence, csc2 3

O
2 2 2
csc 3
2
2 = 1 (1) 2 = 0.

(e) x = 2
is a solution.
C
(f) Because cos x must not be more than 1, then the equation has no solution.
2. What is the solution set of the following trigonometric equation sin2 x +
cos2 x = 1?
D
Solution: The equation is the Pythagorean Identity, meaning any element of
the domain of sin x and cos x satisfies the equation. The domain of both sin x
E
and cos x is R. Therefore, the solution set of this trigonometric equation is R.

One may try the numbers 6 , 0, and 4 for illustration.
EP
(a) x = 6
2 2
2 2 22
sin x + cos x = sin + cos = sin + cos
6 6 6 6
2 2 !
D
1 3 1 3
= + = + = 1.
2 2 4 4
(b) x = 0
sin2 x + cos2 x = sin2 0 + cos2 0 = 02 + 12 = 0 + 1 = 1.

(c) x = 4

sin2 x + cos2 x = sin2 + cos2
4 4
!2 !2
2 2 1 1
= + = + = 1.
2 2 4 4
232
3. Find the solution set of the trigonometric equation tan2 x + 1 = sec2 x.
Solution: Notice that this is a fundamental identity. Thus, the solution of
this equation is any number common to the domain of the tangent and secant
function. That is, the solution set is
{x R | cos x 6= 0} = {x R | x 6= 2 , 3
2
, 5
2
, ...}
(2k+1)
= {x R | x 6= 2
,k Z}.

4. Find all solutions of 3 tan x + 1 = 0.
Solution: The equation is equivalent to tan x = 13 . This is true only if
PY
x = 5
6
+ k where k Z.

5. What are the solutions of 3 tan x + 1 = 0, where x [0, 2].
5 11
Solution: The solutions are x = 6
and x = 6
.
O
6. Determine all solutions of 4 cos2 x 1 = 0.
Solution: Note that the equation is quadratic in form, so we can apply tech-
C
niques in solving quadratic equations. For this case, we factor the expression
on the left and obtain, (2 cos x 1)(2 cos x + 1) = 0. Consequently, we have
cos x = 1/2 or cos x = 1/2. The first equation have solutions of the form
D
(/3 + 2k) or (5/3 + 2k) where k Z, while the second equation have
solutions of the form (2/3 + 2k) or (4/3 + 2k). Combining the two solu-
tions, one observes that the solution set of the original equation may be given
E
by
2 4 5 7
, , , , , ... .
EP
3 3 3 3 3
We can write this in a more compact form as

k
: k 6= 3j, where j Z .
3
D
7. Find the solutions of 4 cos2 x 1 = 0 within the closed interval [0, 2].
Solution: Similar to Example 6, the solution of the above equation is

k
: k 6= 3j, where j Z .
3
Since we are to find solutions in [0, 2], we take k = 1, 2, 4, and 5 to obtain

the solutions /3, 2/3, 4/3, and 5/3.
233

8. If x [0, 2), solve the equation 2 sin2 x = 3 sin x.

Solution: First, we write the equation as 2 sin2 x 3 sin x = 0. Then, we
factor out sin x and get

sin x(2 sin x 3) = 0 = sin x = 0 or sin x = 3/2.
The first of these equations has solutions x = 0 and x = , while the second
has solutions x = /3 and 2/3. The solutions of the original equation is the
union of the two, i.e., the solution set is {0, , 3 , 2
3
}.
9. Solve 2 cos2 x + 5 cos x 3 = 0, where x [0, 2).

Solution: By factoring the left hand side of the given equation, we get (2 cos x
PY
1)(cos x + 3) = 0. This gives us two equations, namely
1
cos x = and cos x = 3.
2
O
First, we remark that the second equation does not have a solution because
cos x should be more than or equal to -1. Hence, the solution of the first
equation is the solution of the original equation. Thus, the solution set is
{ 3 , 5
3
}.
C
10. Determine the solution set of the equation cos 2x = sin x on [0, 2).
Solution: Combining the equation cos 2x = sin x with the cosine double-angle
D
identity cos 2x = 1 2 sin2 x, we get
sin x = 1 2 sin2 x.
E
This is equivalent to
EP
2 sin2 x + sin x 1 = 0 = (2 sin x 1)(sin x + 1) = 0

= sin x = 1/2 and sin x = 1.
D
The solutions of the first equation is x = /6 and x = 5/6. The number

x = 3/2 is the solution of the second equation. Therefore, the solution set of
the original equation is { 6 , 5
6
, 3
2
}.
11. Solve cos x = cos 2x, for x [0, 2).

Solution:
cos x = cos 2x
cos x = 2 cos2 x 1
0 = 2 cos2 x cos x 1
0 = (2 cos x + 1)(cos x 1).
234
The given trigonometric equation is equivalent to solving 2 cos x + 1 = 0 and
cos x = 1. For 2 cos x + 1 = 0 which is the same as cos x = 1/2, the solutions
in the given interval are x = 2/3, 4/3. For cos x = 1, the solution is x = 0.
Therefore, the solution set of the original equation is {0, 2
3
, 4
3
}.
12. A lighthouse at sea level is 34 mi from a boat. It is known that the top of
the lighthouse is 42.5 mi from the boat and that x = r cos , where x is the
horizontal distance, r is the distance of the top of the lighthouse from the
boat, and is the angle of depression from the top of lighthouse. Find .
Solution:
x 34 4
x = r cos = cos = = =
r 42.5 5
PY
4
= = cos1 0.6435 (or 36.87 ).
5
For this case, we used a calculator to find the value of the unknown variable
since 54 is not a special value for cosine.
O
13. Three cities, A, B, and C, are positioned in a triangle as seen in the figure
below. C
E D
EP
It is known that City A is 140mi from City C, while City B is 210 mi from
City C. Cities A and B are 70 7 mi apart. Also, by the Cosine Law, we have
z 2 = x2 + y 2 2xy cos
D
where x, y, and z are the respective distances of BC, AC, AB, and =
mACB. Find .
Solution: Substituting the corresponding values of x, y, and z, the problem is
now equivalent to solving the equation
34300 = 44100 + 19600 58800 cos
29400 = 58800 cos
1
2
= cos

3
= .
235
1. Find all solutions of the equation 2 cos x cos x sin x = 0.
2. Determine the solution set of the equation csc2 x + 1 = 0.
3. What are the solutions of sec2 x + sec x 2 = 0.
4. Find the solutions of the equation 4 sin2 x 1 = 0 on [0, 2).

5. Find the values of x [0, 2) for which csc 2x = 2.
6. What is the solution set of the equation sin = csc ?
PY
7. Solve t = sin1 (cos 2t).
8. Let x [0, 2). Find the solutions of the equation cos2 4x + sin2 2x = 1.
9. If a projectile, such as a bullet, is fired into the air with an initial velocity v at
O
an angle of elevation , then the height h of the projectile at time t is given by
h(t) = 16t2 + vt cos meters. If the initial velocity is 109 meters per second,
C
at what angle should the bullet be fired so that its height is 45 meters above
the floor in 2 seconds.
10. In a baseball field, a pitcher throws the ball at a speed of 60 km/h to the
D
catcher who is 100 m away. When the ball leaves a starting point at an angle
of elevation of , the horizontal distance the ball travels is determined by
2
d = v32 sin , where d is measured in meters and velocity in kilometers per
E
hour. At what angle of elevation (in degrees) is the ball thrown?

EP
Lesson 3.9. Polar Coordinate System

D

(1) locate points in polar coordinate system;
(2) convert the coordinates of a point from rectangular to polar system and vice
versa; and
(3) solve situational problems involving polar coordinate system.
236
Lesson Outline
(1) Polar coordinate system: pole and polar axis
(2) Polar coordinates of a point and its location
(3) Conversion from polar to rectangular coordinates, and vice versa
(4) Simple graphs and applications
Introduction
Two-dimensional coordinate systems are used to describe a point in a plane.
We previously used the Cartesian or rectangular coordinate system to locate a
point in the plane. That point is denoted by (x, y), where x is the signed dis-
PY
tance of the point from the y-axis, and y is the signed distance of the point
from the x-axis. We sketched the graphs of equations (lines, circles, parabolas,
ellipses, and hyperbolas) and functions (polynomial, rational, exponential, log-
arithmic, trigonometric, and inverse trigonometric) in the Cartesian coordinate
plane. However, it is often convenient to locate a point based on its distance
O
from a fixed point and its angle with respect to a fixed ray. Not all equations
can be graphed easily using Cartesian coordinates. In this lesson, we also use
another coordinate system, which can be presented in dartboard-like plane as
shown below.
C
E D
EP
D
3.9.1. Polar Coordinates of a Point
We now introduce the polar coordinate system. It is composed of a fixed point

called the pole (which is the origin in the Cartesian coordinate system) and a
237
fixed ray called the polar axis (which is the nonnegative x-axis).
In the polar coordinate system, a point is described by the ordered pair (r, ).
The radial coordinate r refers to the directed distance of the point from the pole.
The angular coordinate refers to a directed angle (usually in radians) from the
polar axis to the segment joining the point and the pole.
PY
O
C
Because a point in polar coordinate system is described by an order pair of
radial coordinate and angular coordinate, it will be more convenient to geomet-
rically present the system in a polar plane, which serves just like the Cartesian
D
plane. In the polar plane shown below, instead of rectangular grids in the Carte-
sian plane, we have concentric circles with common center at the pole to identify
easily the distance from the pole (radial coordinate) and angular rays emanating
E
from the pole to show the angles from the polar axis (angular coordinate).
EP
D
238
Example 3.9.1. Plot the following points in one polar plane: A(3, 3 ), B(1, 56
),
7 19 7 17 17 5
C(2, 6 ), D(4, 12 ), E(3, ), F (4, 6 ), G(2.5, 4 ), H(4, 6 ), and I(3, 3 ).
Solution.
PY
O
C
E D
EP
As seen in the last example, unlike in Cartesian plane where a point has a
unique Cartesian coordinate representation, a point in polar plane have infinitely
many polar coordinate representations. For example, the coordinates (3, 4) in
the Cartesian plane refer to exactly one point in the plane, and this particular
point has no rectangular coordinate representations other than (3, 4). However,
D
the coordinates (3, 3 ) in the polar plane also refer to exactly one point, but
this point has other polar coordinate representations. For example, the polar
coordinates (3, 5
3
), (3, 7
3
), (3, 13
3
), and (3, 19
3
) all refer to the same point as

that of (3, 3 ).
The polar coordinates (r, + 2k), where k Z, represent the same

point as that of (r, ).
In polar coordinate system, it is possible for the coordinates (r, ) to have

a negative value of r. In this case, the point is |r| units from the pole in the
opposite direction of the terminal side of , as shown in Figure 3.41.
239
Figure 3.41
PY
Example 3.9.2. Plot the following points in one polar plane: A(3, 4
3
), B(4, 11
6
),
C(2, ), and D(3.5, 7
4
).
O
Solution. As described above, a polar point with negative radial coordinate lies
on the opposite ray of the terminal side of .
C
E D
EP
D
240
Points in Polar Coordinates
1. For any , the polar coordinates (0, ) represent the pole.

2. A point with polar coordinates (r, ) can also be represented by
(r, + 2k) or (r, + + 2k) for any integer k.
3.9.2. From Polar to Rectangular, and Vice Versa
We now have two ways to describe points on a plane whether to use the Carte-
sian coordinates (x, y) or the polar coordinates (r, ). We now derive the conver-
PY
sion from one of these coordinate systems to the other.
We superimpose the Cartesian and polar planes, as shown in the following
diagram.
O
C
E D
EP
Figure 3.42
Suppose a point P is represented by the polar coordinates (r, ). From Lesson

3.2 (in particular, the boxed definition on page 139), we know that
D
x = r cos and y = r sin .
Conversion from Polar to Rectangular Coordinates

x = r cos
(r, ) (x, y)
y = r sin
Given one polar coordinate representation (r, ), there is only one

rectangular coordinate representation (x, y) corresponding to it.
241
Example 3.9.3. Convert the polar coordinates (5, ) and (3, 6 ) to Cartesian
coordinates.
Solution.
x = 5 cos = 5
(5, ) (5, 0)
y = 5 sin = 0

x = 3 cos = 3 3
(3, 6 ) 6 2
( 3 2 3 , 32 ) 2
y = 3 sin = 3
6 2
PY
As explained on page 239 (right after Example 3.9.1), we expect that there
are infinitely many polar coordinate representations that correspond to just one
given rectangular coordinate representation. Although we can actually determine
all of them, we only need to know one of them and we can choose r 0.
Suppose a point P is represented by the rectangular coordinates (x, y). Re-
O
ferring back to Figure 3.42, the equation of the circle is
p
x2 + y 2 = r 2 = r = x2 + y 2 .
C
We now determine . If x = y = 0, then r = 0 and the point is the pole. The
pole has coordinates (0, ), where is any real number.
D
If x = 0 and y 6= 0, then we may choose to be either 2 or 3
2
(or their
equivalents) depending on whether y > 0 or y < 0, respectively.
E
Now, suppose x 6= 0. From the boxed definition again on page 139, we know
that
y
EP
tan = ,
x
where is an angle in standard position whose terminal side passes through the
point (x, y).
D
Conversion from Rectangular to Polar Coordinates
(x, y) = (0, 0) (r, ) = (0, ), R

(y, ) if y > 0
2
(0, y) (r, ) =
y6=0 (|y|, 3 ) if y < 0
2

(x, 0) if x > 0
(x, 0) (r, ) =
x6=0 (|x|, ) if x < 0
242
(x, y) (r, )
x6=0, y6=0
p
r= x2 + y 2
y
tan = x
same quadrant as (x, y)
Given one rectangular coordinate representation (x, y), there are

many polar coordinate representations (r, ) corresponding to it. The
above computations just give one of them.
Example 3.9.4. Convert each Cartesian coordinates to polar coordinates (r, ),
PY
where r 0.
(1) (4, 0) (4) (6, 2)
(2) (4, 4) (5) (3, 6)

O
(3) (3, 3) (6) (12, 8)
Solution. (1) (4, 0) (4, )

C
(2) The point (4, 4) is in QI.
p
r = x2 + y 2 = 42 + 42 = 4 2
D
y 4
tan = x
= 4
= 1 = = 4

(4, 4) 4 2, 4
E

(3) (3, 3) in QIII

EP
q
r = (3)2 + ( 3)2 = 2 3

tan = 33 = 33 = = 7
6

(3, 3) 2 3, 7

6
D
(4) (6, 2) in QIV

p
r = 62 + (2)2 = 2 10
2
= 13 = = tan1 13

tan = 6

(6, 2) 2 10, tan1 13

(5) (3, 6) in QII

p
r = (3)2 + 62 = 3 5
tan = = 2 = = + tan1 (2)
6
3

(3, 6) 3 5, + tan1 (2)

243
(6) (12, 8) in QIII
p
r = (12)2 + (8)2 = 4 13
8
tan = 12
= 2
3
= = + tan1 2
3

4 13, + tan1 23 2

(12, 8)
3.9.3. Basic Polar Graphs and Applications
From the preceding session, we learned how to convert polar coordinates of a

point to rectangular and vice versa using the following conversion formulas:
y
r2 = x2 + y 2 , tan = , x = r cos , and y = r sin .
PY
x
Because a graph is composed of points, we can identify the graphs of some equa-
tions in terms of r and .
Graph of a Polar Equation
O
The polar graph of an equation involving r and is the set of all
points with polar coordinates (r, ) that satisfy the equation.
C
As a quick illustration, the polar graph of the equation r = 2 2 sin consists
of all points (r, ) that satisfy the equation. Some of these points are (2, 0), (1, 6 ),
D
(0, 2 ), (2, ), and (4, 3
2
).
Example 3.9.5. Identify the polar graph of r = 2, and sketch its graph in the
polar plane.
E
Solution. Squaring the equation, we get r2 = 4. Because r2 = x2 + y 2 , we have

EP
x2 + y 2 = 4, which is a circle of radius 2 and with center at the origin. Therefore,

the graph of r = 2 is a circle of radius 2 with center at the pole, as shown below.
D
244
In the previous example, instead of using the conversion formula r2 = x2 + y 2 ,
we may also identify the graph of r = 2 by observing that its graph consists of
points (2, ) for all . In other words, the graph consists of all points with radial
distance 2 from the pole as rotates around the polar plane. Therefore, the
graph of r = 2 is indeed a circle of radius 2 as shown.
Example 3.9.6. Identify and sketch the polar graph of = 5

4
.
Solution. The graph of = 5 4

consists of all points (r, 5
4
) for r R. If
r > 0, then points (r, 54
) determine a ray from the pole with angle 5
4
from
PY
5
the polar axis. If r = 0, then (0, 4 ) is the pole. If r < 0, then the points
(r, 5
4
) determine a ray in opposite direction to that of r > 0. Therefore, the
graph of = 5 4
is a line passing through the pole and with angle 5 4
with
respect to the polar axis, as shown below.
O
C
E D
EP
D
Example 3.9.7. Identify (and describe) the graph of the equation r = 4 sin .
Solution.
r = 4 sin
r2 = 4r sin
x2 + y 2 = 4y
x2 + y 2 4y =0
x2 + (y 2)2 =4
Therefore, the graph of r = 4 sin is a circle of radius 2 and with center at (2, 2 ).
245
PY
? Example 3.9.8. Sketch the graph of r = 2 2 sin .
O
Solution. We construct a table of values.
2 3 5
x 0 6 4
C 3 2 3 4 6

r 2 1 0.59 0.27 0 0.27 0.59 1 2
7 5 4 3 5 7 11
D
x 6 4 3 2 3 4 6
2
r 3 3.41 3.73 4 3.73 3.41 3 2
E
EP
D
This heart-shaped curve is called a cardioid. 2
246
? Example 3.9.9. The sound-pickup capability of a certain brand of microphone
is described by the polar equation r = 4 cos , where |r| gives the sensitivity of
the microphone to a sound coming from an angle (in radians).
(1) Identify and sketch the graph of the polar equation.

(2) Sound coming from what angle [0, ] is the microphone most sensitive
to? Least sensitive?
Solution. (1) r = 4 cos

r2 = 4r cos
x2 + y 2 = 4x
PY
x2 + 4x + y 2 =0
(x + 2)2 + y 2 =4
This is a circle of radius 2 and with center at (2, ).
O
C
E D
EP
D
(2) We construct a table of values.
2 3 5
x 0 6 4 3 2 3 4 6

r 4 3.46 2.83 2 0 2 2.83 3.46 4
From the table, the microphone is most sensitive to sounds coming from
angles = 0 and = , and least sensitive to sound coming from an angle
= 2 . 2
247
1. Locate in the polar plane the following polar points: M (1, /3), A(0, ), T (, 0),
and H(4, 5/3).
Solution:
PY
O
C
D
2. Locate in the polar plane the following polar points: W (1, 7/4), X(2, /6), Y (4, 5/6)
E
and Z(3, 11/3).

Solution:
EP
D
248
3. Convert the following polar points to Cartesian coordinates.
(a) (5, 5/4) to Cartesian coordinates

(b) (2, 3/4) to Cartesian coordinates
(c) (, )
(d) (0, 10)
Solution: (a) Using the conversion formulas with r = 5 and = 5/4, we get

x = r cos = 5 cos(5/4) = 5 2/2
PY
and
y = r sin = 5 sin(5/4) = 5 2/2.

Therefore, (5, 5/4) in Cartesian coordinate is(5 2/2, 5 2/2).
O
(b) Using the conversion formulas with r = 2 and = 5 = 3/4, we get

x = r cos = 2 cos(3/4) = 2 2/2
and
C

y = r sin = 2 sin(3/4) = 2 2/2.

D
Therefore, (2, 3/4) in Cartesian coordinate is (2 2/2, 2 2/2).
(c) Notice here that is used in two different ways. First is , with numerical
value approximately equal to 3.14, is used as a radius and second, as an
E
angle equivalent to 180 . That is, the point is in the negative x-axis units
away from the origin. Hence, the Cartesian coordinate of (, ) is (, 0).
EP
(d) Since the radius is 0, then the polar point (0, 10) is the origin with Cartesian
coordinate (0, 0).
4. Convert the following Cartesian points to polar coordinates.

D
(a) (5, 5) (c) (5 3, 15)

(b) (3, 3) (d) (8, 0)
Solution: (a) The point (x, y) = (5, 5) is in the fourth quadrant. Using the
conversion formulas, we get
p p
r = x2 + y 2 = 52 + (5)2 = 5 2
and
= tan1 (y/x) = tan1 (1) = /4.

Therefore, (5, 5) in polar coordinate is (5 2, /4).
249
(b) Similarly, we use the conversion formulas to get
q
r = (3)2 + ( 3)2 = 12 = 2 3
and
= tan1 [ 3/(3)] = /6.
Note that the point is in the second quadrant so we must use pi6 + . There-

fore, (3, 3) in polar coordinate is (2 3, 5/6).
(c) The point is in the third quadrant.
q
r = (5 3)2 + (15)2 = 300 = 10 3
and
PY

tan = 15/(5 3) = 4/3.

Therefore, (5 3, 15) in polar coordinate is (10 3, 4/3).
(d) Using the conversion formula, one can show that the point (8, 0) in polar
coordinate is also (8, 0).
O
5. Identify (and describe) the graph of the equation r = 4 sin . Using a graphing
software, graph the following equations.
(a) r = 2 sin
C (c) = 2r
(b) r = 5 (d) r = 2 2 cos
D
Solution: (a) r = 2 sin is a circle with radius 1 centered at (1, 2 ).
(b) r = 5 is a standard circle with radius 5.
E
(c) Notice that as increases, the r also increases. The graph of = 2r is a

spiral rotating counter-clockwise from the pole.
EP
(d) The graph of r = 2 2 cos is a cardioid.

D
(a) (b)
250
PY
(c) (d)
6. A boy is flying a kite with an angle of elevation of 60 from where he stands.
O
What is the direct distance of the kite from him, if the the kite is 6 ft above
the ground?
Solution: The problem can be illustrated as follows:
C
E D
EP
D
Here, r (in ft) is the distance of the kite from the boy and is the angle of
depression. To solve for r, we apply the formula y = r sin . Thus,

r = y/ sin = 6/ sin(60 ) = 6/( 3/2) = 12/ 3 = 4 3.

Therefore, the kite is 4 3 ft away from the boy.
251
1. Give two more pairs of coordinates that describe the same point.
(a) (13, /3) (b) (0, 0) (c) (15, 15/4)
2. Locate the following points in the polar coordinate plane:

(a) P (3, )
(b) Q(3, 7/4)
(c) R(5/2, 5/2)
PY
(d) S(8, 23/6)
3. Transform the following to Cartesian coordinates:
(a) (3, )
O
(b) (3, 7/4)
(c) (5/2, 5/2) C
(d) (8, 23/6)
4. Transform the following to polar coordinates:
(a) (9, 40)
D
(b) (15, 20)
(c) (5/2, 5/2)
E
(d) (14, 14)

EP
5. Consider the equation in polar form r = 4 cos 2.

(a) Complete the table
0 /6 /4 /3 /2 2/3 3/4 5/6 7/6 5/4 4/3 3/2

D
(b) Plot the points obtained in part (a) in a polar coordinate system.
6. A helicopter is hovering 800 feet above a road. A truck driver observes the
helicopter at a horizontal distance of 600 feet. Find the angle of elevation of
the helicopter from the truck driver.
252
12
1. Let be an angle in QIII such that cos = . Find the values of the six
13
trigonometric functions of 2.
cot2 x 1
2. Prove that cot(2x) = .
2 cot x
3. Using half-angle identities to find the exact values of the following.
(a) tan 15 (b) tan 7.5
PY

1 103 1 40
(a) tan cot (b) cos sin
6 41
O
5. Let y [0, 2). Find the solutions of the equation
sin1 (cos2 y cos y 1) = /2.

C
6. Let [0, 2]. Find all the solutions of the equation
4 cos2 sin = 3 sin .

D
7. Let r = 2 2 sin . Complete the table and plot the points (r, ) in the same
E
polar coordinates.
EP
0 /6 /4 /3 /2 2/3 3/4 5/6 7/6 5/4 4/3 3/2

r
8. Transform the following points from Cartesian to polar coordinates.

D
(a) (42, 56) (c) (0, 7) (e) (2, 2)

(b) (100, 100) (d) (7, 0) (f) (5, 12)
9. Transform the following points from polar to Cartesian coordinates.
(a) (3, /3) (c) (1, ) (e) (2, 2)

(b) (45, 7/4) (d) (5, 0) (f) (9, 17/6)
253
7
1. Let be an angle in the 2nd quadrant such that cos = . Find the
25
following.
(a) cos(2) (b) sin(2) (c) tan(2)
2. Given that cos 48 0.6691. Find the approximate value of the following.
(a) cos2 24 (b) sin2 24 (c) tan2 24
PY
3. Using half-angle identities to find the exact values of the following.
(a) tan(/12) (b) tan(/24)

1 1 1 3
O
4. Find the exact value of cos cos + cos .
7 5
5. Let x [0, 2). Find the solutions of the equation

C
4 sin2 x + (2 3 2 2) sin x 6 = 0.
6. Let [0, 2]. Find all the solutions of the equation

D
2 sin2 (2) sin(2) 1 = 0.
E
7. Let r = 2 + 2 cos . Complete the table and plot the points (r, ) in the same
EP
polar coordinates.
0 /6 /4 /3 /2 2/3 3/4 5/6 7/6 5/4 4/3 3/2

r
D
8. Transform the following points from Cartesian to polar coordinates.
(a) (21, 28) (c) (0, 5) (e) (, )

(b) (100, 100) (d) (5, 0) (f) (15, 8)
9. Transform the following points from polar to Cartesian coordinates.
(a) (4, /6) (c) (1, ) (e) (, )

(b) (100, 5/4) (d) (5, 0) (f) (15, 8/3)
254
PY
4
O
Answers to
Odd-Numbered Exercises
C
in Supplementary Problems
D
and
All Exercises in Topic Tests
E
EP
4
D
Supplementary Problems 1.1 (page 17)
1
1. center (0, 0), r =
2
PY
O

3
3. center 4, ,r=1
4 C
E D
EP
5. center (7, 6), r = 11

D
256
5
7. center (2, 4), r =
3
PY
O

5 7 7
9. center , ,r=
2 2 4 C
E D
EP
D
11. (x 17)2 + (y 5)2 = 144 19. (x + 10)2 + (y 7)2 = 36
13. (x 15)2 + (y + 7)2 = 49 21. (x + 2)2 + (y 3)2 = 12
15. (x 15)2 + (y + 7)2 = 9 23. (x 2.5)2 + (y 0.5)2 = 14.5
17. (x + 2)2 + (y 3.5)2 = 31.25 25. (x + 5)2 + (y + 1)2 = 8
27. Set up a Cartesian coordinate system by assigning C as the origin. Then the
circle on the left end has radius 100 and has equation x2 + y 2 = 10000. A
radius of the circle on the right end can be drawn from C to the upper right
corner of the figure; this radius has length (by the Pythagorean theorem)
257

3002 + 1002 = 100000. Then the circle on the right end has equation x2 +
y 2 = 100000. We want the
length of the segment
at y = 50. In this case, the
has x = 2
left endpoint
10000 50 = 7500 and the right endpoint
has
x = 100000 502 = 97500. Then the total length is 97500 ( 7500)
= 50 3 + 50 39 m 398.85 m.
1. vertex (0, 0), focus (9, 0), directrix x = 9, axis y = 0
PY
O
C
E D
EP
3. vertex (1, 7), focus (2, 7), directrix x = 0, axis y = 7

D
258

3 11
5. vertex (3, 2), focus 3, , directrix y = , axis x = 3
2 2
PY
O
7. (y 11)2 = 36(x 7) C 13. (y 8)2 = 8(x + 3)
9. (x + 10)2 = 34(y 3) 15. 4.17 cm
11. (y 9)2 = 80(x 4) 17. 3.75 cm

D
E
1. center: (0, 0)
foci:
F1 (2, 0), F2 (2, 0)
EP

vertices: V1 (2 2, 0), V2 (2 2, 0)
covertices: W1 (0, 2), W2 (0, 2)
D
3. center: (1, 1)

foci: F1 (1 3, 1),

F2 (1 + 3, 1)
vertices: V1 (1, 1), V2 (3, 1)
covertices: W1 (1, 0), W2 (1, 2)
259
5. center: (7, 5)
foci: F1 (1, 5), F2 (13, 5)
vertices: V1 (3, 5), V2 (17, 5)
covertices: W1 (7, 13), W2 (7, 3)
PY
O
(x 2)2 (y 8)2
C
7. + =1
49 16
D
9. The center is (9, 10) and c = 12.
We see that the given point (9, 15) is
a covertex, so b = 5. Then a = 52 + 122 = 13. Therefore, the equation is
(x + 9)2 (y 10)2
E
+ = 1.
169 25
11. Since the major axis is vertical, the center has the same x coordinate as the
EP
focus and the same y coordinate as the covertex; that is, the center is (9, 10).
(x + 9)2
Then c = 5, b = 10, and a2 = 125. Therefore, the equation is +
100
(y 10)2
= 1.
125
D
13. Recall that the unit is 100 km. The vertices of the ellipse are at (3633, 0) and
(4055, 0). Then the center of the ellipse is at (211, 0). Then a = 3844
(x + 211)2
and c = 211. It follows that b2 = 14731815. The equation is +
14776336
2
y
= 1.
14731815
15. Set up a coordinate system with the center of the ellipse at the origin. Then
a = 60 and b = 20. We want the length of the segment with endpoints (on the
2 y2
ellipse) having x = 45 (or 45). The y coordinates are given by 45
602
+ 20 2 = 1,
q
2
or y = 202 1 45

602
13.23. Hence, the desired width is 26.46 ft.
260
1. center: (0, 0)

foci: F1 ( 181, 0), F2 ( 181, 0)
vertices: V1 (10, 0), V2 (10, 0)
9
asymptotes: y = x
10
PY
3. center: (0, 5)

foci:
F1 ( 19, 5), F2 ( 19, 5)

vertices: V1 ( 15, 5), V2 ( 15, 5)
2
O
asymptotes: y 5 = x
15
C
E D
EP
D
5. center: (3, 3)

foci: F1 (3, 3 15),

F2 (3, 3 + 15)

vertices: V1 (3, 3 6),

V2 (3, 3 + 6)

6
asymptotes: y + 3 = (x + 3)
3
261
y2 (x + 7)2 (x + 10)2 (y + 4)2
7. =1 9. =1
144 145 81 256
11. The intersection (4, 8) of the two asymptotes is the center of the hyperbola.
Then the hyperbola is vertical and c = 13. Since the slopes of the asymptotes
5
are 12 , we have ab = 12
5
.

Since c = 13, we have a2 + b2 = 169 and b = 169 a2 . It follows that
a 5 (y 8)2 (x + 4)2
= = a = 5 and b = 12 = = 1.
169 a2 12 25 144
PY
13. The midpoint (9, 1) of the two given corners is the center of the hyperbola.
Since the transverse axis is horizontal, a = 7 and b = 2. Therefore, the
(x 9)2 (y 1)2
equation is = 1.
49 4
O
1. pair of intersecting lines 5. parabola

C
3. parabola 7. empty set
(x 5)2 (y 2)2
D
9. The standard equation of the ellipse is + = 1; so its foci
36 100
are (5, 10) and (5, 6) while its vertices are (5, 12) and (5, 8). The equations
E
of the circles are (x 5)2 + (y 10)2 = 4, (x 5)2 + (y 10)2 = 324,

(x 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 4, and (x 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 324.
EP
(y + 5)2 (x + 9)2
11. The standard equation of the hyperbola is = 1. Its auxil-
25 25
iary rectangle has corners (14, 0), (4, 0), (4, 10), (14, 10). The equa-
tion of the circle is (x + 9)2 + (y + 5)2 = 50.
D
13. The equation simplifies to

r+2
(x + 7)2 + (y 3)2 = .
r1
Its graph
r+2
(a) is a circle if > 0; that is, when r (, 2) (1, +).
r1
r+2
(b) is a point if = 0; that is, when r = 2.
r1
r+2
(c) is the empty set if < 0; that is, when r (2, 1).
r1
262
1. (a) (1, 6)
PY

4 9 4 89
O
(b) , , ,
3 20 3 20
C
E D
EP
(c) (1, 6), (1, 2)

D
263

3
(d) 1, , (1 15, 1), (1 + 15, 1)
2
PY
O
(e) No solution
C
E D
EP
D
3. Let (x, y) be the ordered pair that satisfies the conditions. The resulting
system of equations is

1
x2 = 2y 2 +

8
2 2 5
x +y =

16

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Solving yields , , , , , , and , .
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
264
5. We have the system
x2 + (y 6)2 = 36
x2 = 4ky,
where the first equation is a circle above the x-axis, tangent to the x-axis at
x = 0, and the second equation is a parabola facing up/down, depending on
k.
Substituting the second equation in the first equation yields y 2 +(4k12)y = 0.
Note that y = 0 is already a root.
We now consider two cases.
If k > 0, the system might have one or two solutions. To ensure that the
PY
solution is unique, we set the discriminant to be nonpositive: 4k 12 0
k 3.
If k 0, the system will always have a unique solution.
Thus k (, 0] (3, +).
Topic Test 1 for Unit 1 (page 78)
O
C
1. (a) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are equal, the graph is a circle, a point,
or the empty set. Completing the squares, we see that the equation is
equivalent to
D
2 2
1 3
x + y+ = 4.
2 2
E
Hence, the graph is a circle with center (0.5, 1.5) and radius 2.
(b) By inspection, the graph is a parabola. Completing the squares, we see
EP
that the equation is equivalent to (x + 2)2 = 14(y + 4). Hence, the graph
has vertex at (2, 4) and is opening upward.
(c) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are of opposite signs, the graph is a
hyperbola or a pair of intersecting lines. Completing the squares, we see
that the equation is equivalent to
D
(x 7)2 (y + 3)2
= 1.
4 3
Hence, the graph is a horizontal hyperbola with center at (7, 3).
(d) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 have the same sign and are unequal,
we see that the equation is equivalent to
(x 8)2 y 2
+ = 0.
2 7
Hence, the graph is the point (8, 0).
265
x2 y2
2. (a) The equation is equivalent to + = 1. This is a vertical ellipse.
7 25
center: (0, 0)

foci: F1 (0, 3 2), F2 (0, 3 2)
vertices: V1 (0, 5), V2 (0, 5)

covertices: W1 ( 7, 0), W2 ( 7, 0)
PY
(y + 4)2 (x 1)2
(b) The equation is equivalent to = 1. This is a vertical
64 36
O
hyperbola.
C
center: C(1, 4)
foci: F1 (1, 14), F2 (1, 6)
D
vertices: F1 (1, 12), F2 (1, 6)
asymptotes: y + 4 = 43 (x 1)
E
EP
3. (a) The parabola opens to the right and has focal distance c = 6. Its equation
is (y 3)2 = 24(x + 1).
(b) The intersection (2, 5) of the two asymptotes is the center of the
D
hyperbola. Then the hyperbola is horizontal and a = 5. Using the slopes

of the asymptotes, we have ab = 12 4
. It follows that b = 12 and the
2 2
(x + 2) (y + 5)
equation is = 1.
25 144
4. Multiplying the first equation by 2, we get 2(x 1)2 + 2(y + 1)2 = 10. By
subtracting the second equation from this new equation, we get the equation
2(y + 1)2 + 8 = 10 y. This has solutions y = 0 and y = 5/2.
When y = 0, the corresponding x values are 3 and 1. When y = 5/2,
the corresponding x values are 211 + 1. Therefore, the solutions are (1, 0),

11
(3, 0), 2
+ 1, 52 .
266
5. Set up a coordinate system by making the center of the doors base the origin.
Then the ellipse has center (0, 2) with a = 1/2 and b = 0.3; then its is equation
2
x2
0.52
+ (y2)
0.32
= 1.
To determine if the cabinet can be pushed through the doorway, we determine
the height of the doorway when x = 0.25 (or 0.25). We solve for y from the
2 2
equation 0.25
0.52
+ (y2)
0.32
= 1. Solving for the y coordinate, we see that the height
is 2.2598 m. Hence, the cabinet cannot be pushed through the doorway.
6. Let (x, y) be the coordinates of the point. This point satisfies

p
x2 + (y + 1)2 = 2|x 3|.
PY
Manipulating this equation gives us
x2 + (y + 1)2 = 4(x2 6y + 9)
3(x2 8x + 16) + (y + 1)2 = 36 48
O
3(x 4)2 + (y + 1)2 = 12
(x 4)2 (y + 1)2
= 1.
4
C
12
Therefore, the point traces a horizontal hyperbola with center at (4, 1).
D
E
1. (a) By inspection, the graph is a parabola. Completing the squares, we see

that the equation is equivalent to (y 5)2 = 8(x 5). Hence, the graph
has vertex at (5, 5) and is opening to the left.
EP
(b) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are equal, the graph is a circle, a point,
or the empty set. Completing the squares, we see that the equation is
equivalent to (x + 5)2 + (y + 9)2 = 4. Hence, the graph is the empty
set.
D
(c) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 have the same sign and are unequal,
(x + 2)2 (y 1)2
we see that the equation is equivalent to + = 1. Hence,
4 9
the graph is a vertical ellipse with center (2, 1).
(d) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are of opposite signs, the graph is a
hyperbola or a pair of intersecting lines. Completing the squares, we
(y 4)2 (x 6)2
see that the equation is equivalent to = 0. Hence,
11 17
the graph is a pair of intersecting lines given by the equations y 4 =
11
17
(x 6).
267
x2 y 2
2. (a) The equation is equivalent to = 1. This is a horizontal hyperbola.
64 64
center: (0, 0)

foci: F1 (8 2, 0),

F2 (8 2, 0)
vertices: V1 (8, 0), V2 (8, 0)
asymptotes: y = x
PY
(x + 3)2 (y 2)2
(b) The equation is equivalent to + = 1. This is a horizontal
49 4
ellipse.
O
center: C(3, 2)

foci: F1 (3 3 5, 2), F2 (3 + 3 5, 2)
C
vertices: F1 (10, 2), F2 (4, 2)
covertices: W1 (3, 0), W2 (3, 4)
E D
EP
D
3. (a) The parabola opens downward and has focal distance c = 5. Its equation
is (x 7)2 = 20(y + 7).
(b) Since the ellipse has vertical or horizontal major axis, the center is at
either (1, 12) or (5, 3). Since the major axis is longer than the minor
axis, the center must be at (5, 3). Then the ellipse is vertical with a = 9
and b = 4. Its equation is
(x + 5)2 (y 3)2
+ = 1.
16 81
268
4. Completing the squares, we see that the first equation is equivalent to 9(x +
3)2 = 4y 2 + 36. On the other hand, the second equation is equivalent to
9(x + 3)2 = 36y + 36. Subtracting the second equation from the first, we get
4y 2 36y = 0, which has solutions y = 0 and y = 9.
When y = 0, the corresponding x values are 5 and 1. When y = 9, the
valuesare 3 2 10. Therefore, the solutions are (5, 0),
corresponding x
(1, 0), 3 2 10, 9 .
5. Set up a coordinate system so that the opening of the hose (the parabolas
vertex) is at (0, 3) and that the water flows towards the positive x-axis. Then
the x-axis (y = 0) corresponds to the ground; it follows the parabola passes
through the point (2, 0). Hence, the equation of the parabola is x2 = 43 (y3).
PY
If Nikko stands on a 1.5-ft stool and the vertex remains at (0, 3), the line
y = 1.5 will correspond to the ground.q Hence, the water will strike the
4

ground when y = 1.5. This gives x = 3 (1.5 3) = 6. Therefore, the

water will travel 6 2 ft further before striking the ground.
O
6. Let (x, y) be the coordinates of the point. This point satisfies
C
p 2
(x 2)2 + y 2 = |y 5|.
3
Manipulating this equation gives us
D
4
(x 2)2 + y 2 = (y 2 10y + 25)
9
E
2 2
9(x 2) + 5(y + 8y) = 100
9(x 2)2 + 5(y + 4)2 = 100 + 80
EP
(x 2)2 (y + 4)2
+ = 1.
20 36
Therefore, the point traces a vertical ellipse with center at (2, 4).
D
1. a3 = a1 + (3 1)d = 35; a10 = a1 +(10 1)d = 77 d = 6, a1 = 23 a5 = 47.

n (2(17) + (n 1)3)
3. sn = = 30705 3n2 + 31n 61410 = 0. Using the
2
quadratic formula and noting that n must be a whole number, we have n =
138.
a1 a1 (1 r3 )
5. We have s = 108 = and s3 = 112 = = 108 (1 r3 ) r =
1r 1r
1
a1 = 144.
27
269
7. Note that 0.123123 . . . = 0.123 + 0.000123 + 0.000000123 + . . . = 0.123 +
0.123(0.001) + 0.123(0.001)2 + . . ., which is an infinite geometric series with
0.123 41
r = 0.001. Thus, 0.123 = = .
1 0.001 333
4 (2a1 + (4 1)d)
9. We have s4 = = 80 2a1 + 3d = 40. Since the sum of the
2
first two numbers are one-third of the sum of the last two numbers, we have
1
(a1 + a2 ) = a3 + a4 4a1 + 14d = 0. Combining yields d = 10, and thus
3
a1 = 5, a2 = 15, a3 = 25, a4 = 35.
11. Note that this is a geometric series with common ratio 2n 1. Thus, the sum
PY
will have a finite value if |2n 1| < 1 1 < 2n 1 < 1 0 < n < 1.
Thus, n (0, 1).
O
10

X i 3 3 10
1. (a) 3 = + ... + = 26 3
2 2 2 2
5
i=3
C
X x2i x2 x4 x6 x8 x10
(b) = + + + +
i=1
2i 2 4 8 16 32
D
5
X
(c) (1)i xi1 = x x2 + x3 x4
i=2
E
150 150 150

X X X 150(151)
3. (a) (4i + 2) = 4 i+ 2=4 + 2(150) = 45, 600
EP
i=1 i=1 i=1

2
120 120
X X 120(121)(2(120) + 1)
(b) i(i5) = (i2 5i)1(15)2(25) = +10 =
i=3 i=1
6
583, 230
D
130 130 130 130

X X
2
X
2
X 130(131)(2(130) + 1)
(c) (2i3)(2i+3) = (4i 9) = 4 i 9= +
i=1 i=1 i=1 i=1
6
9(130) = 741, 975
200 200 200
X 2 2
X X 200 s
5. s = (i 1) i = (1 2i) i=
i=1 i=1 i=1
2
270
1. Part 1.
1 1+2
=2 1
2 2
Part 2.
k
X i k+2
Assume: i
=2 k .
i=1
2 2
k+1
i k+3
PY
X
To show: i
= 2 k+1 .
i=1
2 2
k+1 k
X i X i k+1
= + k+1
O
2i 2i 2
i=1 i=1
k+2 k+3
=2 + k+1
2k 2
C k+3
= 2 k+1 .
2
D
3. Part 1.
1(1!) = (1 + 1)! 1
E

EP
Part 2.
k
X
Assume: i(i!) = (k + 1)! 1.
i=1
D
k+1
X
To show: i(i!) = (k + 2)! 1.
i=1
k+1
X k
X
i(i!) = i(i!) + (k + 1)[(k + 1)!]
i=1 i=1
= (k + 1)! 1 + (k + 1)[(k + 1)!]
= (k + 2)(k + 1)! 1
= (k + 2)! 1.
271
5. Part 1.
1 1 1
1 = =
2 2 2(1)
Part 2.

1 1 1 1 1
Assume: P = 1 1 1 1 = .
2 3 k1 k 2k

1 1 1 1
To show: 1 1 1 = .
2 k k+1 2(k + 1)
PY

1 1 1
1 1 =P 1
2 k+1 k+1
1 k
=
2k k + 1
1
O
= .
2(k + 1)
7. Part 1.
C
43(1)+1 + 23(1)+1 + 1 = 273 = 7(39)
D
Part 2.
E
Assume: 43k+1 + 23k+1 + 1 is divisible by 21.

Prove: 43(k+1)+1 + 23(k+1)+1 + 1 is divisible by 21.
EP

43(k+1)+1 +23(k+1)+1 +1 = 6443k+1 +823k+1 +1 = 5643k+1 +8 43k+1 + 23k+1 + 1
7
9. Part 1.
52(1)+1 21+2 + 31+2 22(1)+1 = 1216 = 19(64)
D
Part 2.
Assume: 52k+1 2k+2 + 3k+2 22k+1 is divisible by 19.
Prove: 52(k+1)+1 2(k+1)+2 + 3(k+1)+2 22(k+1)+1 is divisible by 19.
52(k+1)+1 2(k+1)+2 + 3(k+1)+2 22(k+1)+1 = 50 52k+1 2k+2 + 12 3k+2 22k+1 =
12 (52n+1 2n+2 + 3n+2 22n+1 ) + 38 52n+1 2n+2
272
11. Part 1.
101 5
+ + 41+2 = 1029 = 3(343)
3 3
Part 2.
10k 5
Assume: + + 4k+2 is divisible by 3.
3 3
10k+1 5
Prove: + + 4k+3 is divisible by 3.
3 3
k+1
10k 5
k
10 5 k+3 k+2 10 5 k+2 5
+ +4 = 10 + +44 = 10 + +4 64n+2 9
PY
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1
13. Part 1. 1 2 =1
1
Part 2
O
k
X 1 1
Assume: 3
2
i=1
i k C
k+1
X 1 1
Prove: 3
2
i=1
i k+1
k+1
(k + 1)3 k
D
X 1 1 1
3
2 + 3
= 2 3
. Note that 0 < (k + 1)2
i=1
i k (k + 1) (k + 1)
(k + 1)3 k (k + 1)2 1
E
(k + 1)2 < (k + 1)3 k, thus 2 3

< 2 3
=2 .
(k + 1) (k + 1) k+1
EP
1. (a) (2x 3y)5 = 32x5 240x4 y + 720x3 y 2 1080x2 y 3 + 810xy 4 243y 5

4
x 2 32 8 1 8
D
(b) 2 = x11/2 + 16x8 + x3 + x2 x1/2

3 x 3 3 81 27
4
(c) (1 + x) = 4x3/2 + x2 + 6x + 4 x + 1
4
10
X 10
3. Approximating yields (2.1) 210k (0.1)k = 1667.904, which has
k=0
k
an approximate error of 0.08.
19
X 19
5. In sigma notation we have (3)k = (1 3)19 = (2)19 .
k=0
k
273
1. (a) G, r = 3/2 (b) O (c) O
a3 + 1 a2 + 2
2. First, a3 = a2 + 5 = a1 + 10. Also, = . Thus, a1 = 5,
a2 + 2 a1 + 4
a2 = 10, and a3 = 15.
50
X 2i3 + 9i2 + 13i + 6 (2i + 3)(i + 1)(i + 2)
3. We have = = 2i + 3.
i=1
i2 + 3i + 2 (i + 1)(i + 2)
50 50
X 2i3 + 9i2 + 13i + 6 X
Thus, = (2i + 3) = 2700.
PY
i=1
i2 + 3i + 2 i=1
k
8 162k 1
4. (a) x = 16 2k = 8 = k = 4
k 2
4
8 8 1 35
O
= x = x8
4 2 8

28 2819 28 19 27 19
(n3 ) (3m)19 =
(b) k = 19 =
19 19
C3 n m
5. For n = k + 1:
D
1 1 1
+ + +
13 35 (2(k + 1) 1)(2(k + 1) + 1)
k 1 2k 2 + 3k + 1 k+1
E
= + = =
2k + 1 (2k + 1)(2k + 3) (2k + 1) (2k + 3) 2k + 3
EP
6. a1 = 10, 000, r = 1.04, 60 20 = 40

1 (1.04)40
s40 = 10, 000 499, 675.83 pesos
1 (1.04)
D
1. (a) G, r = 4/5 (b) O (c) A, d = 5/2
2. We have a1 + a2 = 2a1 + d = 9 and a1 + a2 + a3 = 3a1 + 2d = 9 yielding

a1 = 9, d = 9. Using sn = 126, we get n = 7.
50
X 50
X
3. (a) (2i + 1)(i 3) = 2i2 5i 3 = 79, 472
i=1 i=1
30 30
r
X i2 2i + 1 X i1 435
(b) = =
i=1
4 i=1
2 2
274
k
8 3 8k 1 8 244k 8
4. (x ) = x = 24 4k = 0 = k = 6 = = 28
k x k 6
5. (a) For n = k + 1:
1 + 4 + 7 + + (3(k + 1) 2)
k(3k 1) 3k 2 + 5k + 2 (k + 1)(3k + 2)
= + (3k + 1) = =
2 2 2
(b) For n = k + 1: 3(n+1) + 7(n+1)1 + 8 = 7 (3n + 7n1 + 8) 4 3n 6 8,
where 4 3n is divisible by 12 for n 1, and 6 8 = 48 = 12(4).
PY

6 6 360
1. rev = rev = 432
5 5 1 rev
O
6
6 24
3. 216 = 216 = rad; s = 4 = cm
180 5 5 5 C
5. 2110 5(360 ) = 310
2
7 9 1 9 7 189
7. = ; r = cm; A = = cm2
6 2 2 2 6 16
D
s
5 2 2(15) 6 6
9. = 150 = ; A = 15 in ; r = 5 = = in
6
E
180

s 6
11. r = 6 in; s = 6 in; = = = 1 rad; 1 rad = 1 57.30
EP
r 6
8
13. cm
3

15. = 20 = rad; A = 800 cm2
D
9
v
u 2(800)
120 120 120 40
r = t = =
u cm; s = = cm
9 3
9
3
17. r = 6 cm; = 54 =
10

1 2 3 54
Area of shaded region = 2area of sector AOE = 2 (6) = cm2
2 10 5

1 2 1
19. Asegment = Asector Atriangle = (6)2 (3)(6 3) = (12 9 3) cm2
2 3 2
275
33 33 33
1. is coterminal with 8 = , and terminates in QI.
4 4 4 4
3. The secant function is positive in QI and QIV. The cotangent function is
negative in QII and QIV. Therefore, the angle is in QIV.
!
5 5 3 1
5. is in QII. The reference angle is , and therefore P = , .
6 6 6 2 2

2 13
7. tan = , cos > 0 = sec =
PY
3 3

13 2
sec + tan 17 4 13
= 3 3 =
sec tan 13 2 9
+
O
3 3

r 2 2 3
9. csc = 2, cos < 0; r = 2, y = 1, x = 3; sec = = =
C x 3 3
11. csc = 4 and not in QIII = in QIV
4
csc = = r = 4, y = 1
D
1
p
x = (4)2 (1)2 = 15, is in Quadrant IV, x = 15

E
x 15 r 4 15 y 1
cos = = sec = = sin = =
r 4 x 15 r 4

EP
r y 15 x
csc = = 4 tan = = cot = = 15
y x 15 y
p
13. x = 2, y = 4 = r = (2)2 + (4)2 = 2 5

x 5 r y 2 5
D
cos = = sec = = 5 sin = =

r 5 x r 5
r y x 1
csc = = 52 tan = = 2 cot = =
y x y 2

p 10
2 2
15. x = 2, y = 6, r = (2) + (6) = 2 10; sec = 10, csc =
3
10 80
sec2 csc2 = 10 =
9 9
11
3
17. cos = sin 2
3
= 2
and 3
2
< < 2 = =
6
276
19. f (x) = sin 2x + cos 2x + sec 2x + csc 2x + tan 2x + cot 2x

2

7 2
f = + + 2 2 1 1 = 2
8 2 2

2 7. domain = R; range =
4
,8

1. P = 1 = 8 3 3
4
9. y = 3 sec 2(x ) 3
3. 4 = 2 = k = 8
k
PY
5. y = 3 sin 34 8 2
5 = 13 3

9
+ 3 2
11. Asymptotes: x = 2
+ 2k, k Z
13. (a) P = 8, phase shift = 4 , domain = R, range = [3, 1]
O
C
(b) P = , phase shift = 6 , domain = x|x 6=

D
3
+ k, k Z , range = R
E
EP
D
277
(c) P = 4 2k

, phase
3 shift = 2
, domain = x|x 6= 2
+ 3
, k Z , range =
3 1
, 2 2 ,
PY

O
(d) P = , phase shift = 6 , domain = x|x 6=
+ k
,

k Z , range =
(, 1] [3, )
C 12 2
E D
EP
D
1
15. y = 8 cos 10 (t 10); at t = 10, y 4.32 (that is, the mass is located about
4.32 cm below the resting position)
278
sin x
tan x sin x sin x sin x 1
1. = cos x = 1 = sec x 1
sin x sin x sin x cos x sin x
cos2 A sin A + sin2 A cos2 A sin A + 1
3. sin A + = = =1
1 + sin A 1 + sin A 1 + sin A
1 1 cos x + sin x
csc x + sec x +
5. = sin x cos x = sin x cos x = cos x + sin x
cot x + tan x cos x sin x cos2 x + sin2 x
+
sin x cos x
PY
sin x cos x
sin x sin x + sin x cos x
tan x + sin x sin x
7. = cos x = cos x
csc x + cot x 1 cos x 1 + cos x
+
sin x sin x sin x
O
sin x(1 + cos x)
cos x sin2 x 1 cos2 x
= = =
1 + cos x cos x cos x
sin x
C
cos cot cot a
9. sin cos = sin2 = 2
= 2
=
sin csc 1 + cot 1 + a2
D
1 1 + sin a
csc a + 1 +1 1 + sin a
= sin a = sin a =
E
11.
csc a 1 1 1 sin a 1 sin a
1
sin a sin a
EP
cos a cos a cos2 a 1 sin2 a

13. = = = = 1 sin a
sec a + tan a 1 sin a 1 + sin a 1 + sin a
+
cos a cos a
1 1 1 + cos a + 1 cos a 2 2
= 2 csc2 a
D
15. + = = =
1 cos a 1 + cos a (1 cos a)(1 + cos a) 1 cos2 a sin2 a
sin sin
tan cos cos
17. = =
1 tan2 sin2 cos2 sin2
1 2
cos2 sin

cos2

sin
=
cos cos2 sin2
sin cos sin cos
= 2 2
=
cos (1 cos ) 2 cos2 1
279
cos sin
cot sin sec
19. = sin cos
sec csc 1 1

cos sin
cos2 sin2
= cos sin = cos2 sin2
sin cos

2 3 11
1. cos = sin = and in QIV = =
3 2 6
PY

sin
2
+ k B
3. tan A = tan + k B =

2 cos 2
+ k B

sin 2
+ k cos B cos 2
+ k sin B
=

cos 2
+ k cos B + sin 2
+ k sin B
O

sin 2
+ k cos B
=

sin
C 2
+ k sin B
= cot B
5. sin 105 cos 15 = sin(90 + 15 ) cos 15 = cos 15 cos 15 = 0

D
7. cot = 7, csc = 10, and and are acute

7 2 2 10 3 2
= cos = , sin = , sin = , cos =
E
10 10 10 10
cos( + ) = cos cos sin sin
! ! ! !
EP
7 2 3 2 2 10 2 5
= =
10 10 10 10 5
2
9. 3 sin x = 2 = sin x =
3
D
sin(x ) + sin(x + )
= sin x cos cos x sin + sin x cos + cos x sin

2 4
= 2 sin x cos = 2 (1) =
3 3
4 3
11. sin A = and A in QII = cos A =
5 5
4 3
cos B = and B in QIV = sin B =
5 5

4 4 3 3 7
(a) sin(A B) = =
5 5 5 5 25
280

3 4 4 3 24
(b) cos(A B) = + =
5 5 5 5 25
7
7
(c) tan(A B) = 25 =
24 24

25
cos(A B) < 0 and sin(A B) > 0 = A B in QII
4 5
13. Given: sin = and cos =
5 13
sin( + ) + sin( ) = sin cos + cos sin + sin cos cos sin

4 5 8
PY
= 2 sin cos = 2 =
5 13 13
1
15. csc A = 17, A in QI = tan A =
4
3
O
34
csc B = 3
, B in QI = tan B =
5
1 3
+
tan(A + B) = 4 5 = 1
1 3
C = A + B = 45
1
4 5
D
23
tan+ tan
23

3
17. 9 36 = tan + = tan = 1
23 9 36 4
E
1 tan tan
9 36
19. sin 2 = sin( + ) = sin cos + cos sin = 2 sin cos
EP
5

D
1. r = 6 cm, = 37.5 = 37.5 = rad

180 24

5 5
(a) s = 6 = cm
24 4

1 2 5 15
(b) A = (6) = cm2
2 24 4
p
2. x = 1, y = 2, r = (1)2 + (2)2 = 5

2 5 5 10 3 5
sin + cos + tan = + +2=
5 5 5
281
12 5 12
3. sin A = , A is in QII = cos A = , tan A =
13 13 5
5 3 4 3
cos B = , B is in QIV = sin B = , cos B = , tan A =
3 5 5 4
(a) cos(A B) = cos A cos B + sin A sin B

5 4 12 3 56
= + =
13 5 13 5 65

12 3
+
tan A + tan B 5 4 33
(b) tan(A B) = = =
1 + tan A tan B 12 3 56
1+
5 4
PY
tan 57 + tan 78
4. = tan(57 + 78) = tan 135 = 1
1 tan 57 tan 78
cos x tan x + sin x sin x p
5. = cos x + = 2 cos x = 2 1 sin2 x = 2 1 a2
O
tan x tan x
6. cos6 x + sin6 x = (cos2 x)3 + (sin2 x)3
= (cos2 x + sin2 x)(cos4 x cos2 x sin2 x + sin4 x)
C
= cos4 x cos2 x sin2 x + sin4 x
= cos4 x cos2 x(1 cos2 x) + (1 cos2 x)2
= cos4 x cos2 x + cos4 x + 1 2 cos2 x + cos4 x
D
= 3 cos4 x 3 cos2 x 1
E
7. Connect the three diagonals of the hexagon. In doing!this, the hexagon is

1 3
divided into 6 equilateral triangles. Hence, B , . Same coordinates
EP
2 2
for C, E and F , except that they will just vary in signs depending on the
quadrant.
x
1 2
8. y = 2 sin + 1 = y = 2 sin x+ 1
D
2 3 2 3
2
P = 4, Phase Shift = , Amplitude = 2, Range = [3, 1]
3
282

1. Asector = cm2 , = 30 = 30 = rad
3 180 6
1 2
= r = r = 2 cm = 2 = cm
3 2 6 6 3
p
2. x = 8, y = 6, r = (8)2 + (6)2 = 10
(sin + cos )2 = sin2 + 2 sin cos + cos2
PY

6 8 1
= 1 + 2 sin cos = 1 + 2 =
10 10 25
8
3. sin A =
17
O
15 8 7
sin A + cos A = cos A + sin A = + =
2 2 17 C17 17
4. sin 160 cos 35 sin 70 cos 55
= sin 20 cos 35 cos 20 sin 35

2 6
= sin(20 35) = sin(45 30) =
D
4

7 tan + tan 1+ 3
E
5. tan = tan + = 4 3 = = 2 3
12 4 3 1 3
1 tan tan
4 3
EP
3 4 4
6. cos A = , A is in QIII = sin A = , tan A =
5 5 3
24 24 7
tan B = , B is in QIII = sin B = , cos B = ,
7 25 25
D
(a) sin(A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B

4 7 3 24 4
= + =
5 25 5 25 5

4 24
1
1 tan A tan B 3 7 3
(b) cot(A + B) = = =
tan A + tan B 4 24 4
+
3 7
tan2 x tan2 x tan x
7. 3
= 2
= = sin x cos x
tan x + tan x tan x(1 + tan x) sec2 x
283
sin x
8. = sin x cos x
sec x
1
sin x cos x =
3
2
1 1
(sin x cos x) = 2
= sin2 x 2 sin x cos x + cos2 x =
3 9
1 8 4
= 1 2 sin x cos x = = 2 sin x cos x = = sin x cos x =
9 9 9
x 1
9. y = tan + 2 = tan x +2
18 3 3 6

P = 3, phase shift =
PY
6
O
C
E D

4 2 4 2 9 2
1. (a) sin 2 = 9
(c) tan 2 = 7
(e) csc 2 = 8
EP

7 9 7 2
(b) cos 2 = 9
(d) sec 2 = 7
(f) cot 2 = 8
1
3. cos(2t) = 8
7. cot 4 = 1/(tan 4) = 7/24

5. tan x = 1 5
9. sin2 5
= 2+ 2
and cos2 5
= 2 2
D
2 8 4 8 4
1 cos y 1 cos y sin y

1 1
tan 2
y 1 sin y sin y
11. 1 = =
tan y +1 sin y sin y + 1 + cos y
2 +1
1 + cos y 1 + cos y
1 cos2 y sin y sin y cos y
=
sin2 y + sin y + sin y cos y
sin2 y sin y sin y cos y
=
sin2 y + sin y + sin y cos y
sin y 1 cos y
= .
sin y + 1 + cos y
284

2+ 3
13. (a) cos 105 = 2
(b) tan 22.5 = 21
1. (a) sin[sin1 (1/2)] = 1/2

(b) cos[cos1 ( 2/2)] = 2/2

(c) tan[tan1 ( 3)] = 3

(d) sin[arctan( 3)] = 3/2

(e) cos[arccos( 2)] does not exist

PY
(f) tan[arcsin(1/4)] = 15/15

(g) cos(sin1 3/2) = 1/2
3. (a) sin[2 cos1 (4/5)] = 24/25

(b) cos[2 sin1 (5/13)] = 119/169
O
(c) sin[sin1 (3/5) + cos1 (5/13)] = 33/65

(d) cos[sin1 (1/2) cos1 (8/17)] = (15 + 8 3)/34

C
5. (a) arcsec( 2) = 3/4
(b) arccsc(2) = /6
D

(c) arccot 3 = /6
(d) [sec1 (1)] [cos1 (1)] = = 2
E

(e) 2 cot1 3 + 3 csc1 2 = 2(/6) + 3(/6) = 5/6
(f) csc1 0 does not exist
EP
7. Vertex angle should be /3.

D
1. Solution set: {/2, 3/2, 5/2, 7/2, ...} = {(2k + 1)/2 | k Z}
3. Solution set: {2k/3 | k Z}
5. Solution set: {/8, 3/8, 9/8, 11/8}
7. Solution set: {/2, /6}
9. The bullet should be fired with an angle of = 60 .
285
1. (a) (13, 7/3), (13, 13/3) (c) (15, 7/4), (15, 23/4)
(b) (0, 2), (0, /4)
3. (a) (3, 0) (c) (0, 5/2)

(b) (3 2/2, 3 2/2) (d) (4 3, 4)
5. (a) r = 4 cos 2
0 /6 /4 /3 /2 2/3 3/4 5/6 7/6 5/4 4/3 3/2
PY
r 4 2 0 2 4 2 0 2 4 2 0 2 4
(b)
O
C
E D
EP

119 120 169
1. (a) cos(2) = (c) tan(2) = 119 (e) csc(2) = 120
D
169
(b) sin(2) = 120
169
(d) sec(2) = 169
119
(f) cot(2) = 119
120
2 tan x
2. Hint: Use the double-angle identity for tangent tan(2x) = .
1 tan2 x

4 6 2
3. (a) tan 15 = 2 3 (b) tan 7.5 =
6 2

1 103 1 40 9
4. (a) tan cot = (b) cos sin =
6 3 41 41

3
5. Solution Set = 0, ,
2 2
286

5 7 11
6. Solution Set = 0, , 2, , , ,
6 6 6 6
7. r = 2 2 sin
0 /6 /4 /3 /2 2/3 3/4

r 2 3 2 2 2 3 4 2 3 2 2
5/6 7/6 5/4 4/3 3/2

r 3 2 1 2 + 2 2 + 3 0
PY
O
C
E D
EP
D
8. (a) (r, ) = (70, tan1 34 ) (d) (r, ) = (7, 0)

(b) (r, ) = (100 2, 4 ) (e) (r, ) = (2 2, 4 )
(c) (r, ) = (7, 2 ) (f) (r, ) = (13, tan1 12
5
)

9. (a) (x, y) = ( 32 , 3 2 3 ) (d) (x, y) = (5, 0)

(b) (x, y) = ( 452 2 , 452 2 ) (e) (x, y) = (2, 0)

(c) (x, y) = (1, 0) (f) (x, y) = ( 9 2 3 , 92 )
287
1. (a) cos(2) = 527
625
336
(b) sin(2) = 625 (c) tan(2) = 336
527
2. (a) cos2 24 0.8346 (b) sin2 24 0.1655 (c) tan2 24 0.1983

4 6 2
3. (a) tan(/12) = 2 3 (b) tan(/24) =
6 2

1 1 1 3 3 16 3
4. cos cos + cos =
7 5 35

3 4 5
5. Solution set = , , ,
4 4 3 3
PY

5 7 13 15 5
6. Solution set = , , , , ,
8 8 8 8 4 4
7. r = 2 + 2 cos
O
0 /6 /4 /3 /2 2/3 3/4

r 4 2+ 3 2+ 2 3 2 1 2 2
C
5/6 7/6 5/4 4/3 3/2

r 2 3 0 2 3 2 2 1 2
E D
EP
D
288
8. (a) (r, ) = (35, tan1 ( 43 )) (d) (r, ) = (5, )

(b) (r, ) = (100 2, 5
4
) (e) (r, ) = ( 2, 4 )
(c) (r, ) = (5, 2 ) (f) (r, ) = (17, tan1 ( 15
8
))

9. (a) (x, y) = (2 3, 2) (d) (x, y) = (5, 0)

(b) (x, y) = (50 2, 50 2) (e) (x, y) = (, 0)

(c) (x, y) = (1, 0) (f) (x, y) = ( 15
2
, 152 3 )
PY
O
C
E D
EP
D
289
References
[1] R.N. Aufmann, V.C. Barker, and R.D. Nation, College Trigonometry, Houghton
Mifflin Company, 2008.
[2] E.A. Cabral, M.L.A.N. De Las Penas, E.P. De Lara-Tuprio, F.F. Francisco,
I.J.L. Garces, R.M. Marcelo, and J.F. Sarmiento, Precalculus, Ateneo de
Manila University Press, 2010.
[3] R. Larson, Precalculus with Limits, Brooks/Cole, Cengage Learning, 2014.
PY
[4] L. Leithold, College Algebra and Trigonometry, Addison Wesley Longman
Inc., 1989, reprinted by Pearson Education Asia Pte. Ltd., 2002.
[5] M.L. Lial, J. Hornsby, and D.I. Schneider, College Algebra and Trigonometry
and Precalculus, Addison-Wesley Educational Publisher, Inc., 2001.
O
[6] J. Stewart, L. Redlin, and S. Watson, Precalculus: Mathematics for Calculus,
Brooks/Cole, Cengage Learning, 2012.
C
[7] M. Sullivan, Algebra & Trigonometry, Pearson Education, Inc., 2012.
[8] C. Young, Algebra and Trigonometry, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2013.
E D
EP
D
290

LM Precal Grade11 Sem 1

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

LM Precal Grade11 Sem 1

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PY

This learning resource was collaboratively developed and

reviewed by educators from public and private schools, colleges, and/or

Published by the Department of Education

Arnel D. Olofernes Mark Anthony C. Tolentino, Ph.D

Dr. Flordeliza F. Francisco Mark Anthony J. Vidallo

Management Team of the Precalculus Learners Material

Printed in the Philippines by Sunshine Interlinks Publishing House, Inc.

Department of Education-Bureau of Learning Resources (DepEd-BLR)

To the Precalculus Learners 1

DepEd Curriculum Guide for Precalculus 2

Lesson 1.1: Introduction to Conic Sections and Circles . . . . . . . . 7

Lesson 1.2: Parabolas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

1.2.3: Situational Problems Involving Parabolas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Lesson 1.3: Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

1.3.1: Definition and Equation of an Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Lesson 1.4: Hyperbolas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Lesson 1.5: More Problems on Conic Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Unit 2: Mathematical Induction 80

Lesson 2.1: Review of Sequences and Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

2.4.2: The Binomial Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

2.4.3: Terms of a Binomial Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Unit 3: Trigonometry 123

Lesson 3.1: Angles in a Unit Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Lesson 3.2: Circular Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Lesson 3.6: Double-Angle and Half-Angle Identities . . . . . . . . . . . 192

3.6.1: Double-Angle Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Lesson 3.7: Inverse Trigonometric Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

3.7.1: Inverse Sine Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Lesson 3.8: Trigonometric Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Answers to Odd-Numbered Exercises in Supplementary Problems

The Precalculus LM Team

Grade: 11 Semester: First Semester

model situations 2. define a circle. STEM_PC11AG-Ia-2

16. illustrate systems of nonlinear equations STEM_PC11AG-If-1

Induction mathematical formulate appropriate 2. differentiate a series from a sequence STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-2

***Suggestion for ICT-enhanced lesson when available and where appropriate

Code Book Legend

Learning Area and Science, Technology,

STEM_PC11AG Series and Mathematical Induction SMI

San Juanico Bridge, by Morten Nrbe, 21 June 2009,

https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File%3ASan Juanico Bridge 2.JPG. Public Domain.

Learning Outcomes of the Lesson

1.1.1. An Overview of Conic Sections

Figure 1.4 Figure 1.5 Figure 1.6

1.1.2. Definition and Equation of a Circle

make a sketch to see why). The equation is (x 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 25.

(x 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 36.

1.1.3. More Properties of Circles

After expanding, the standard equation

Center (3, 0), r = 4, Figure 1.10

Center (7, 1), r = 6, Figure 1.11

16x2 + 96x + 16y 2 40y = 315

Center 3, 54 , r = 5.5, Figure 1.12. 2

1.1.4. Situational Problems Involving Circles

Let us now take a look at some situational problems involving circles.

Solution. We first determine the center. It is the intersection of the perpendicular

More Solved Examples

(b) center (1, 5), diameter 8

(c) circle A in Figure 1.15

(g) center (2, 3), tangent to the x-

(a) The radius is 3, so the equation is x2 + y 2 = 9.

Figure 1.21 Figure 1.22

Supplementary Problems 1.1